You are on page 1of 1584

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT)

Help
Code No. LIT-12011147
Software Release 3.1
Issued November 9, 2007
Supersedes May 2, 2007

Chapter 1: Using This Help System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Accessing the CCT Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Help Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Help Window Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Navigation and Search Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Help Content Pane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Help Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Introduction Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Concepts Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Steps Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Screens Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Printing the Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Printing the Navigation and Search Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Printing a Specific Help Topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Printing the Entire Help System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Chapter 2: User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
CCT Commissioning Only Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Controller Application File (.caf) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 1


Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Logic Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
CCT User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Select System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Sideloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Define Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Quick Navigation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Control/Logic View Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84


Control View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Control View Module Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Control View Application Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Control View Status Colors and Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Right-Click Menus (Control View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Connections Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Parameters Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Balancer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Logic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Toolbar (Logic View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Right-Click Menus (Logic View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Control Block Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Logic View Status Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

2 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Details Tab (Inputs and Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107


Hardware View Tab (Inputs and Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Language Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Opening a Controller Application File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Changing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Switching between Control View and Logic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109


Printing Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Saving a Controller Application File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Closing a Controller Application File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Exiting CCT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
CCT User Interface Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Control View Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112


Logic View Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Details Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Summary Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Chapter 3: Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Configuration and Simulation Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Commissioning and Servicing Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Chapter 4: Upgrading System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
System Module and File Upgrades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Upgraded Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

New Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

System Selection Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 3


Backup Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Upgrading Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Modifying the System Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
System Upgrade (with Modules) Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

System Upgrade (without Modules) Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Chapter 5: Setting and Using Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Object Naming and Signal Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
System Selection Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Unit Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Import and Export Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Localization Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Setting Default Object Naming and Signal Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Filtering Object Naming and Signal Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148


Performing Custom Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Sorting Object Naming and Signal Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Copying and Pasting Naming and Signal Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150


Resetting Object Naming and Signal Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Exporting Object Naming and Signal Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Importing Object Naming and Signal Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151


Setting Default System Selection Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Resetting System Selection Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Exporting System Selection Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Importing System Selection Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Setting Localization Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

4 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Preferences-Object Naming and Signal Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Preferences-System Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155


Custom AutoFilter Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Preferences-Localization Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Chapter 6: Configuring a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
System Selection Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

System Types and Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

System Selection Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Control View Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Logic View Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Details Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Hardware Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Peer-to-Peer Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Application Logic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Selecting a System (Creating a New System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Opening an Existing Controller Application File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Entering or Viewing Job Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Renaming a System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Viewing and Modifying System Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Viewing and Modifying Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168


Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Hardware View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Viewing Controller Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Control View Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Viewing and Modifying Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Viewing and Modifying Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 5


Viewing and Modifying State Selection Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Viewing and Modifying a Module’s Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173


Changing an Input or Output Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Adding a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Renaming a Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Deleting a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Navigating between Control View and Logic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Viewing/Printing Application Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Logic View Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Selecting a Block from the Control Block Palette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Searching for a Block Using the Block Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176


Renaming a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Deleting a Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Exposing Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Connecting Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179


Adding a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Showing and Hiding Connection Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Deleting a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Changing the Hidden Edge Label of a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Configuring a Hybrid Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Configuring the Command Hierarchy Block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185


Configuring the Line Segment Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Configuring the MUX Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Configuring the Translation Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Setting the Default Element of a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Exporting a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Printing the Logic Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Creating Custom Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

6 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Using File > New: Custom Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Modifying an Existing Controller Application File or Selected System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201


Creating Custom Logic (Adding Modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Customizing State Selection Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Creating Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Creating a Sideloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Setting Up Peer-to-Peer Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Disabling Peer-to-Peer Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
New System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

CCT System Selection Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217


Controller Information Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Control View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Module Selection (New). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Input Selection (New). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219


Output Selection (New) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

State Selection (State Tables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Create State Selection Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Create State Selection Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Setup (Input or Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Logic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Command Hierarchy (Enum Output or Boolean Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Translation (Enum to Boolean or Boolean to Enum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Port Name Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225


Enum Set Change Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Line Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Block Selection (Block Finder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Default Element Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 7


Hidden Edge Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Port Exposure (For BACnet System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Port Exposure (For Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Port Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Confirm (Delete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Rename (Module/Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

System Rename Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Job Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

Chapter 7: Configuring the Local Controller Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . 231


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Local Controller Display Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Configuring the Local Controller Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Selecting Points to Appear on Display Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Selecting Points to Appear on Idle Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Specifying User Names and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234


Selecting Points for Read-Only Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Defining Display Page Display Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Defining Idle Page Display Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Specifying Local Controller Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

Specifying Display Timeout Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Defining Display Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237


Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Downloading the Application to the Display Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Downloading the Main Code of the Display Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Configure Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Define Idle Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

8 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Chapter 8: Simulating a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Simulation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Starting Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Stopping Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Control View Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242


Commanding Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Viewing and Modifying Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Viewing and Modifying Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Viewing Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Showing and Hiding Involvement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Navigating Between the Control View and a Module’s Logic View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Logic View Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244


Viewing Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Viewing and Modifying Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Simulation Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Command Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Simulation Exit - Confirmation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Chapter 9: Defining Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Hardware Definition Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Hardware Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 9


Defining Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Selecting a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248


Adding Points to an SAB Bus Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Deleting an SAB Bus Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Assigning Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Defining Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Controller Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Point Assignment Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Network Settings Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Controller Device Selection Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

SA Bus Device Selection Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Add IOM Devices Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Add LocalDisplay Devices Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Add NetSensor/NetSensorDuct Devices Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Add NetVSD Devices Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Add RT_IOM Devices Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Add Points Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257


Advanced Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Chapter 10: Loading Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Load Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Upload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Ethernet NAE Passthru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259


Bluetooth Wireless . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Boot Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

10 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Main Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Application Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260


Code Download Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Uploading a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Downloading a Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Load Device Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Chapter 11: Commissioning a System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
System and Device Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Ethernet NAE Passthru Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Bluetooth Wireless Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Balancer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Making Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Making an Ethernet Passthru Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Making a Bluetooth Wireless Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Commissioning a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Control View Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Viewing Controller Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Commanding Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Issuing Metasys Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Viewing and Modifying Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Viewing and Modifying Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269


Viewing Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Viewing a Module’s Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Showing and Hiding Involvement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 11


Commissioning Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Commissioning Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271


Logic View Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Viewing and Modifying Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Showing and Hiding Connection Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Panning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Navigating between Control View and Logic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Working with the Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Starting the Test Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273


Modifying Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Stopping the Test Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Using the Balancer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Editing the Balancing Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274


Autocalibrating the VAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Issuing a Flow Override Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Restoring Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Calculating the K-Factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Commissioning Device Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Setup Screen for Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Setup Screen for Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Controller Information Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Balancer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Auto Calibrate Command Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Flow Override Command Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Flow Restore Command Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Calculate K-Factors Command Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Chapter 12: Performing a Box Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

12 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Concepts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Box Flow Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Performing a Box Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Reading Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Saving the Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Canceling a Box Flow Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Box Flow Test Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Chapter 13: Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Application Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Application Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Core Logic Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286


Mechanical System Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Control Logic Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

Chapter 14: Air Handling Unit Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Mixed Air Single Duct Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Mixed Air Single Duct Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Modules (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Mixed Air Single Duct Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Fans (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Economizer Damper(s) (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

Temperature Control Strategy (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Occupancy Control (MASD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Heat Recovery (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 13


Coils (Preheat) (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Coils (Cooling) (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322


Coils (Reheat) (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Coils (Common Heating-Cooling) (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Humidification (MASD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Dehumidification Control (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Optional Features (MASD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Mixed Air Single Duct Control Logic Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Optional Sensors (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Optional Equipment (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Monitored Safeties (MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Mixed Air Dual Duct Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347


Mixed Air Dual Duct Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Modules (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Mixed Air Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Fans (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Economizer Damper(s) (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360


Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Temperature Control Strategy (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Occupancy Control (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

Heat Recovery (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Coils (Preheat) (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Humidification (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Optional Features (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Mixed Air Dual Duct Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Optional Sensors (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Optional Equipment (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

14 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Monitored Safeties (MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398


100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Modules (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Mechanical System Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400


Fans (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Temperature Control Strategy (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Occupancy Control (OASD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Heat Recovery (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410

Coils (Preheat) (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Coils (Cooling) (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421


Coils (Reheat) (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Coils (Common Heating-Cooling) (OASD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429

Humidification (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Dehumidification Control (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436


Optional Features (OASD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437

100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Optional Sensors (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439


Optional Equipment (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Monitored Safeties (OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444


100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Modules (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Fans (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Temperature Control Strategy (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452

Occupancy Control (OADD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453


Heat Recovery (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

Coils (Preheat) (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck) (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 15


Coils (Heating - Hot Deck) (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Humidification (OADD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475


Optional Features (OADD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

Optional Sensors (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480

Optional Equipment (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

Monitored Safeties (OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Rooftop Unit Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486


Rooftop Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Modules (RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Rooftop Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Fans (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Economizer Damper(s) (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

Temperature Control Strategy (RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

Occupancy Control (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495


Coils (Cooling) (RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

Coils (Heating) (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

Humidification (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505


Dehumidification Control (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Optional Features (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508

Rooftop Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510


Optional Sensors (RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Optional Equipment (RTU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Monitored Safeties (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514


Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515

Modules (MADD-MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515


Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Configuration Options (MADD-MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516

Air Handling Unit Configuration (MADD-MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

16 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Zone Configuration (MADD-MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559


Optional AHU Sensors (MADD-MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

Optional Equipment (MADD-MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561

Monitored Safeties (MADD-MZ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562

Chapter 15: Fan Coil Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Fan Coil Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Modules (FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

Fan Coil Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565


Supply Fan (FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Modules (FC Supply Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

Coils (FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

Modules (FC Coils) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

Optional Equipment (FC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571


Modules (FC Optional Equipment). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

Sensors (FC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572

Modules (FC Sensors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573


Monitored Safeties (FC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

Modules (FC Monitored Safeties) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

Misc (FC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574

Modules (FC Misc). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

Fan Coil Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576


Occupancy (FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

Modules (FC Occupancy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

Optional Features (FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

Modules (FC Optional Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

Chapter 16: Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . 581


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
Unit Ventilator Core Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 17


Modules (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

Unit Ventilator Mechanical System Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583


Supply Fan (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Modules (UV Supply Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584

Coils (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585


Modules (UV Coils) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587

Optional Equipment (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

Modules (UV Optional Equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

Sensors (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

Modules (UV Sensors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

Monitored Safeties (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593


Modules (UV Monitored Safeties) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Misc (UV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

Modules (UV Misc). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

Unit Ventilator Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595


ASHRAE Cycle Control (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

Modules (UV ASHRAE Cycle Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

Occupancy (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

Modules (UV Occupancy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598

Economizer Suitability (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599

Modules (UV Economizer Suitability). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599


Optional Features (UV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Modules (UV Optional Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601

Chapter 17: Heat Pump Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Heat Pump Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Modules (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

Heat Pump Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605


Supply Fan (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

Modules (HP Supply Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606

18 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Coils (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607

Modules (HP Coils) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607


Optional Equipment (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

Modules (HP Optional Equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

Sensors (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610

Modules (HP Sensors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611

Monitored Safeties (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

Modules (HP Monitored Safeties) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612

Misc (HP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

Modules (HP Misc). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613

Heat Pump Control Logic Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614


Occupancy (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614

Modules (HP Occupancy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

Economizer Suitability (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Modules (HP Economizer Suitability). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

Reversing Valve Output(s) (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618

Optional Features (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619

Modules (HP Optional Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

Chapter 18: VAV Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
VAV Single Duct Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
VAV Single Duct Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

Modules (VAV-SD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626

VAV Single Duct Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

Supply Damper Actuator (VAV-SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

Exhaust Damper Actuator (VAV-SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629

Box Fan (VAV-SD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630


Coils (VAV-SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

Optional Equipment (VAV-SD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

Sensors (VAV-SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 19


Misc (VAV-SD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638

VAV Single Duct Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639


Occupancy (VAV-SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

Heating Priority (VAV-SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

Optional Features (VAV-SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640

VAV Slave Single Duct Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644


VAV Slave Single Duct Core Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645

Modules (VAV-SD Slave). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645


VAV Slave Single Duct Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

Supply Damper Actuator (VAV-SD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647

Exhaust Damper Actuator (VAV-SD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

Box Fan (VAV-SD Slave). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649

Coils (VAV-SD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650

Optional Equipment (VAV-SD Slave). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652

Sensors (VAV-SD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653

VAV Slave Single Duct Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654

Smoke Control Support UL-864-UUKL (VAV-SD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654

VAV Dual Duct Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655


VAV Dual Duct Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

Modules (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

VAV Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

Cold Deck Damper Actuator (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658

Hot Deck Damper Actuator (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659

Flow Sensor Locations (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660


Exhaust Damper Actuator (VAV-DD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662

Coils (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663

Optional Equipment (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

Sensors (VAV-DD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666

Misc (VAV-DD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668

VAV Dual Duct Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

20 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Control Scheme (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669

Occupancy (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671


Optional Features (VAV-DD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

VAV Slave Dual Duct Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675


VAV Slave Dual Duct Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676

Modules (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676

VAV Slave Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

Cold Deck Damper Actuator (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677

Hot Deck Damper Actuator (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678

Flow Sensor Locations (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

Exhaust Damper Actuator (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681


Coils (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 682

Optional Equipment (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684

Sensors (VAV-DD Slave). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684

VAV Slave Dual Duct Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Smoke Control Support UL-864-UUKL (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685

Control Scheme (VAV-DD Slave) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

Master and Slave VAV Box Peer-to-Peer Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688


VAV Master and Slave Single Duct Peer References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688

VAV Master and Slave Dual Duct Peer References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690

Chapter 19: Sideloop Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
Sideloop Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
Feedback Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692

Modules (Feedback Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694

Binary Interlock Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696

Modules (Binary Interlock Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696

Create State Selection Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697

Chapter 20: Central Plant Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 21


Central Cooling Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699

Central Cooling Core Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

Modules (CC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

Central Cooling Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

Cooling System Enable (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

Chillers (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701

Condenser Water System (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716


Secondary Variable Speed Chill Water Pumping (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723

Central Cooling Control Logic Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727

Chiller Options (CC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727

Condenser Options (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731

Basin Options (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 732

Secondary Chill Water Options (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734

General Options (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736

Central Heating Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737

Central Heating Core Logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737


Modules (CH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737

Central Heating Mechanical System Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738

Heating System Enable (CH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738


Hot Water/Steam Boilers (CH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739

Heat Exchangers (CH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751

Secondary Variable Speed Hot Water Pumping (CH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759


Zone Loop Control (CH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764

Central Heating Control Logic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766

Boiler Options (CH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766

Heat Exchanger Options (CH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769

Secondary Hot Water Options (CH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770

General Options (CH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771

22 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Chapter 21: Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Module Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
Module Category Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Module Group Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774


Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Module Use in Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775

Primary States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776

Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776

Chapter 22: Network Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777


Generator Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778
Enable Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
Sensor and Setpoint Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 782
Rotation and Switch Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 786
Generic (Add New) Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 788
Chapter 23: Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
Chapter 24: Setpoint Determination/Misc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 791
Central Plant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
Add-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792

Module Use in Applications (Add-8). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792

Attributes (Add-8). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793

Subtract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794

Module Use in Applications (Subtract). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794

Attributes (Subtract) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794

Device Enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 23


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

Economizer Availability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

Module Use in Applications (Economizer Availability) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795

Attributes (Economizer Availability) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796

Reliability (Economizer Availability) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797

Economizer Availability RA-T Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

Module Use in Applications (Economizer Availability RA-T Compare) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

Attributes (Economizer Availability RA-T Compare) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799

Reliability (Economizer Availability RA-T Compare) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 799

Device Mode Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

Flow Status Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

Module Use in Applications (Flow Status Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

Attributes (Flow Status Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801

Primary States (Flow Status Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801


Reliability (Flow Status Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801

Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802

Module Use in Applications (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel) . . . . . . . . . . 802

Attributes (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802

Primary States (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

Reliability (Staged Device Enable Determination Parallel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803

Staged Device Enable Determination Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Module Use in Applications (Staged Device Enable Determination Series) . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Attributes (Staged Device Enable Determination Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

Primary States (Staged Device Enable Determination Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

24 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Reliability (Staged Device Enable Determination Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

Status Alarm Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806

Module Use in Applications (Status Alarm Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806

Attributes (Status Alarm Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Primary States (Status Alarm Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Reliability (Status Alarm Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

SummerWinter Mode Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

Module Use in Applications (SummerWinter Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809

Attributes (SummerWinter Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810


Primary States (SummerWinter Mode Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810

Reliability (SummerWinter Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810

WarmupCooldown Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811
Module Use in Applications (WarmupCooldown Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 811

Attributes (WarmupCooldown Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812

Primary States (WarmupCooldown Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812

Reliability (WarmupCooldown Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812

Fan Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813

Module Use in Applications (Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813

Attributes (Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814

Reliability (Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814

Unocc Heating Fan Lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815

Module Use in Applications (Unocc Heating Fan Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815

Attributes (Unocc Heating Fan Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 25


Reliability (Unocc Heating Fan Lockout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 816

Flow Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817

Flow Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817
Module Use in Applications (Flow Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818

Attributes (Flow Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819

Pickup Gain Calculations (Flow Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820

Reliability (Flow Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 820

Flow Differential Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821
Module Use in Applications (Flow Differential Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 821

Attributes (Flow Differential Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822

Reliability (Flow Differential Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 822

Flow Sum Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823

Module Use in Applications (Flow Sum Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823

Attributes (Flow Sum Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824


Reliability (Flow Sum Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824

Setpoint Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825
Damper Minimum Position Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 825

Module Use in Applications (Damper Minimum Position Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826

Attributes (Damper Minimum Position Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826

Reliability (Damper Minimum Position Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 826

Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827

Module Use in Applications (Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827

Attributes (Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828

26 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Reliability (Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 828

Discharge Air Setpoint Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829

Module Use in Applications (Discharge Air Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 829

Attributes (Discharge Air Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830

Reliability (Discharge Air Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830

Discharge Air Setpoint Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

Module Use in Applications (Discharge Air Setpoint Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

Attributes (Discharge Air Setpoint Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832

Reliability (Discharge Air Setpoint Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832


Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833

Module Use in Applications (Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833

Attributes (Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834


Reliability (Flow Differential Setpoint Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834

Setpoint Reset by OA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835

Module Use in Applications (Setpoint Reset by OA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835

Attributes (Setpoint Reset by OA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836

Reliability (Setpoint Reset by OA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836


Summer Winter Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837

Module Use in Applications (Summer Winter Compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 837

Attributes (Summer Winter Compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838

Reliability (Summer Winter Compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838

VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839

Module Use in Applications (VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation) . . . . . 839

Attributes (VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 27


Reliability (VAV Dual Duct Constant Flow Endpoint Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 840

VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 841

Module Use in Applications (VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination). . . . . . . . . . . 841

Attributes (VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842

Reliability (VAV Dual Duct Minimum Flow Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842

VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843

Module Use in Applications (VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation) . . . . . . 844

Attributes (VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844

Reliability (VAV Dual Duct Variable Flow Endpoint Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845


VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846

Module Use in Applications (VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination) . . . . . . . . . 846

Attributes (VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 847


Reliability (VAV Single Duct Minimum Flow Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 848

ZN-T Setpoint Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 849

Module Use in Applications (ZN-T Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852

Attributes (ZN-T Setpoint Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 852

Reliability (ZN-T Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854

Sideloop Signal Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855

Sideloop Average Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855

Attributes (Sideloop Average Inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856

Reliability (Sideloop Average Inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 856


Sideloop Maximum Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857

Attributes (Sideloop Maximum Selector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857

28 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Reliability (Sideloop Maximum Selector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 857

Sideloop Minimum Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858

Attributes (Sideloop Minimum Selector). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858

Reliability (Sideloop Minimum Selector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 858

Sideloop Sum Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

Attributes (Sideloop Sum Inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

Reliability (Sideloop Sum Inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859

Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860
Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 860

Module Use in Applications (Last Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 861

Attributes (Last Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862


Reliability (Last Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 862

Damper Trouble Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863
Damper Trouble Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863

Module Use in Applications (Damper Trouble Detection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863

Attributes (Damper Trouble Detection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864

Reliability (Damper Trouble Detection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864

Chapter 25: State Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 865
Alarm Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866

Latching Alarm Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866

Module Use in Applications (Latching Alarm Manager) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 866

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 29


Attributes (Latching Alarm Manager) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868

Primary States (Latching Alarm Manager). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869


Reliability (Latching Alarm Manager) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869

Central Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870

Calculate Building Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 871

Module Use in Applications (Calculate Building Load) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874

Attributes (Calculate Building Load). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874

Load Calculation v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875
Module Use in Applications (Load Calculation v2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878

Attributes (Load Calculation v2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 879

Central Heating Low Temp Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Module Use in Applications (Central Heating Low Temp Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880

Attributes (Central Heating Low Temp Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881

Primary States (Central Heating Low Temp Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882

Reliability (Central Heating Low Temp Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882

Count On Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883
Module Use in Applications (Count On Inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883

Attributes (Count On Inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883

Device Availability Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884

Module Use in Applications (Device Availability Calculation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884

Attributes (Device Availability Calculation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885


PID Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886

Module Use in Applications (PID Sequencer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886

30 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Attributes (PID Sequencer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 887

Plant Sequencing-Building Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888

Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Building Load) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888

Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Building Load) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889

Plant Sequencing-Decouple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Decouple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890

Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Decouple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891

Primary States (Plant Sequencing-Decouple) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891

Plant Sequencing-Discrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892

Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Discrete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892

Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Discrete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893

Primary States (Plant Sequencing-Discrete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894


Plant Sequencing-Modulating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895

Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-Modulating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895

Attributes (Plant Sequencing-Modulating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896

Primary States (Plant Sequencing-Modulating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897

Plant Sequencing-OA-T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898

Module Use in Applications (Plant Sequencing-OA-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898

Attributes (Plant Sequencing-OA-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899

System Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900

Module Use in Applications (System Enable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900

Attributes (System Enable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901

Tower Sequencing-1 Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 31


Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing 1 Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 902

Attributes (Tower Sequencing 1 Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903


Tower Sequencing-2 Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing-2 Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905

Attributes (Tower Sequencing-2 Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906

Tower Sequencing-3 Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908

Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing-3 Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 908

Attributes (Tower Sequencing-3 Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909

Tower Sequencing-Vernier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911

Module Use in Applications (Tower Sequencing-Vernier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 911

Attributes (Tower Sequencing-Vernier) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912

Device Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915

Pass Through (Device Enable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915

Module Use in Applications (Device Enable Pass Through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916

Availability Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
Module Use in Applications (Availability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917

Attributes (Availability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918

Primary States (Availability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919

Reliability (Availability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 919

Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination) . . . . . . . 920

Attributes (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921

Primary States (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922

32 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Reliability (Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922

Heat Recovery Suitability Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 923

Attributes (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924

Primary States (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925

Reliability (Heat Recovery Suitability Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925

General Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926

Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 926

Dehumidification Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927

Module Use in Applications (Dehumidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927

Attributes (Dehumidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 928

Primary States (Dehumidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929


Reliability (Dehumidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929

Emergency Mode Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
Module Use in Applications (Emergency Mode Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930

Attributes (Emergency Mode Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931

Primary States (Emergency Mode Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931


Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932

Module Use in Applications (Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . 932

Attributes (Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933

Primary States (Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 934

Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935

Attributes (Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 33


Primary States (Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 936

Humidification Sequencing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937

Module Use in Applications (Humidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 937

Attributes (Humidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938

Primary States (Humidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938

Reliability (Humidification Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938

Loss of Airflow Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939

Module Use in Applications (Loss of Airflow Sequencing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939

Attributes (Loss of Airflow Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 939


Primary States (Loss of Airflow Sequencing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 941

Start Stop Sequencing (AHU 100% OA). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942

Module Use in Applications (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943
Attributes (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 943

Primary States (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945

Reliability (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU 100% OA]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946

Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 947

Module Use in Applications (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
Attributes (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949

Primary States (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

Reliability (Start Stop Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951

Occupied Sequencing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 952

Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD]). . . . . . . . . . . . . 954

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955

34 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 955

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OADD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 956


Occupied Sequencing (AHU 100% OASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 957

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 958

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 959

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU 100% OASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960

Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 961


Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 962

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963

Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD w HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 965

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MADD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966

Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 967

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 968

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 970

Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD w HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 971

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 972

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 35


Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 973

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [AHU MASD w HR]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974


Occupied Sequencing (Single Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 975

Attributes (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976

Primary States (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

Reliability (Occupied Sequencing [Single Device]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 977

Occupied Zone Sequencing (FC/AHU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [FC/AHU]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978


Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [FC/AHU]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [FC/AHU]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979

Occupied Zone Sequencing (HP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980
Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [HP]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [HP]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [HP]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 982

Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 1]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983
Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 1]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 984

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 1]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985

Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 2]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 986

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 2]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 2]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988

Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989

36 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 3]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 3]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990


Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle 3]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 990

Occupied Zone Sequencing (UV Cycle W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle W]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991

Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle W]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [UV Cycle W]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 993

Occupied Zone Sequencing (VAV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994

Module Use in Applications (Occupied Zone Sequencing [VAV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994


Attributes (Occupied Zone Sequencing [VAV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995

Primary States (Occupied Zone Sequencing [VAV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 996

Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997
Pass Through (Boolean, Enum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997

Module Use in Applications (Pass Through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 997


Attributes (Pass Through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

Reliability (Pass Through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

State Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999

Application Mode Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

Module Use in Applications (Application Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000

Attributes (Application Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001

Primary States (Application Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001


Energy Hold Off Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002

Module Use in Applications (Energy Hold Off Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 37


Attributes (Energy Hold Off Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003

Primary States (Energy Hold Off Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004


Reliability (Energy Hold Off Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004

Fan Alarm Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005

Module Use in Applications (Fan Alarm Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1005

Attributes (Fan Alarm Status). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006

Primary States (Fan Alarm Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006

Reliability (Fan Alarm Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006

Fan Determination (Terminal Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [Terminal Units]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007

Attributes (Fan Determination [Terminal Units]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008

Primary States (Fan Determination [Terminal Units]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009

Reliability (Fan Determination [Terminal Units]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1009


Occupancy Mode Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010

Module Use in Applications (Occupancy Mode Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011

Attributes (Occupancy Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1011

Primary States (Occupancy Mode Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012

Reliability (Occupancy Mode Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1013


Occupancy Mode Determination (MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014

Module Use in Applications (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014

Attributes (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

Primary States (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

Reliability (Occupancy Mode Determination [MZ]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015

System Mode Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016

Module Use in Applications (System Mode Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016

38 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Attributes (System Mode Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017

Primary States (System Mode Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017


Unit Enable Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018

Module Use in Applications (Unit Enable Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018

Attributes (Unit Enable Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019

Primary States (Unit Enable Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020

Reliability (Unit Enable Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020

Zone Low Limit Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021

Module Use in Applications (Zone Low Limit Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021


Attributes (Zone Low Limit Determination). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022

Primary States (Zone Low Limit Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022

Reliability (Zone Low Limit Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022

Unoccupied Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023

Unoccupied Sequencing (Common) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025


Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [Common]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025

Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1026

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028

Unoccupied Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air ZN-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-T]) . . . . . . . . 1029

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 39


Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-T]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-T]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031


Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [AHU Mixed Air ZN-T]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031

Unoccupied Sequencing (MZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034

Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [MZ]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034

Unoccupied Sequencing (UV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037

Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [UV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037


Unoccupied Sequencing (VAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038

Module Use in Applications (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038

Attributes (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039

Primary States (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040

Reliability (Unoccupied Sequencing [VAV]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040

VAV Specific Sequencing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041

Autocalibration Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041

Module Use in Applications (Autocalibration Sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042

Attributes (Autocalibration Sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1042


Primary States (Autocalibration Sequence) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043

Balancer Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044

40 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Module Use in Applications (Balancer Override) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1044

Attributes (Balancer Override) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045


Primary States (Balancer Override) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047

Reliability (Balancer Override) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047

Box Flow Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048

Module Use in Applications (Box Flow Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048

Attributes (Box Flow Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1049

Primary States (Box Flow Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1050

Reliability (Box Flow Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051

WarmupCooldown Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052

Module Use in Applications (WarmupCooldown Sequencing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052

Attributes (WarmupCooldown Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1053

Primary States (WarmupCooldown Sequencing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054


Reliability (WarmupCooldown Sequencing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054

VAV Fan Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
Fan Determination (VAV Parallel Flow Based) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055

Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based]) . . . . . . . . . 1055

Attributes (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1056

Primary States (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057

Reliability (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Flow Based]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057

Fan Determination (VAV Parallel Temp Based) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058

Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based]) . . . . . . . . 1058
Attributes (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059

Primary States (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059

Reliability (Fan Determination [VAV Parallel Temp Based]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1059

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 41


Fan Determination (VAV Series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060
Module Use in Applications (Fan Determination [VAV Series]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060

Attributes (Fan Determination [VAV Series]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061

Primary States (Fan Determination [VAV Series]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061

Reliability (Fan Determination [VAV Series]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061

Chapter 26: Output Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063


Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1063
Cascaded Zone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064

Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1065

Module Use in Applications (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . 1066

Attributes (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066

Primary States (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067


Reliability (Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067

Flow Setpoint (VAV Dual Duct). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068

Module Use in Applications (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1068

Attributes (Flow Setpoint [VAV Attributes (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct]) . . . . . . . . . . 1069

Primary States (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070

Reliability (Flow Setpoint [VAV Dual Duct]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1070

Flow Setpoint (VAV Single Duct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071
Module Use in Applications (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1071

Attributes (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1072

Primary States (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073

Reliability (Flow Setpoint [VAV Single Duct]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073

HD Constant Flow Setpoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074

42 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Module Use in Applications (HD Constant Flow Setpoint) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1074

Attributes (HD Constant Flow Setpoint) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075


Reliability (HD Constant Flow Setpoint) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1075

Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076

Module Use in Applications (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1076

Attributes (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077

Primary States (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077

Reliability (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1077

Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1078
Module Use in Applications (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct) . . . . . . . . . 1078

Attributes (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079

Primary States (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079

Reliability (Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control Dual Duct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1079

Central Plant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080

Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1080

Module Use in Applications (Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 1080

Attributes (Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081


Primary States (Heat Exchanger with Return Water Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1082

Plant Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083
Module Use in Applications (Plant Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1083

Attributes (Plant Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1084

Primary States (Plant Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085

Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086

Module Use in Applications (Pump Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1086

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 43


Attributes (Pump Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1087

Primary States (Pump Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1088


Pump Control v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089

Module Use in Applications (Pump Control v2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1089

Attributes (Pump Control v2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090

Primary States (Pump Control v2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1091

Rotation Small . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092

Module Use in Applications (Rotation Small). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1092

Attributes (Rotation Small) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093


Primary States (Rotation Small). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1095

Reliability (Rotation Small). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1096

Secondary Pump PID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097
Module Use in Applications (Secondary Pump PID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097

Attributes (Secondary Pump PID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1097

Primary States (Secondary Pump PID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098

Sequenced Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099

Module Use in Applications (Sequenced Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099


Attributes (Sequenced Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1099

Tower Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1100

Module Use in Applications (Tower Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1100

Attributes (Tower Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1101

Tower Control v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103

Module Use in Applications (Tower Control v2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103

Attributes (Tower Control v2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1104

44 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Primary States (Tower Control v2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105

Damper Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106

Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106

Attributes (Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107

Primary States (Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1108

Damper Control with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1109


Attributes (Damper Control with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110

Primary States (Damper Control with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111

Damper Control - AHU Econ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112
Damper Control for Economizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for Economizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1112


Attributes (Damper Control for Economizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113

Primary States (Damper Control for Economizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114

Reliability (Damper Control for Economizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114

Damper Control for Relief Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for Relief Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116


Attributes (Damper Control for Relief Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117

Primary States (Damper Control for Relief Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118

Reliability (Damper Control for Relief Fan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118

Damper Control for Volume Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control for Volume Matching) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 45


Attributes (Damper Control for Volume Matching) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120

Primary States (Damper Control for Volume Matching). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121


Reliability (Damper Control for Volume Matching). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121

Damper Control - AHU Min OA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122

Min OA Damper 2 Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122

Module Use in Applications (Min OA Damper 2 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122

Attributes (Min OA Damper 2 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123

Primary States (Min OA Damper 2 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124

Reliability (Min OA Damper 2 Position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124


Min OA Damper Proportional Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125

Module Use in Applications (Min OA Damper Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1125

Attributes (Min OA Damper Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126

Primary States (Min OA Damper Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127

Reliability (Min OA Damper Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127

Min OA Fan Constant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128

Module Use in Applications (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128

Attributes (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129


Primary States (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130

Reliability (Min OA Fan Constant Capacity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1130

Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1131

Module Use in Applications (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control). . . . . . . . . . . 1131

Attributes (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1132


Primary States (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134

Reliability (Min OA Fan Variable Capacity Flow Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134

Damper Control - VAV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135

46 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135

Damper Control (VAV Exhaust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135

Attributes (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1136

Primary States (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137

Reliability (Damper Control [VAV Exhaust]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1137

Damper Control (VAV Supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138

Module Use in Applications (Damper Control [VAV Supply]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138

Attributes (Damper Control [VAV Supply]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139


Primary States (Damper Control [VAV Supply]) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1140

Reliability (Damper Control [VAV Supply]). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141

Fan Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
Fan Proportional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142

Module Use in Applications (Fan Proportional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142


Attributes (Fan Proportional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1143

Primary States (Fan Proportional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144

Reliability (Fan Proportional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144

Parallel Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145

Module Use in Applications (Parallel Fan Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145


Attributes (Parallel Fan Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145

Reliability (Parallel Fan Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145

Single Speed Fan Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146

Module Use in Applications (Single Speed Fan Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146

Attributes (Single Speed Fan Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 47


Primary States (Single Speed Fan Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147

Reliability (Single Speed Fan Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147


Fan Three Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148

Module Use in Applications (Fan Three Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148

Attributes (Fan Three Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1149

Primary States (Fan Three Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150

Reliability (Fan Three Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150

Fan VAV Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151

Module Use in Applications (Fan VAV Series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151


Attributes (Fan VAV Series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152

Primary States (Fan VAV Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152

Reliability (Fan VAV Series). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1152

Fan Control - AHU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153

Fan Single Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154

Module Use in Applications (Fan Single Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154

Attributes (Fan Single Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155

Primary States (Fan Single Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155


Reliability (Fan Single Speed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155

Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156

Module Use in Applications (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156

Attributes (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156

Primary States (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157

Reliability (Fan Relief Variable Capacity BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157

Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158

48 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Module Use in Applications (Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1158

Attributes (Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159


Primary States (Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160

Reliability (Fan Relief BSP for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1160

Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161

Module Use in Applications (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161

Attributes (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162

Primary States (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163

Reliability (Fan Return or Exhaust BSP Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163

Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164

Module Use in Applications (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164

Attributes (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165

Primary States (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166


Reliability (Fan RF or EF BSP for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1166

Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167

Module Use in Applications (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167

Attributes (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168

Primary States (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169


Reliability (Fan Return or Exhaust Tracking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1169

Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170

Module Use in Applications (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control) . . . . . . . . . 1170

Attributes (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1171

Primary States (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172

Reliability (Fan Return or Exhaust Volume Match Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1173

Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 49


Module Use in Applications (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL). . . . . . . . . . . . 1174

Attributes (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175


Primary States (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1176

Reliability (Fan RF or EF Vol Match for UL-864-UUKL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1177

Fan Supply Duct Static Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178

Module Use in Applications (Fan Supply Duct Static Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1178

Attributes (Fan Supply Duct Static Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1179

Primary States (Fan Supply Duct Static Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180

Reliability (Fan Supply Duct Static Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1180

Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181

Module Use in Applications (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL). . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181

Attributes (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182

Primary States (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183


Reliability (Fan Supply Duct Static for UL-864-UUKL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183

Heating & Cooling Control - 2 Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
2 Pipe 2 Position Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1185

Attributes (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1186

Primary States (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1187

Reliability (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1188

2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1189

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . 1189
Attributes (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190

Primary States (2 Pipe 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192

2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194

50 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1194

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . 1194
Attributes (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1195

Primary States (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1197

Reliability (2 Pipe FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198

2 Pipe Proportional Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199

Attributes (2 Pipe Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200

Primary States (2 Pipe Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1201

Reliability (2 Pipe Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202


2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1203

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit). . . . . . . . . 1203

Attributes (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204


Primary States (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205

2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207

Module Use in Applications (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207

Attributes (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208

Primary States (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210


Reliability (2 Pipe Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1211

Heating & Cooling Control - Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212

Cooling 2 Position Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1212

Module Use in Applications (Cooling 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213

Attributes (Cooling 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213

Primary States (Cooling 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214

Reliability (Cooling 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1214

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 51


Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1215
Module Use in Applications (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification) . . . 1215

Attributes (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1216

Primary States (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217

Reliability (Cooling FBPD 2 Position Valve with Dehumidification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218

Cooling Proportional Valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219

Module Use in Applications (Cooling Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1219

Attributes (Cooling Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220

Primary States (Cooling Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220


Reliability (Cooling Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1220

Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1221

Module Use in Applications (Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification). . . . . . . 1221


Attributes (Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1222

Primary States (Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1223

Reliability (Cooling Proportional Valve with Dehumidification). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1224

Cooling Staged Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225

Module Use in Applications (Cooling Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1225


Attributes (Cooling Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1226

Primary States (Cooling Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227

Reliability (Cooling Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1227

Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228

Module Use in Applications (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification) . . . . . . . . . 1228

Attributes (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1228

Primary States (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230

Reliability (Cooling Staged Outputs with Dehumidification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230

52 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Heating & Cooling Control - Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231

Heat Pump Staged Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231

Module Use in Applications (Heat Pump Staged Compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1231

Attributes (Heat Pump Staged Compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1232

Primary States (Heat Pump Staged Compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234

Reliability (Heat Pump Staged Compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1234

Heating & Cooling Control - Heat Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235

Heat Recovery Glycol Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1235

Attributes (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236

Primary States (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237


Reliability (Heat Recovery Glycol Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237

Heat Recovery Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238

Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1238

Attributes (Heat Recovery Wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1239

Primary States (Heat Recovery Wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240

Reliability (Heat Recovery Wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1240

Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241
Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers) . . . . . 1241

Attributes (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1242

Primary States (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1243

Reliability (Heat Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass Dampers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244

Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1245

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 53


Module Use in Applications (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers) . . . . . . . . . . 1245

Attributes (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1246


Primary States (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247

Reliability (Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass Dampers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1248

Heating & Cooling Control - Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1249

Heating 2 Position Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
Module Use in Applications (Heating 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250

Attributes (Heating 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1251

Primary States (Heating 2 Position Valve). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252

Reliability (Heating 2 Position Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252

Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253

Module Use in Applications (Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . 1253
Attributes (Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253

Primary States (Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255

Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256

Module Use in Applications (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . 1256

Attributes (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1257
Primary States (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1258

Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1259

Module Use in Applications (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit). . . . . . . . . 1259

Attributes (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1260

Primary States (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1261

Reliability (Heating FBPD 2 Position Valve with Low Limit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1262

Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263

54 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Module Use in Applications (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . 1263

Attributes (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264


Primary States (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266

Reliability (Heating FBPD Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267

Heating Proportional Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268

Module Use in Applications (Heating Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1268

Attributes (Heating Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269

Primary States (Heating Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270

Reliability (Heating Proportional Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270

Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271

Module Use in Applications (Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . 1271

Attributes (Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272

Primary States (Heating Proportional Valve with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273
Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274

Module Use in Applications (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274

Attributes (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1275

Primary States (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276

Reliability (Heating Proportional Valve with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277


Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278

Module Use in Applications (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278

Attributes (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1279

Primary States (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280

Reliability (Heating Sequenced Valves with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1281

Heating Staged Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282

Module Use in Applications (Heating Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1282

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 55


Attributes (Heating Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1283

Primary States (Heating Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284


Reliability (Heating Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1284

Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285

Module Use in Applications (Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit). . . . . . . . . . 1285

Attributes (Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1285

Primary States (Heating Staged Outputs with DA-T Low Limit). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1287

Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288

Module Use in Applications (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
Attributes (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289

Primary States (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1290

Reliability (Heating Staged Outputs with Low Limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1291

Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1292

Module Use in Applications (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control). . . 1292

Attributes (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1293

Primary States (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294

Reliability (Preheat Proportional Valve with Return Water Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295

Humidity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296

Humidification Packaged Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296

Module Use in Applications (Humidification Packaged Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296

Attributes (Humidification Packaged Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297

Primary States (Humidification Packaged Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298


Reliability (Humidification Packaged Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298

Humidification Proportional Steam Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299

56 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Module Use in Applications (Humidification Proportional Steam Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1299

Attributes (Humidification Proportional Steam Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300


Primary States (Humidification Proportional Steam Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301

Reliability (Humidification Proportional Steam Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1301

Humidification Scrubber Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302

Module Use in Applications (Humidification Scrubber Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302

Attributes (Humidification Scrubber Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303

Primary States (Humidification Scrubber Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304

Reliability (Humidification Scrubber Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304

Humidification Staged Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305

Module Use in Applications (Humidification Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1305

Attributes (Humidification Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306

Primary States (Humidification Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307


Reliability (Humidification Staged Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307

Lighting Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308
Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308

Module Use in Applications (Lighting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308

Attributes (Lighting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309

Primary States (Lighting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310

Reliability (Lighting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1310

Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311

Blocking Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311

Module Use in Applications (Motor Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311

Attributes (Motor Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1312

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 57


Multizone Zone Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313

Zone Damper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314

Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314

Attributes (Zone Damper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1314

Primary States (Zone Damper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315

Reliability (Zone Damper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315


Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316

Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1316

Attributes (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1317

Primary States (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319

Reliability (Zone Damper w 2 Position Heating Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1319

Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320

Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve). . . . . . . . . . . 1320

Attributes (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1321


Primary States (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322

Reliability (Zone Damper w Proportional Heating Valve). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323

Zone Damper w Staged Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324

Module Use in Applications (Zone Damper w Staged Heating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1324

Attributes (Zone Damper w Staged Heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1325


Primary States (Zone Damper w Staged Heating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327

Reliability (Zone Damper w Staged Heating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1327

Pass Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328

Pass Through (Enum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328

58 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Module Use in Applications (Pass Through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1328

Attributes (Pass Through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329


Reliability (Pass Through) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329

Sideloop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330

Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1330

Attributes (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331

Primary States (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331

Reliability (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Analog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331

Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332

Attributes (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333

Primary States (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333

Reliability (Sideloop Interlock Binary to Binary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1333

Sideloop PI Proportional Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334

Attributes (Sideloop PI Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1334

Primary States (Sideloop PI Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335

Reliability (Sideloop PI Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1335

Sideloop PI With Reset Proportional Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336

Attributes (Sideloop PI with Reset Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336

Primary States (Sideloop PI with Reset Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338

Reliability (Sideloop PI with Reset Proportional Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1338

Sideloop PI Staged Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339
Attributes (Sideloop PI Staged Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1339

Primary States (Sideloop PI Staged Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341

Reliability (Sideloop PI Staged Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1341

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 59


Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
Attributes (Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1343

Primary States (Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345

Reliability (Sideloop PI With Reset Staged Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1345

Sideloop Reset Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1346

Attributes (Sideloop Reset Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347

Primary States (Sideloop Reset Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347

Reliability (Sideloop Reset Output) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1347

Staged Output Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348

MSC 01 through MSC 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348

Module Use in Applications (MSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360

Attributes (MSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361

Reliability (MSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1364

Staged Output Sequencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365

Sequencer 01 through Sequencer 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1365

Module Use in Applications (Sequencer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371

Attributes (Sequencer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1371

Reliability (Sequencer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1373

Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374

Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374


Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1374

Module Use in Applications (Last Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1375

Attributes (Last Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379

60 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Reliability (Last Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1379

Totalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380

Totalization (Enum Runtime) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1380
Module Use in Applications (Totalization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1381

Attributes (Totalization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1382

Reliability (Totalization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1383

Chapter 27: Network Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385


Output Control Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1385
Generic (Add New) Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386
Chapter 28: Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1387
Chapter 29: CCT Input and Output Object Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
CCT Input and Output Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1389
Command Priority Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
Object Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391
Chapter 30: Analog Input Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
Analog Input Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1393
Analog Input Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1398
Chapter 31: Analog Output Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1399
Analog Output Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400
Analog Output Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
Chapter 32: Analog Value Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
Analog Value Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1405
Analog Value Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
Chapter 33: Binary Input Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 61


Binary Input Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1411
Binary Input Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1413
Chapter 34: Binary Output Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
Binary Output Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415
Binary Output Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
Chapter 35: Binary Value Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
Binary Value Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1421
Binary Value Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1425
Chapter 36: Counter Input (Accumulator) Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
Counter Input (Accumulator) Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
Counter Input (Accumulator) Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429
Chapter 37: Multistate Value Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
Multistate Value Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431
Multistate Value Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1434
Chapter 38: Position Adjust Output Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
Position Adjust Output Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435
Position Adjust Output Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1439
Chapter 39: Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441
Activity Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Activity Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442
Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1443
Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444
EWMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444

Line Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446

62 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447

Totalization (Analog Integration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448


Totalization (Boolean Event). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450

Totalization (Boolean Runtime) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1452

Totalization (Enum Event) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1454

Totalization (Enum Runtime) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456

Compare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458
Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1460
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
MSC Pre-Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461
PID Pre-Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463

Process ID Configuration Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1464

PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465

PVDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471

Math. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1474
Psychrometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
Absolute Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
Dew Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1476

Enthalpy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477

Free Cooling is Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478

Relative Humidity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1480

Wet Bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481

Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482
Statistical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1483
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484
Execution Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484

Last Value (Boolean) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1486

Last Value (Enum) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487

Last Value (Float) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488

Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help 63


Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489

Rate Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1490


Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1491

Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1494
Chapter 40: Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1495
Chapter 41: Application and Module Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . 1497
Chapter 42: Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1537
B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1538
D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539
E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1539
F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1540
L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1541
N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1542
R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1543
T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1544
W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1545
Chapter 43: Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1547
Chapter 44: Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1549
Chapter 45: Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1551

64 Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) Help


Chapter 1: CCT Help: Introduction
Using This Help System
Introduction
This Help system contains the user information for CCT. This section describes
the organization of the Help system and offers tips for using it effectively. For
information on using CCT, start with the User Interface section, then see the
Getting Started section. For a list of acronyms and terms, see the Glossary. For a
list of trademarks, see Trademarks.

Concepts
Accessing the CCT Help
You can access the CCT Help in the following ways:
• On the Help menu in CCT, select Topics.
If you access the Help via the Help menu, you start at the beginning and
navigate to the topic you are looking for.
• Click the Help button on a dialog box or press F1 while working in CCT.
Dialog box Help buttons and the F1 key open the Help to the appropriate topic
for the currently active view or dialog box. The entire Help system opens, but
you start at a topic relevant to your location in the application.
Internet Explorer Information Bar Security Message
When you access the Help from a computer running the Windows XP operating
system with SP2 (or similar system configuration) and Internet Explorer, the
following security message may appear in the Internet Explorer Information Bar
due to Microsoft security settings:
To help protect your security, Internet Explorer has restricted this file from
showing active content that could access your computer. Click here for
options...
To open the Help:
1. Click Click here for options... and select Allow Blocked Content. A Security
Warning dialog box appears stating:
Allowing active content such as script and ActiveX controls can be useful, but
active content might also harm your computer. Are you sure you want to let
this file run active content?
2. Click Yes. The CCT Help system opens.

Using This Help System 65


Help Appearance
The look and feel of the Help system varies slightly depending on if your Web
browser has Java settings enabled. If Java settings are disabled, the Help appears
using JavaScript settings. The full Java implementation opens the Help with all of
its designed Java functionality, including the Contents, Index, Search, and
Favorites tabs. The main differences you may notice if Java settings are disabled is
that the Help system opens, but the Favorites tab does not appear and the user
interface is not as robust.
To enable the full Java implementation, do the following:
1. If the Java implementation suddenly does not appear on your computer when it
had previously, delete Internet Cookies to reset your settings. If this does not
make a difference the next time you open the Help, continue to the next items.
2. Check that Web browser is configured to run Java programs (for example.
Internet Options in the Control Panel or from the Web browser). See your Web
browser documentation for details.
3. Check your Java settings in the Control Panel. See your Java documentation
for details.

Help Window Layout


The CCT Help window is divided into two panes or sides:
• Navigation and Search Pane – on the left side of the Help window, contains the
Contents, Index, Search and Favorites tabs used for locating and jumping to the
Help information
• Help Content Pane – on the right side of the Help window, contains the Help
information

66 CCT Help: Introduction


Navigation and Search Pane

Tabs
This Help system offers several ways to navigate and search for information using
tabs on the left side of the Help window:
Contents
The Contents tab contains the table of contents,
which is the hierarchy of the entire Help system
based on the paragraph headings.

• The icons break the information into


sub-categories or pages.
• To see the contents of a closed book icon,
open it by clicking on the button next to
the icon.
• To close an open book icon, click on the
button next to the icon.

• To display a topic, click on the , , or


icon. The topic information appears in the right pane.
The Help topics are organized such that the highest levels of the hierarchy
contain Help for the main CCT activities/operations (as well as an introductory
topic, reference section, and sections covering application, module, and logic
block information). Each section is organized as follows:
• Introduction topic with overview information
• Concepts section covering information key to understanding the section
• Steps section with procedures for that topic
• Screens section covering the screens, wizards, and dialog boxes specific to
that topic

Using This Help System 67


Index
The Index tab contains the index for the entire
Help system. The Index allows you to select
terms from a predefined alphabetical list of key
terms developed by the Help authors.
To search the Index, type a term in the text box at
the top. The cursor moves in the list of terms to
match what you type. Select the term or the term
closest to the word you are searching for. Click
Display to show the information in the right side
of the Help window. You also can double-click
on a term to display the information.
Tip: The Indexed term is not highlighted in the
displayed content.
Tip: To do a full-text search, use the Search tab.

68 CCT Help: Introduction


Search
The Search tab allows you to do a full-text search
of the entire Help system or a section of it (using
the scope selection). In other words, it allows you
to search for any text rather than restricting you
to a predefined list of terms as the Index does.
To search, type a word in the search text box at
the top and click Go!. The system lists the topics
containing the word at the bottom. The topics list
is arranged with the most relevant topics at the
top of the list.
To view a topic in the list, select the title from the
list at the bottom. The Help content appears in the
right side of the Help window. The search term is
highlighted in the Help content.
Tip: The search defaults to the scope used in your last search, so adjust the
content in the Choose the scope of the search box as necessary. The All
Available Books scope searches the entire Help system.
Tip: The arrow button to the right of the search text box contains previous
searches.
Tip: Search for multiple words by separating the words with spaces (for
example, user interface). The search returns titles for sections containing
all of the words you type.
Tip: The Search tab is not capable of doing a boolean search. However, the
entire Help system is available in Adobe PDF format on the QuickLIT
Product Information Web site or the QuickLIT CD, which allows you to
perform advanced searches.
Tip: If the term appears in a drop-down list, expand the list to see the term.

Using This Help System 69


Favorites
The Favorites tab contains bookmarks set inside
the Help system. If you visit a place in the Help
often, make it a Favorite so you can quickly
return to the spot.
• To add a Favorite, navigate to a topic any way
you choose (using the Contents, Index, Search
tabs, or F1). When the topic you want to save
appears, select the Favorites tab on the left
side, and click Add.
• To display a Favorite, select the page name in
the Favorites tab list, and click Display.
• To remove a Favorite, select the page name in the Favorites tab list, and
click Remove.
Tip: Bookmarks in the Help system are not the same as Web browser
bookmarks.

70 CCT Help: Introduction


Help Content Pane

Buttons
Buttons allow you to navigate the Help system and print. The buttons in this Help
are the following:

Show in Contents
The Show in Contents button synchronizes the information in the Contents tab
to your current location in the Help system. If the Contents tab is not active on
the left side of the Help, it is brought forward. Highlighted text in the Contents
list indicates where you are in the Help system.

Previous button
The Previous button takes you to the topic preceding the one you are viewing.
In other words, it takes you to the prior topic in the table of contents.
Tip: To go back to the last screen you visited, use the browser Back button.

Next button
The Next button takes you to the topic that follows the one you are viewing. In
other words, it takes you to the next topic in the table of contents.
Tip: To go to the next screen in your browsing sequence, use the browser
Forward button.

Related Topics button


The Related Topics button displays a list of topics associated with the
information you are viewing. Topics in this list vary depending on the section.
When you click on the Related Topics button, a box with active links to the
related topics appears.

Tip: If no related topics exist, the Related Topics button appears dimmed.
Tip: The related topics that appear when you click the Related Topics button at
the top of the Help are the same topics that appear when you click
in the body of the Help.

Using This Help System 71


Print button
The Print button prints the scrollable information on the right side of the Help
window. The information prints as you see it. To see the content of collapsed
lists, you must expand them before you print the Help.
You may also print a PDF of the entire CCT Help system from the QuickLIT
CD or Web site. This option allows you to print all of the Help’s contents from
beginning to end, including a table of contents and index.
For more information, see Printing the Help.

Links

Drop-Down Lists
When you view the Help content, drop-down lists can be either open or closed. In
a closed drop-down list, only the introduction text appears at first, bold and black
with an arrow next to it. When you click on the introduction text, the list opens up.
In an open drop-down list, the list appears when you first view the Help. When you
click on the introduction text, the list closes and only the introduction text is
visible. Click it again to re-open the list.
Note: Information in a drop-down list only prints if you have the list open on the
screen.

Jumps
Jumps take you to a different section in the Help system. Jumps appear as blue,
underlined text like.

Pop-Ups
Pop-ups appear as blue text without an underline. When you move the mouse
cursor over the pop-up text, explanatory text appears in a pop-up window. If you
click on a pop-up, you jump to its entry in the glossary or other topic.
Note: Pop-up window content does not print.

72 CCT Help: Introduction


Help Organization
Topics in the CCT Help include the following sections:
• Introduction Section
• Concepts Section
• Steps Section
• Screens Section

Introduction Section
The Introduction section contains the introductory and overview information of the
topic. Introduction headings appear in the Contents tab on the left side of the Help
and in the information on the right.

Concepts Section
The Concepts section contains information key to understanding the topic.
Concepts headings appear in the Contents tab on the left side of the Help and in the
information on the right.

Steps Section
The Steps section appears only in the Help topics that have procedures associated
with them. The steps appear in the Contents tab on the left side of the Help.

Screens Section
The Screens section contains descriptions of the views, wizards, and dialog boxes
you might encounter. Screen headings appear in the Contents tab on the left side of
the Help and in the information on the right.

Using This Help System 73


Steps
Printing the Help
You have three options in printing the Help:
• Printing the Navigation and Search Pane
• Printing a Specific Help Topic
• Printing the Entire Help System

Printing the Navigation and Search Pane


To print the content expanded on the left side of the Help, click anywhere on the
left side of the Help and click the browser print button.

Printing a Specific Help Topic


To print the scrollable contents of the right side of the Help, click the Print button
in the Help or click anywhere on the right side and click the browser print button.
Note: Information in drop-down lists prints only if you have the list open on the
screen. Pop-up content does not print in the pop-up window.

Printing the Entire Help System


The entire Help system is available for printing in the Adobe PDF format.
To print the entire Help system:
1. If necessary, download Adobe Reader (required to view the PDF file) from the
Adobe Reader site.
2. Go to the QuickLIT Product Information Web site or insert the QuickLIT CD.
3. Search for or browse to and open the CCT Help PDF file.
4. On the File menu, select Print.
Note: This file is large. Allow plenty of time for download and printing.

74 CCT Help: Introduction


Chapter 2: CCT Help: Introduction
User Interface
Introduction
The Controller Configuration Tool (CCT) is used to configure, simulate, and
commission devices, such as FECs, IOMs, NCEs, and VMA1600s, on a
Master-Slave/Token-Passing (MS/TP) bus. The CCT user interface operates in
three modes: Configuration, Simulation, and Commissioning.
For information on the Commissioning mode only version of the CCT software,
see the CCT Commissioning Only Software section.
This section describes the user interface of the CCT, including the Control View,
Logic View, and the Details dialog box. For information on the tasks you can do in
these parts of CCT, see the Configuring a System, Simulating a System, and
Commissioning a System sections.
Before performing tasks in CCT, see the Getting Started section for guidance.

Concepts
CCT Commissioning Only Software
A Commissioning mode only version of the CCT software is available to the
Johnson Controls branch offices for individuals having only commissioning tasks
(for example, balancing contractors). The CCT Commissioning software allows
you to focus on the commissioning tasks you need to perform without being
distracted by the tasks done in the other two modes. For example, you can issue
commands and commission devices, but you cannot make configuration changes,
define hardware, load, or simulate devices. You can print the system, use the Test
Mode, and view system selections, hardware definitions, controller information,
connections, and item details. The Configuration and Simulation modes are
disabled in the CCT Commissioning software.

System
In CCT, a system is represented by the mechanical equipment and the logic needed
to control that equipment, independent of hardware definition. The System
Selection Wizard in CCT describes the make-up of a mechanical system to aid you
in creating the group of logic components that work together to control the
mechanical system. See System Types and Configurations in the Configuring a
System section.

Application
An application is a collection of the components that make up the control logic of a
system, including modules, logic blocks, custom logic, and hardware definition.
For information on the types of applications you can create, see the Applications
section.

User Interface 75
Controller Application File (.caf)
A Controller Application File (.caf) is a file which contains all the logic
components needed to represent a system. CCT prompts you to save a controller
application file for each system you create. Saving this file allows you to access it
again later to make changes or to use it for additional systems.
The default location to save a Controller Application File is C:\Documents and
Settings\username.
You cannot use certain characters when saving a Controller Application File.
Illegal characters include:
: * ?"<>|/ \

Modules
A module is a component made up of logic blocks used to create portions of the
overall control logic of a system. Module inputs are used to influence the state or
values of outputs. You can view and/or edit modules highlighted in tan in the
Control View, but changes should not be made until the default configuration is
thoroughly understood and the effect of changes on the connected outputs is
considered. To view or change default values used in a module, see Details
Configuration in the Configuring a System section. To view or change connections
to a module, see Control View Configuration in the Configuring a System section.
See the Modules section.

Logic Blocks
A logic block is a component used to construct the control logic of a system. You
can view and work with logic blocks in the Logic View of CCT. Logic block
inputs are used to influence the state or values of outputs. You can view and/or edit
logic contained within modules highlighted in tan in the Control View, but
changes should not be made until the default logic is thoroughly understood and
the effect of changes on the connected outputs is considered. To view or change
default values used in a block, see Details Configuration in the Configuring a
System section.
See the Logic section for information on logic blocks.

76 CCT Help: Introduction


CCT User Interface
Figure 2-1 shows the CCT user interface. Click on the links to the left of the
graphic or click an area of the graphic for information on the UI components.
Figure 2-1: CCT User Interface

Menu Bar
Modes and
Operations
Buttons

Quick
Navigation
Menu

Control/Logic
View
Workspace
(Control View
shown here)

Status Bar

The slider bars of the center and side panels have arrows allowing you to expand
the Parameters, Connections, or Balancer tabs to achieve the desired view (circled
in red in Figure 2-1). Click the arrows to show and hide the panels. If you click the
slider bar and drag it to the desired location, clicking the arrows returns the view to
the location you moved the slider bar. Clicking the arrows a second time shows/
hides the entire panel. The sliders maintain their location between sessions.

User Interface 77
Menu Bar
The CCT menu bar includes the following options:
Table 2-1: Menu Bar Options (Part 1 of 3)
Menu Option Keyboard Description
Shortcut
File New Ctrl + N Opens the New System dialog box. See the Configuring a
System section.
Open Ctrl + O Opens the Open dialog box to select an existing Controller
Application File (.caf) to use.
The default location of a Controller Application File is
C:\Documents and Settings\username.
Note: You cannot open a .caf file in the CCT Commissioning
only software. You must Commission to show a system in
the CCT UI.
Close Closes the open Controller Application File. You must be in
Configuration mode to close the Controller Application File.3
Note: You cannot close a .caf file in the CCT Commissioning
only software. You must stop Commissioning mode to
remove a system from the CCT UI.
Save Ctrl + S Saves the current system as a Controller Application File (.caf). If
you have not already saved the system, CCT opens the Save
dialog box.
Illegal characters include:
: * ?"<>|/ \
Save As Opens the Save dialog box to allow you to save the system as a
Controller Application File (.caf) using a different name.
Illegal characters include:
: * ?"<>|/ \
Print Ctrl + P Opens the Summary Report Options dialog box to print a
summary of the open Controller Application File (.caf) in PDF
format.
Exit Closes the CCT software. You must be in Configuration mode to
exit CCT.
Note: In the CCT Commissioning only software, you can exit
CCT after you stop Commissioning.
Modes1 Configure2 Switches to Control View in Configuration mode.3, 4 The
Configure button text changes to Stop Simulation when in
Simulation mode and to Stop Commissioning when in
Commissioning mode. See the Configuring a System section.
Simulate2 Opens the Simulation dialog box to enter Simulation mode.3 See
the Simulating a System section.
Commission Opens the Commission Device wizard to enter Commissioning
mode.3, 4 See the Commissioning a System section.

78 CCT Help: Introduction


Table 2-1: Menu Bar Options (Part 2 of 3)
Menu Option Keyboard Description
Shortcut
Action5 Commands Opens the Commands dialog box to issue a command to the
selected item. This option is available in Simulation mode. See
the Simulating a System section.
This option is also available in Commissioning mode but only
when in Test Mode. See the Commissioning a System section for
details on the Test Mode.
Metasys Commands Opens the Metasys Commands dialog box to issue a
Metasys system command to the selected item. This option is
available in Commissioning mode. See the Commissioning a
System section.
Delete Opens the Confirm dialog box verifying you want to remove the
item.
Rename Opens the Rename dialog box to rename the selected module or
logic block.
View Connections Displays the connections of the selected module(s) in the
Connections tab.
View Details Displays the Details dialog box to view the details of the selected
item.
View Logic Opens the Logic View for the selected module. This menu option
is available only when the module contains logic that can be
viewed or modified (see the Control View Status Colors and
Icons section).
Setup Opens the Setup dialog box to change the current signal of the
selected Input or Output.
Operations Select System Opens the CCT System Selection Wizard. See the Configuring a
System section.
Sideloop Opens the CCT System Selection Wizard to create a sideloop.
See the Configuring a System section.
Define Hardware Opens the Hardware Definition Wizard. See the Defining
Hardware section.
Load Opens the Load Device Wizard.3 See the Loading Devices
section.

User Interface 79
Table 2-1: Menu Bar Options (Part 3 of 3)
Menu Option Keyboard Description
Shortcut
Tools Box Flow Test Opens the Box Flow Test application. See the Performing a Box
Flow Test section.
Preferences > Opens the Preferences - Naming and Signal screen. See the
Naming and Signal Setting and Using Preferences section.
Preferences > Opens the Preferences - System Selection screen. See the
System Selection Setting and Using Preferences section.
Preferences > Opens the Preferences - Localization screen. See the Setting
Localization and Using Preferences section. This option is available only
when a .caf file is not open.
Controller When in Commissioning mode, opens the Controller Information
Information wizard to display information from the controller on the field bus
to which you are currently connected and commissioning. See
the Commissioning a System section.
When in Configuration mode, opens the Controller Information
wizard to display information from one or more controllers on a
field bus. See the Configuring a System section.
System Rename Opens the System Rename dialog box to rename the current
system. This option does not change the name of the Controller
Application File (.caf).
Job Information Opens the Job Information dialog box to enter information
specific to the current job and open Controller Application File
(.caf).
Configure Display Opens the Configure Display dialog box to set up the Local
Controller Display. This option is available in Configuration mode.
See the Configuring the Local Controller Display section.
Upgrade System Opens the System Upgrade dialog box to upgrade the open .caf
file to the latest version. See the Upgrading System Files section.
Help Topics F1 Opens the CCT Help system.
About CCT Opens the About dialog box displaying the CCT version,
database information, and file version.

1. See the Changing Modes section for information on entering and exiting modes.
2. The Configuration (Configure) and Simulation (Simulate) modes are not available in the CCT Commissioning only
software version.
3. If you made changes to the system, the Save Confirmation or Confirm dialog box opens prompting you to save.
4. When switching from Simulation mode, a Confirm dialog box appears prompting you to save or discard the changes
made during simulation.
5. Menu options appear in the Action menu as appropriate for the selected item. If an item is not selected, the Action
menu may appear empty.

80 CCT Help: Introduction


Modes
The CCT user interface operates in three modes: Configuration, Simulation, and
Commissioning. In addition to the options in the Modes menu to change modes,
the CCT UI includes buttons for moving between the modes (Figure 2-1):
Configure, Simulate, and Commission.
Note: The Configuration and Simulation modes are not available in the CCT
Commissioning only software version.
See the Configuration, Simulation, and Commissioning sections for descriptions of
the modes. Also, see the Changing Modes section.

Configuration
Note: The Configuration mode is not available in the CCT Commissioning only
software version.
The Configuration mode is the default mode of CCT. When you add or select a
system, it opens the system in Configuration mode. This mode allows you to
design and edit a system. Configuration tasks include selecting a system,
modifying parameters, creating custom logic (as necessary), and other tasks to set
up a system. See the Configuring a System section for details.
The Configure button/menu text changes to Stop Simulation when in Simulation
mode and to Stop Commissioning when in Commissioning mode. The
Configuration mode also acts as a transitional mode when you need to switch from
Simulation to Commissioning mode and vice versa. See the Changing Modes
section.
You must be in Configuration mode to close a Controller Application File (.caf) or
exit CCT.
Back to Modes.

Simulation
Note: The Simulation mode is not available in the CCT Commissioning only
software version.
When you enter Simulation mode, the Simulation dialog box appears allowing you
to set the Simulation Speed (up to 5x real time) and the startup values for the
simulation session. The settings you select are saved and appear in the Simulation
dialog box the next time you enter Simulation mode. Simulation mode allows you
to see your system as though it were in Commissioning mode. This allows you to
test your system and make adjustments before downloading it into a device. See
the Simulating a System section for information on how to simulate your system.
Back to Modes.

User Interface 81
Commissioning
Commissioning mode allows you to connect to a device and view actual data from
that device. You can use this mode to monitor your device and set Offsets, COVs,
and Polarity in addition to other Parameter and Detail changes. For example, you
can change the Min Out and Max Out values of an Output to fine tune the range of
a 2-10 VDC proportional valve. In addition, the Commissioning mode has a
Balancer tab in the Control View for VAV applications to easily autocalibrate
VAV boxes and set flow constants in one location. See the Commissioning a
System section.
Back to Modes.

Operations
In addition to the options in the Operations menu to perform specific tasks, the
CCT UI has operation buttons: Select System, Sideloop, Define Hardware, and
Load. See the Select System, Sideloop, Define Hardware, and Load sections for
descriptions of the operations.

82 CCT Help: Introduction


Select System
The Select System operation opens the System Selection Wizard to select, review,
and change the options for a system. See the following topics in the Configuring a
System section for details on the wizard and how to use it:
• System Selection Wizard
• Selecting a System (Creating a New System)
• Viewing and Modifying System Selections
CCT does not enable the Select System button and Operation menu item for
Custom Applications or Monitoring/Supervisory Control only applications.
Back to Operations.

Sideloop
The Sideloop operation opens the System Selection Wizard for creating a sideloop.
See the Creating a Sideloop and Sideloop Applications sections for more
information.

Define Hardware
The Define Hardware operation opens the Hardware Definition wizard to define
the hardware for your system. See the Defining Hardware section for details.
Back to Operations.

Load
The Load operation opens the Load wizard to upload applications into the CCT
and to download to devices. See the Loading Devices section for details.
Back to Operations.

User Interface 83
Quick Navigation Menu
The Quick Navigation menu is a drop-down menu that allows you to navigate from
the Control View to the Logic View of any module that makes up the system, and
vice versa. This menu also allows you to view the logic of the entire application
and print it if desired. The Quick Navigation menu appears in the upper left-hand
side of the CCT screen above the Control/Logic View workspace.
The Quick Navigation menu indicates the displayed item first (for example, a
specific module or the system name). The System name appears first in the menu
list. The second item in the menu is always the View Application Logic option.
Lastly, any modules that can be viewed/modified appear in alphabetical order. If a
module has a child, the child does not appear in the menu until after the parent is
viewed once. For example, the OA Percent Min Flow Determination child module
does not appear in the menu until the Min Flow Determination parent module is
viewed. Figure 2-2 shows the Quick Navigation menu.
The View Application Logic option is available only in the Configuration mode.
Figure 2-2: Quick Navigation Menu
Displayed Item
System Name
Logic of the Entire
Application that can
be Viewed/Printed

Modules with Logic


that can be Viewed
and/or Modified
(Alphabetically)

See Application Logic View, Navigating between Control View and Logic View,
and Viewing/Printing Application Logic in the Configuring a System section for
more information.

Control/Logic View Workspace


This workspace contains the Control View or the Logic View components. You
can view an overview of a system in Control View or view individual modules in
the Logic View. See the Control View and Logic View sections for information.

84 CCT Help: Introduction


Control View
Figure 2-1 shows the Control View in the workspace. The Control View of CCT
allows you to view and modify your system design. This view visually displays
components to provide information about your system. The control components in
this view correspond to the device’s inputs, logic, and outputs, which flow from
the left side of the workspace to the right. The Control View is divided into
categories relating to the main items that make up a system (for example, Network
Inputs and Network Outputs). The items listed in these sections are derived from
the items selected for your system in the System Selection Wizard. For
information on this wizard, see the System Selection Wizard in the Configuring a
System section.
Depending on the mode in which CCT is operating, you are able to perform certain
tasks in the Control View. For information on the CCT modes, see the Modes
section. The following table describes the tasks you can perform in the Control
View in the different modes.
Table 2-2: Control View Tasks Available in Different Modes
Task Mode
Configuration Simulation Commissioning
Create a New System X
Select a System X X1 X1
Create a Sideloop X X1 X1
View Connections X X X
Modify Connections X
View Parameters X X X
Modify Parameters 2 X X3 X3
View Logic X X X
Modify Logic X
View the State Tables X X X
Modify the State Tables X
Add Modules X
Rename Modules X
Modify a Module’s Details in the X X X
Details Dialog Box
Delete Modules X
Send a Command X X4
Send a Metasys Command X
Set Up Inputs and Outputs X X X

1. Read-only
2. You cannot modify outputs of modules from the Parameters table.
3. Select parameters only
4. Only available in Test Mode.

User Interface 85
See the following sections for information on the Control View components:
• Modes
• Operations
• Control View Module Categories
• Control View Status Colors and Icons
• Right-Click Menus (Control View)
• Connections Table
• Parameters Table

Control View Module Categories


The module categories are the sections of the Control View representing the main
items that make up a system (for example, the Network Inputs and Network
Outputs sections). The modules in the sections are automatically added based on
the items selected for your system in the System Selection Wizard. For
information on this wizard, see the System Selection Wizard in the Configuring a
System section.
The module category sections in the CCT Control View are:
• Network Inputs
• Inputs
• Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• State Generation
• State Selection
• Output Control
• Network Outputs
• Outputs
See Figure 2-1 for the location of these categories on the CCT UI.

86 CCT Help: Introduction


Network Inputs
The Network Inputs category appears in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1).
This section lists the network inputs defined for the system. Network inputs are
typically used to read/write values to/from a supervisory device over the network.
When a network input is not mapped to a supervisory device, it uses its default
value and can only be commanded from the Commissioning mode of CCT.
An example use is that a supervisory device reads an Outdoor Air Temperature
sensor from one device and writes its value to the network input of other devices.
Network inputs connect into other modules or the State Table.
See Network Inputs in the Modules section for information on network input
modules. Also, see Peer-to-Peer Communication in the Configuring a System for
information on peer-to-peer communication in CCT.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

Inputs
The Inputs category appears in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1). This section
lists the inputs defined for the system. An input defines an interface to the actual
hardware in a system. An input can represent a physical sensor in the system or an
input associated with a sensor. Inputs get data directly from hardware input points
of a device.
See Inputs in the Modules section for information on input modules.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

Setpoint/Miscellaneous
The Setpoint/Miscellaneous category appears in the Control View of CCT
(Figure 2-1). This section lists the setpoint and miscellaneous modules defined for
the system. A setpoint or miscellaneous module contains logic that calculates a
setpoint or provides other calculations for a system. This section lists modules for
other miscellaneous calculations required by a system.
See Setpoint Determination/Misc in the Modules section for information on
setpoint/miscellaneous modules.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

User Interface 87
State Generation
The State Generation category appears in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1).
This section lists the state generators defined for the system. The state generators
are listed according to priority, where the state generators appearing at the top have
a higher priority than those listed below them. This order typically corresponds to
the order in a State Selection Table when viewing the State Tables. A state
generation module calculates a state, that is prioritized by the State Table, which
calculates a mode to be controlled by an Output Controller.
See State Generators in the Modules section for information on state generation
modules.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

State Selection
The State Selection category appears in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1) in
Configuration mode. You also can access State Selection by right-clicking the
State Generation header in Configuration, Simulation, or Commissioning mode.
The State Tables define how the states of the inputs of the State Tables control the
outputs in the system. See the State Tables section for information.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

State Tables
You can access the State Tables screen using the right-click menu of the State
Selection header in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1) in Configuration mode
or by using the right-click menu of the State Generation header in Configuration,
Simulation, or Commissioning mode. You can modify the State Tables only in
Configuration mode. The State Tables are used to set the hierarchical priority of
incoming states and to define the appropriate mode of operation of each output
controller for each state in the State Selection Tables.
The individual tables in the State Tables correspond to the State Generators and the
column headings are the Output Controllers. For each State Generator state, there
is a corresponding Output Controller state. The States column lists the states from
highest priority to lowest priority in descending order from top to bottom. An
asterisk (*) or an X appearing instead of a valid Output Controller state indicates
that the current State Generator has no interaction with the Output Controller, and
the Output Controller is controlled by the next highest priority State Generator
showing a valid Output Controller state. An X also indicates that the field should
not be modified unless certain control specifications are required.
For information on how to use the state tables, see Viewing and Modifying State
Selection Tables in the Configuring a System section.To see an example of how the
State Tables are used, see the Control View Application Example section.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

88 CCT Help: Introduction


Output Control
The Output Control category appears in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1).
This section lists the output controllers defined for the system. An output control
module defines the specific logic associated with each state, as determined by the
State Tables’ mode. For example, if the State Tables determine that the
Proportional Box Heating Control output controller should be in Control mode,
the Proportional Box Heating Control output controller defines the PID control
logic to use while in this state.
See Output Controller in the Modules section for information on output control
modules.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

Network Outputs
The Network Outputs category appears in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1).
This section lists the network outputs defined for the system. A network output
module acts as a network variable read from a supervisory device. When a network
output is not mapped to a supervisory device, it can only be viewed from the
Commissioning mode of CCT. Network outputs connect from other modules or
the State Table.
See Network Outputs in the Modules section for information on network output
modules. Also, see Peer-to-Peer Communication in the Configuring a System for
information on peer-to-peer communication in CCT.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

Outputs
The outputs category appears in the Control View of CCT (Figure 2-1). This
section lists the outputs defined for the system. An output defines an interface to
the actual hardware in a system. An output can represent a physical hardware point
in the system or a point associated with an output. Outputs send data to hardware
output points of a device.
See Outputs in the Modules section for information on output modules.
Back to Control View Module Categories.

User Interface 89
Control View Application Example
The following figure shows how modules in the Control View interact (using
Show Involvement in Simulation mode).
Figure 2-3: Fan Coil Application Example (Show Involvement)

This example is of a Fan Coil application. Based on the network inputs and input
readings in this example, the State Tables have determined that the highest priority
state generator that should be in Control is FC-ZN-T SEQUENCING (Zone
Sequencing [FC]), which is set to the Cooling state. As a result, the Proportional
Cooling Control output control is set to Control, which modulates the cooling
valve open (CLG-O output).
The following drawing and text further explain the interaction between the cooling
modules.

90 CCT Help: Introduction


Figure 2-4: Fan Coil Application Example (Cooling Interaction)

Zone Mode Percent Cmd


Hardware ZNT-STATE
EFFCLG-SP Temperature
Setpoint Process
Cooling
Setpoint Variable

Setpoint

Flush
Position

The interactions in this example are as follows:


• The FLUSHPOS network input provides an input to the Proportional Cooling
Control output control.
• The ZN-SP input provides a Hardware Setpoint input to the ZN-T Setpoint
Determination setpoint.
• The ZN-T input provides input to the following modules:
- Zone Temperature input to the FC-ZN-T SEQUENCING (Zone
Sequencing [FC]) state generator
- Process Variable input to the Proportional Cooling Control output control
• The ZN-T Setpoint Determination setpoint provides input to the following
modules:
- Cooling Setpoint input to the FC-ZN-T SEQUENCING (Zone Sequencing
[FC]) state generator
- Setpoint input to the Proportional Cooling Control output control
• The FC-ZN-T SEQUENCING (Zone Sequencing [FC]) state generator
provides the ZNT-STATE input to the State Tables.
• The State Tables provide the Mode input to the Proportional Cooling Control
output control.
• The Proportional Cooling Control output control provides the Percent Cmd
input to the CLG-O output.
The following graphic shows how the modules in the State Generation section
provide input to the State Tables and how the state configuration within the State
Tables provides input to the modules in the Output Control section. The individual
tables in the State Tables are the State Generators and the column headings are the
Output Controllers. See the State Selection and State Tables sections.

User Interface 91
Figure 2-5: Fan Coil Application Example (State Tables)

In this example, the Water System Flush Pass Through has the highest priority and
Fan Determination has the lowest. The Water System Flush Pass Through state is
set to False, and the cells have an X, which means no behavior change occurs and
the next table is evaluated.
When the Unit Enable Determination state is set to Shutdown, then the Mode is set
to Off for the Proportional Cooling Control, Proportional Heating Control, and
Single Speed Fan Control. The Unit Enable Determination state is set to Enable
and the cells have an X, and the next table is evaluated.

92 CCT Help: Introduction


The next table, Heating isAvailable Pass Through, is evaluated to determine if it
sends a state to the Output controllers. The only Output it can affect is the
Proportional Heating Control since both the False and True cells for Single Speed
Fan Control and Proportional Cooling Control are set to an X. In this example, the
Heating isAvailable Pass Through module is set to a True state; therefore, no
command is sent to the Proportional Heating Control and the next table is
evaluated.
The Cooling isAvailable Pass Through state is True, and no command is sent to the
Proportional Cooling Control module. With a System Mode Determination state of
Auto and an Unocc Status Determination state of Unocc Cntrl Not Req'd, neither
table sends commands to the output modules. A command is not sent to the outputs
until the FC-ZN-T SEQUENCING (Zone Sequencing [FC]) module is evaluated.
With the State of Cooling from the State Generation module, the Cooling row in
the FC-ZN-T SEQUENCING (Zone Sequencing [FC]) table sets the Proportional
Heating Control mode to Off and the Proportional Cooling Control mode to
Control. The asterisks (*) in the Single Speed Fan Control cells mean no command
is sent to the output module and the Fan Determination module must be evaluated.
With the Fan Determination module in the On State, an On command is sent to the
Single Speed Fan Control Mode.

User Interface 93
Control View Status Colors and Icons
Table 2-3 lists the status colors and icons used in the Control View of CCT.
Table 2-3: Control View Status Colors
Status Color Appears in Mode Description
White All modes Indicates a non-editable module.
Tan All modes Indicates an editable module; that is, it contains logic
that you can view and/or edit. You can use the View >
Logic option for this type of module.
Blue All modes Indicates the selected module.
Green All modes In Configuration mode, indicates modules that contain
exposed ports that are compatible (that is, the
enumeration set and units match) with the current port
you are connecting. See Viewing and Modifying
Connections in the Configuring a System section.
In Simulation and Commissioning modes, indicates the
active state generator(s).
Magenta Simulation and In Simulation and Commissioning modes, shows the
Commissioning modes involvement of other modules to the selected Output
module.
Orange Simulation and In Simulation and Commissioning modes, indicates
Commissioning modes when the software value does not match hardware value
of the item.
Note: In Simulation mode, inputs and outputs are
orange because the associated hardware has
not yet been defined.
Red All modes Indicates an input or output that is not assigned properly.
Delete such inputs and outputs from CCT.
All modes Identifies a module that has been modified by a user.
(Green
Triangle) If the changes were made in Configuration mode, this
icon appears directly to the left of the module name
(first row).
If the changes were made in Simulation or
Commissioning mode, the green triangle appears
directly to the left of the module’s Default Element value
(second row).
All modes Identifies that the input or output is assigned to a
(Network Network Sensor (Network Duct Sensor or Network Zone
Sensor)1 Sensor).
All modes Identifies that the input or output is assigned to a
wireless sensor and has a wireless Ethernet signal.

(Wireless
Ethernet
Sensor)
All modes Identifies that the input or output is assigned to an
Eaton Variable Speed Drive.
(VSD)
All modes Identifies that the input or output is assigned to an FEC.
(FEC)
All modes Identifies that the input or output is assigned to an IOM.
(IOM)

1. Device and Port label information appears after the module name for assigned Inputs and Outputs.

94 CCT Help: Introduction


Right-Click Menus (Control View)
The following table lists the right-click menu options in the Control View and
indicates the mode and item in which the menu is available. Menu options appear
in the right-click menu when an item is selected.
Table 2-4: Right-Click Menus (Control View) (Part 1 of 2)
Menu Option Appears in Control View Section Description
Mode

Miscellaneous

Generation

Selection
Setpoint/
Network

Network
Outputs
Outputs
Control
Output
Inputs
Inputs

State

State
New (Header Configuration X X X X X X X Adds a new module.
Only)
Simulation
Commissioning
Delete Configuration X X X X X X X Removes the module.
Simulation
Commissioning
Rename Configuration X X X X X Changes the name of the
module.
Simulation
Commissioning
View Details Configuration X X X X X X X X Displays the Details dialog
box to view the details of the
Simulation X X X X X X X
selected module.
Commissioning X X X X X X X
View Configuration X X X X X X X X Displays the connections of
Connections the selected module(s) in the
Simulation X X X X X X X
Connections tab.
Commissioning X X X X X X X
View Logic1 Configuration X X X X X X X Opens the Logic View for the
selected module. This menu
Simulation X X X X X X X
option is available only when
Commissioning X X X X X X X the module has logic that can
be viewed and/or modified
(indicated by a tan
background).
View State Configuration X Opens the State Selection
Tables Tables. This option is
Simulation X
available from the State
Commissioning X Generation header or the
State Selection header.
Commands Configuration Opens the Commands dialog
box to command items.
Simulation X X X X X X X
Commissioning X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2
Metasys Configuration Opens the Metasys
Commands Commands dialog box to
Simulation
issue a Metasys system
Commissioning X X command to the selected
item.

User Interface 95
Table 2-4: Right-Click Menus (Control View) (Part 2 of 2)
Menu Option Appears in Control View Section Description
Mode

Miscellaneous

Generation

Selection
Setpoint/
Network

Network
Outputs
Outputs
Control
Output
Inputs
Inputs

State

State
Setup Configuration X X Allows you to change the
signal type of Inputs and
Simulation
Outputs in Configuration
Commissioning X X mode. Allows you to
Commission Inputs and
Outputs in Commissioning
mode.
Show Configuration Highlights the connected
Involvement modules in the Control View.
Simulation X
Commissioning X
Hide Configuration Removes the highlighting on
Involvement the connected modules in the
Simulation X
Control View.
Commissioning X

1. Only available for modules containing logic that can be viewed and/or modified (indicated by a tan background). See
the Control View Status Colors and Icons section.
2. Only available in Test Mode.

Connections Table
The Connections table appears in the Connection tab of the Control View
workspace in all modes. This table can show the connections for one or more
modules. The Connections table displays the source and destination module and
port data with the associated input and output connection of the selected module.
Inputs appear yellow and outputs appear turquoise in this table.
By default, connections appear for all modules. You can select to view connections
for one module, multiple modules in a module category, or you can select a
column header of one of the module categories to view connections for all modules
in that section. To return to the default, showing all module connections, right-
click within the overall table header and select Show All.
Figure 2-6: Connections Table Show All Menu

Header

96 CCT Help: Introduction


For Inputs and Outputs, the default value appears after the input/output name (for
example, Present Value - False or Input - False). Table 2-5 describes the right-
click menu options of the Connections table.
Table 2-5: Control View Connections Table Right-Click Menus
Menu Option Context Description
Show All Table Header Returns the Connections table to the default
(see Figure 2-6) view, which is showing all module
connections.
Break Connection Input Disconnects the current connection and
Output leaves the connection blank.
Change Connection Input Highlights modules with compatible exposed
Output ports, in green, for selection of a different
connection.
Expose Ports Input Opens the Port Exposure dialog box to hide
Output ports from connection. By default, all ports are
Selected Module Header exposed for connection. You cannot remove
the selection for connected ports as such
ports are disabled in this dialog box.
Make Connection Input Highlights modules with compatible exposed
Output ports, in green, for selection of a new
connection.

Parameters Table
The Parameters table lists key parameters/attributes used by the system. In
Configuration mode, default values appear only for parameters/attributes that can
be edited. To add other parameters/attributes to the Parameters table, enable the
inputs and outputs for BACnet network exposure by editing the individual
module’s BACnet Exposed attribute to True in the Details dialog box. You cannot
modify outputs of modules from the Parameters table. See the Control View
Screen section for a description of this table’s components.

Balancer Tab
The Balancer tab appears in the Control View workspace in Commissioning mode
only for VAV applications. This tab includes a parameters table and task buttons to
autocalibrate VAV boxes and set flow constants easily in one location. See the
Control View Screen section for a description of this table’s components, and see
the Commissioning a System section for details on using this tab.

User Interface 97
Logic View
Figure 2-7 shows the Logic View in the workspace. Click on the links to the left of
the graphic or click an area of the graphic for information on the Logic View
components.
Figure 2-7: Logic View
Toolbar

Control Block
Palette

Logic Diagram
(Workspace)

The Logic View of CCT allows you to view and modify the control logic used in
your system. This view displays the logic blocks visually to provide information
about your system. The Logic View is divided into three sections: a toolbar,
control block palette, and logic diagram area. Depending on the mode in which
CCT is operating, you are able to perform certain tasks in the Logic View. For
information on the CCT modes, see the Modes section.
See the following sections for information on the Logic View components:
• Toolbar (Logic View)
• Right-Click Menus (Logic View)
• Control Block Palette
• Logic Diagram
• Logic View Status Colors

98 CCT Help: Introduction


The following table describes the tasks you can perform in the Logic View in the
different modes.
Table 2-6: Logic View Tasks Available in Different Modes
Task Mode
Configuration Simulation Commissioning
View Logic X X X
Use the Block Finder X
Add Blocks X
Rename Blocks X
Modify Blocks and Their Details X X X
in the Details Dialog Box
Delete Blocks X
Connect Blocks X
Show/Hide Connection Lines X
Delete Connections X
Export a Module X
Send a Command X X

User Interface 99
Toolbar (Logic View)
Table 2-7 describes the icons in the Logic View toolbar. These options appear in
all modes, unless otherwise noted.
Table 2-7: Logic View Toolbar
Icon Command Description
Print Opens the Print dialog box to print the logic diagram.

Print Preview Opens the Print Preview dialog box.

Select Turns the cursor into a selection cursor.

Pan Turns the cursor into a hand that allows you to pan over
the logic diagram by dragging.

Marquee Zoom Allows you to define a selection box to zoom.

Interactive Zoom Zooms in and out on a logic diagram when you hold the
mouse button down.

Zoom – Fit Window Zooms the logic diagram to fit within the window.

Selective Zoom Allows you to select the percentage zoom applied to the
logic diagram.

Trace Mode Removes all the connection lines in the logic diagram.
Live values remain. This option is available in the
Commissioning and Simulation modes only.
Note: This option is available in the Configuration mode
only when viewing logic of the entire application
(View Application Logic option of the Quick
Navigation menu).
Set Default Element Selects a default element for the block/module. The
default element indicates the value displayed in the
Control View in Simulation and Commissioning modes.
This option is available for configuration in the
Configuration mode only.
Note: This option is not available when viewing logic of
the entire application (View Application Logic
option of the Quick Navigation menu).
Export Module Exports the module logic by adding it to the Custom
folder in the Control Block Palette. Use the export
feature to share custom modules. This option is
available in the Configuration mode only. See Exporting
a Module in the Configuring a System section.
Note: This option is not available when viewing logic of
the entire application (View Application Logic
option of the Quick Navigation menu).

100 CCT Help: Introduction


Right-Click Menus (Logic View)
The following table describes the right-click menu options available in the Logic
View.
Table 2-8: Right-Click Menus (Logic View)
Icon Description
Export Module Exports the module logic by adding it to the Custom folder in the
Control Block Palette. Use the export feature to share custom
modules. This option is available in the Configuration mode only.
Set Default Element Selects a default element for the block/module. The default element
indicates the value displayed in the Control View in Simulation and
Commissioning modes. This option is available for configuration in the
Configuration mode only.
View > Details Displays the Details dialog box to view the details of the selected block
(available in all modes).
View > Logic Displays additional logic for the selected block.
Expose Ports > Opens the Port Exposure dialog box to select the input/output ports to
For BACnet show for BACnet network exposure in the Logic View and to add to
the Parameters list (Configuration mode only).
Expose Ports > Opens the Port Exposure dialog box to select input/output ports to
For Connection show for connections in the Logic View (Configuration mode only).
Hide Removes the connection lines in the Logic View and displays the
hidden edge labels (Configuration mode only).
Unhide Removes the hidden edge labels and shows the connection lines in
the Logic View (Configuration mode only).
Rename Opens the Rename dialog box to change the name of the block.
Delete Removes the block from the system.

User Interface 101


Control Block Palette
The Control Block palette allows you to select or search for blocks to add to the
logic diagram. The Logic View supports drag and drop functionality for adding
blocks. For more information on the logic blocks, see the Logic section.
Table 2-9: Logic Blocks
Item/Folder Name Description
Control View Contains the Block Finder and folders of blocks you can add to the logic
diagram.
Block Finder Allows you to search for a block and add it to the logic diagram.
Activity Inputs Contains boolean, float, and enumeration input blocks.
Activity Outputs Contains boolean, float, and enumeration output blocks.
Boolean Contains blocks that perform Boolean functions on one or more inputs,
producing a single output.
Calculation Contains blocks that control the amount an output can change per control
logic execution or extrapolates an output using two inputs for reference.
Compare Contains comparison blocks such as Greater Than or Not Equal.
Constant Contains blocks that pass a constant value to block inputs.
Container Contains the Activity and Hybrid Activity blocks that act as containers for
other blocks.
Control Contains blocks that perform control functions on multiple inputs,
producing a single output.
Math Contains blocks that perform mathematical functions on one or more
inputs, producing a single output.
Psychrometric Contains blocks that perform psychrometric functions on the defined
inputs, producing a single output.
Selection Contains Command Hierarchy and MUX blocks that perform multiplexing
for multiple inputs, producing a single output.
Statistical Contains blocks that perform statistical functions on multiple inputs
producing a single output.
Timing Contains blocks that perform timing functions such as Pulse, On Delay,
and Off Delay. Timing blocks are used to break up feedback loops.
Custom Contains any modules exported using the Export Module feature for
sharing custom modules. The Custom folder appears once a module is
exported on the computer running CCT.

Block Finder
The Block Finder appears in the Control Block palette before the folders
containing available blocks for selection. You can drag the Block Finder to the
logic diagram workspace, search for a block, and select the block to add to the
diagram. When you click OK, the block appears in the logic diagram. Adjust the
placement of the block as needed. See Searching for a Block Using the Block
Finder in the Configuring a System section.

102 CCT Help: Introduction


Logic Diagram
The logic diagram appears on the right side of the workspace (Figure 2-7). The
logic diagram consists of logic blocks, their inputs and outputs, and the
connections between them. The following figure identifies the main components
you may find in a logic diagram.
Figure 2-8: Logic Diagram (Supply Damper Control Module)

Logic Blocks
(Label in Blue)

Inputs Container Block


to View Logic
(Connected
Outputs

Input (Not Connected)

Default Element

Connection Lines Hidden Edge Labels

Logic is generally executed following a left-to-right flow across the logic diagram.
Connection lines between elements may be visible or hidden. When hidden, each
connection has a hidden edge label at the origination point and at each destination
point. At the origination point, the hidden edge label may contain two numbers,
where the first number indicates the connection number and the second indicates
the number of instances. For example, a hidden edge label of 5:7 means there are
seven instances of connection number five.
Note: You can change the label of a hidden edge. See Changing the Hidden Edge
Label of a Connection in the Configuring a System section.
For each Logic block, you can select one parameter/attribute as the Default
Element, which becomes the value that displays dynamic data in Simulation and
Commissioning modes.

User Interface 103


In some instances in Simulation and Commissioning mode, two values appear
next to one another instead of one. The first (left side) value indicates the value the
block sends out if the logic were in the state currently being displayed, and the
second (right side) value indicates the value being sent out from the block due to
the actual state of the logic.
Figure 2-9 is an example of the CLG-OUTSTATE block in the Water Flush state
(highlighted state). Since the current state of the logic is Normal, not Water Flush,
two values appear next to some connections. The left value is the value that would
be expected when the logic goes into the Water Flush state (100.00% and
Overridden). The right value is the Present Value of the connections (47.89% and
Normal).
Figure 2-9: Double Values in Logic View (Logic State)

Similarly, when you command the output of a block to a different value, the
existing value appears first and is followed by the commanded value. Figure 2-10
is an example of a block with double values.
Figure 2-10: Double Values in Logic View (Commands)

When you place your cursor over an input or output of a logic block, the input/
output name and default value appear.
When making a connection, a tooltip indicates if there is no valid connection for
the selected input/output. An invalid connection is when the data type of the source
and destination do not match (for example, a Boolean source and a Float
destination).
For information on the individual logic blocks, see the Logic section. Also, see the
Logic View Status Colors section.
For information on configuring logic blocks, including information on how the
Hybrid Activity block works, see Logic View Steps and Configuring a Hybrid
Activity in the Configuring a System section.

104 CCT Help: Introduction


Logic View Status Colors
Table 2-10 lists the status colors used in the Logic View of CCT.
Table 2-10: Logic View Status Colors
Status Color Appears in Mode Description
Yellow Block All modes Indicates an activity input.
Turquoise All modes Indicates an activity output.
Block
Tan Block All modes Indicates an editable module; that is, it contains logic
that you can view and modify.
White Block All modes Indicates an uneditable block.
Note: The Hybrid Activity block is white with the
selected state highlighted in blue.
White Block All modes Indicates a Hybrid Activity State block.
with Blue
State
Block with All modes Indicates a connected input.
Yellow Input
Block with All modes Indicates an input that is not connected.
Orange Input
Block with All modes Indicates an input available for connection from the
Green Input selected block.
Black Block All modes Indicates the default element of a module/block.
Black Line All modes Indicates a regular connection line.
Black Line All modes Indicates the connection units or enumeration sets do
with Red not match.
Circle
Blue Line Configuration mode Indicates a selected connection line.
Magenta Line Simulation and Indicates a selected connection line.
Commissioning modes
Yellow Circle All modes Indicates a hidden edge label connected to an input.
Gray Circle All modes Indicates a hidden edge label connected to something
other than an input.

User Interface 105


Status Bar
The status bar displays the system name, hardware assignment indicator, system
capacity indicator, current connection type, connection status, and current CCT
mode.
If the open Controller Application File requires an upgrade to the latest version,
the status of (Upgradeable) appears next to the system name in the status bar and
the functionality of CCT becomes limited. For details on upgrading the file, see the
Upgrading System Files section.
The hardware assignment indicator options are:
• Assigned (Green)
• Not Assigned (Red)
The system capacity indicator displays the percentage of maximum objects
currently being used by your application.
The connection type options are:
• Bluetooth
• Ethernet
The connection status options are:
• Connecting
• Connected (Sensor/Actuator Bus)
• Connected (Field/Controller Bus)
• Disconnected
The current mode status options are:
• None
• Configuration
• Simulation
• Commissioning

106 CCT Help: Introduction


Details Dialog Box
The Details dialog box provides information on and allows you to modify the
selected module or block’s attributes/parameters, inputs and outputs, and hardware
attributes/parameters (if available). You can access this dialog box from a
module’s right-click menu regardless of whether the Control View or Logic View
is displayed in the workspace. You also can access the Details dialog box by
double-clicking a module from the Control View.
For the Network Inputs, Setpoint/Miscellaneous modules, State Generation
modules, Output Control modules, and Network Outputs, the Details dialog box
has one interface displaying the attributes/parameters of the selected module on the
left, and the inputs and outputs of the module appear in tables on the right.
For only Inputs and Outputs, the Details View interface has two tabs: Details tab
and Hardware View tab. For details, see the Details Tab (Inputs and Outputs) and
Hardware View Tab (Inputs and Outputs) sections.
Also, see the Details Dialog Box screen section.

Details Tab (Inputs and Outputs)


For only Inputs and Outputs, this tab appears in the Details dialog box and displays
the attributes/parameters of the selected module or block on the left and the inputs
and outputs of the module appear in tables on the right. See the Details Dialog Box
screen section for descriptions of the tab’s components (attribute table and Inputs
and Outputs tables).

Hardware View Tab (Inputs and Outputs)


For only Inputs and Outputs, this tab appears in the Details dialog box and displays
the selected module’s hardware related attributes/parameters and their defined
values. See the Details Dialog Box screen section for descriptions of the tab’s
components (attribute table).

Language Options
The CCT software installation program allows you to select the languages to
support and set the default language in which to run CCT. You can change these
language selections after initial installation without re-running the entire
installation program. The CCT Installation Instructions explains how to initially
set up and later change these language options. See the Related Documentation for
information on accessing this document.
You also can define preferences for localization. See the Setting and Using
Preferences section.

User Interface 107


Steps
Opening a Controller Application File
For details on creating a new system (File > New), see the Configuring a System
section.
To open an existing Controller Application File (.caf):
1. From the File menu, select Open. The Open dialog box appears.
2. Browse to the location of the saved Controller Application File (.caf) and
select the file to open.
Note: The default location of a Controller Application File (.caf) is
C:\Documents and Settings\username.
3. Click Open. The Controller Application File appears in the Control View of
CCT in Configuration mode.
Note: If the selected Controller Application File requires an upgrade, the
System Upgrade dialog box appears. For details on upgrading the file,
see the Upgrading System Files section.

Changing Modes
Note: CCT opens a Controller Application File (.caf) in Configuration mode by
default. The Configuration and Simulation modes are not available in the
CCT Commissioning only software version.
To change from Configuration mode to Simulation or Commissioning mode, click
the Simulate or Commission button. Or, select the menu options from the Modes
menu.
Note: The Configure button/menu text changes to Stop Simulation when in
Simulation mode and to Stop Commissioning when in Commissioning
mode.
To return to Configuration mode from Simulation or Commissioning mode, click
the Stop Simulation or Stop Commissioning button. Or, select the menu options
from the Modes menu.
Note: The Configuration mode acts as a transitional mode when you need to
switch from Simulation to Commissioning mode and vice versa. To change
from Simulation mode to Commissioning mode, for example, you must
first change to Configuration mode.
Note: When stopping simulation (Stop Simulation), a Confirm dialog box
appears prompting you to save or discard the changes made during
simulation.
Note: If you made changes to the system in a particular mode, CCT opens the
Save Confirmation dialog box prompting you to save. Click Yes to save the
changes before changing modes or No to discard them. If you select No,
CCT does not revert to the previous version and closes the system.

108 CCT Help: Introduction


Note: When in the Logic view, if you switch from Configuration mode to
Simulation mode after making changes, the Confirm dialog box has only
Yes and No options. If you click the X in the upper right corner of the
dialog, the cancel function does not occur. Instead, CCT saves the changes
and opens the Simulation dialog box; however, when switching from
Configuration mode to Commissioning mode in Logic View after making
changes, the Confirm dialog box has functional Yes, No, and Cancel
options.
Note: You must be in Configuration mode to close a Controller Application File
(.caf) or exit CCT.

Switching between Control View and Logic View


See Navigating between Control View and Logic View in the Configuring a System
section.

Printing Summary Reports


For information on printing the logic diagram, see Printing the Logic Diagram in
the Configuring a System section.
To print a summary report of the information in CCT:
1. From the File menu, select Print. The Summary Report Options dialog box
appears.
2. Select the check boxes for the information you want to print. See the Summary
Report Options screen section for descriptions.
3. Click OK. CCT creates a PDF using Adobe Acrobat Reader software
containing the selected information in report format.
Note: If the Summary Report does not open in Adobe Acrobat Reader
software, see the workaround in the Troubleshooting section.
4. Print and/or save the PDF as desired from the Adobe Acrobat Reader software.

Saving a Controller Application File


To save a Controller Application File (.caf):
1. Select Save from the File menu. The Save dialog box appears. Illegal
characters include:
: * ?"<>|/ \
Note: The default location to save a Controller Application File (.caf) is
C:\Documents and Settings\username.
2. Accept the default name or type a name for the file and click Save.

User Interface 109


Closing a Controller Application File
To close a Controller Application File (.caf), select Close from the File menu. If
you made changes, CCT opens the Save Confirmation dialog box prompting you
to save. Click Yes to save the changes before closing or No to discard them.
Note: You must be in Configuration mode to close a file. You cannot close a .caf
file in the CCT Commissioning only software. You must stop
Commissioning mode to remove a system from the CCT UI.
Note: The default location of a Controller Application File (.caf) is
C:\Documents and Settings\username.

Exiting CCT
To exit CCT, select Exit from the File menu.
Note: You must be in Configuration mode to exit CCT. In the CCT
Commissioning only software, you can exit CCT after you stop
Commissioning.

110 CCT Help: Introduction


Screens
CCT User Interface Screen
See Figure 2-1.
Table 2-11: CCT User Interface
Screen Area Description
Menu Bar Includes the menus available in CCT. See the Menu Bar section.
Mode Buttons Allows you to switch between the modes of operation while
working in CCT. The mode buttons are:
• Configuration (Stop Simulation or Stop Commissioning when in
Simulation or Commissioning mode)
• Simulation
• Commissioning
Note: The Configuration and Simulation modes are not available
in the CCT Commissioning only software version.
See the Modes section for information on the modes and buttons.
See the Menu Bar section for the mode menu options.
Operation Buttons Allows you to perform specific tasks in CCT. The operation tasks
and buttons are:
• Select System
Note: The Select System button is not enabled in Custom
Applications or Monitoring/Supervisory Control only
applications.
• Sideloop
• Define Hardware
• Load
See the Select System, Sideloop, Define Hardware, and Load
sections for descriptions of the operations. See the Menu Bar
section for the Operation menu options.
Quick Navigation Menu Allows you to navigate between the Control View (system
overview) and the Logic View of individual modules. The menu
also allows you to view/print the logic of the entire application. See
the Quick Navigation Menu section.
Control View and Displays the Control View or the Logic View contents. The Quick
Logic View Workspace Navigation menu appears in each view. See the following sections
for more information and details:
• Control/Logic View Workspace
• Control View and Control View Screen
• Logic View and Logic View Screen
Status Bar Indicates the system name, hardware assignment indicator,
system capacity indicator, current connection type, connection
status, and current CCT mode. See the Status Bar section.

User Interface 111


Control View Screen
The Control View is part of the CCT UI. See the Control View in Figure 2-1 and in
the CCT User Interface Screen section. See the Modes section for information on
the modes of operation.
Table 2-12: Control View (Part 1 of 2)
Screen Area Description
Module Sections Displays the modules used in the selected system in categorized
sections. The flow of the content is from left to right where network
inputs and inputs appear on the left, control/logic/state
components are in the center, and network outputs and outputs
appear on the right. The module categories in the CCT Control
View are:
• Network Inputs
• Inputs
• Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• State Generation
• State Selection
• Output Control
• Network Outputs
• Outputs
See the Control View Module Categories section for information
on these types.
Connections Table Displays the source and destination exposed ports with the
associated input and output connection of the selected module(s).
The Connections table is divided into three sections: Source,
Selected Module, and Destination.
Note: When selecting multiple modules at once, a table appears
in the Connections area for each module selected.
The Source module section lists the module from which the
selected module receives its input and has the following columns:
• Block: Displays the name of the connected module.
• Port: Displays the port being connected.
The Selected Module section indicates the name of the selected
module and has the following columns:
• Input: Displays the exposed port inputs used for the
connection.
• Output: Displays the exposed port outputs used for the
connection.
The Destination module section lists the module to which the
selected module sends its output and has the following columns:
• Block: Displays the name of the connected module.
• Port: Displays the port being connected.
See the Connections Table section for more information and
right-click menu options.

112 CCT Help: Introduction


Table 2-12: Control View (Part 2 of 2)
Screen Area Description
Parameters Table Lists the parameters/attributes of all modules that are exposed for
connection (Expose Ports > For Connection) and to BACnet
systems (Expose Ports > For BACnet). The components of the
Parameters table are:
• Edit button: Enters Edit mode and allows modification of
default parameter/attributes values.
• Apply button: Saves the changes to parameter/attributes
values.
• Cancel button: Cancels the edits made and exits Edit mode.
• Item column: Lists the names of the parameters/attributes.
• Current Value column: Displays the current calculated values
of the parameters/attributes (Simulation and Commissioning
modes only).
• Default Value column: Displays the default values of the
parameters/attributes.
• Units column: Displays the units of measurement used for the
parameters/attributes.
• Standard Name column: Displays descriptive text for the
parameters/attributes.
Note: You cannot modify outputs of modules from the
Parameters table.
Balancer Tab Allows you to autocalibrate VAV boxes and set flow constants.
This tab appears in Commissioning mode only for VAV
applications. The components of the Balancer tab are:
• Edit button: Enters Edit mode and allows modification of
parameter/attributes values.
• Apply button: Saves the changes to parameter/attributes
values.
• Cancel button: Cancels the edits made and exits Edit mode.
• Auto Calibrate button:1 Opens the Auto Calibrate Command
dialog box.
• Flow Override button:1 Opens the Flow Override Command
dialog box.
• Flow Restore button:1 Opens the Flow Restore Command
dialog box.
• Calculate K-Factors button:1 Opens the Calculate K-Factors
Command dialog box.
• Item column: Lists the names of the parameters/attributes.
• Current Value column: Displays the current calculated values
of the parameters/attributes.
• Default Value column: Displays the default values of the
parameters/attributes.
• Units column: Displays the units of measurement used for the
parameters/attributes.
• Standard Name column: Displays descriptive text for the
parameters/attributes.
See the Commissioning a System section for details on using this
tab.

1. This option is available only in Test Mode.

User Interface 113


Logic View Screen
The Logic View is part of the CCT UI. See the CCT User Interface Screen section.
See the Modes section for information on the modes of operation.
Table 2-13: Logic View
Screen Area Description
Toolbar Displays the icons for the actions you can perform in the Logic
View. See the Toolbar (Logic View) section.
Control Block Palette Contains a tree view (folders) of the blocks to drag and drop into
the logic diagram and the Block Finder search feature. See the
Control Block Palette and Block Finder sections.
The Control Block palette does not appear when viewing logic of
the entire application (View Application Logic option of the Quick
Navigation menu).
Logic Diagram Displays a graphical representation of the selected module’s logic.
See the Logic Diagram section for information on the diagram and
its components.

114 CCT Help: Introduction


Details Dialog Box
The Details dialog box displays software and hardware attributes/parameters for
modules or logic blocks. The Details dialog box has no tabs for the Network
Inputs, Setpoint/Miscellaneous modules, State Generation modules, Output
Control modules, and Network Outputs. For only Inputs and Outputs, the Details
dialog box has two tabs: Details tab and Hardware View tab. See the Details
Dialog Box section.
Table 2-14: Details Dialog Box
Screen Area Description
Items Common to All Tabs/Screens
Basic Radio Button Displays only basic information in the view.
Advanced Radio Button Displays the advanced information in the view in addition
to the basic data.
Edit Button Enters Edit mode and allows modification of items in the
view.
Apply Button Saves the changes to items in the view.
Cancel Button Cancels the edits made and exits Edit mode.
Details
Attribute Table Lists the selected module/block’s attributes/parameters,
their defined values, and units.
Input and Output Tables Displays both an Inputs and an Outputs table for the
selected module/block. These tables include the
following data:
• Name: Displays the name of the input or output.
• Standard Name: Displays the Johnson Controls
standard name used for the input or output.
• Default Value: Displays the default values of the
inputs and outputs.
• Units: Displays the units of measurement used for
the inputs and outputs.
• Display Precision: Displays the Display Precision
value used for the inputs and outputs (for example,
10ths).
Hardware View
Attribute Table Lists the selected module/block’s hardware related
attributes/parameters, their defined values, and units.
See the Modules, Logic, and CCT Input and Output
Object Overview sections.

User Interface 115


Summary Report Options
See Printing Summary Reports.
For information on printing the logic diagram, see Printing the Logic Diagram in
the Configuring a System section.
Table 2-15: Summary Report Options
Field Description
Project Information Prints the following project information:
• CCT Version
• Configuration File (Controller Application File, .caf, name)
• Configuration Date (MM/DD/YYYY)
• Engineering Units (Imperial or Metric from the New System
dialog box)
• Application Name (System Name entered in the New System
dialog box)
• Assigned to Controller (list of the hardware devices defined
during hardware definition)
• System Capacity (%)
Job Information Prints the information entered in the Job Information dialog box.
System Selection Summary Prints the selections made during System Selection.
Controller Summary Prints a summary of the hardware network settings, including:
• Device
• Address
• Type (of device)
• BACnet ID
IO Summary Prints a brief summary of the hardware point assignments:
• Label (Input, Network Input, and Output)
• Object Name
• Attribute (Description and Signal only)
• Value
• Units
IO Summary With Basic Prints a summary of the hardware point assignments:
Information • Label (Input, Network Input, and Output)
• Object Name
• Attribute (Description, Signal, Display, Setup, and Hardware
only)
• Value
• Units
IO Summary With Advanced Prints a detailed summary of the hardware point assignments:
Information • Label (Input, Network Input, and Output)
• Object Name
• Attribute (All)
• Value
• Units
Parameters Prints the Parameters list, including:
• Item (module type, module name, and parameters)
• Default Value
• Standard Name
Balancer Prints the Balancer tab information, including:
• Item
• Current Value
• Default Value
• Units
• Standard Name

116 CCT Help: Introduction


Table 2-15: Summary Report Options
Field Description
Connections Prints the Connections tables, including the following for each
table:
• Source Block and Port
• Selected Module Input and Output
• Destination Block and Port
State Tables Prints the State Tables.
OK Creates a report of the selected data in PDF format that you can
print and/or save.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without creating a printable PDF.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

User Interface 117


118 CCT Help: Introduction
Chapter 3: CCT Help: Introduction
Getting Started
Introduction
Use this section to get started using the CCT software and to guide you through
common tasks CCT allows you to perform. Gather any information you need to
complete these tasks before beginning.
The tasks are categorized as follows:
• Configuration and Simulation Tasks - Configuration and Simulation tasks
include creating and configuring your system, simulating your system, and
defining its associated hardware.
• Commissioning and Servicing Tasks - Commissioning and servicing tasks
include loading and commissioning devices.

Steps
Configuration and Simulation Tasks
Configuration and Simulation tasks include the following:
1. Set or import naming and signal preferences and System Selection Wizard
defaults if you plan to add a new system (optional) (Setting and Using
Preferences).
2. Create a new system or open an existing system (Controller Application File)
(Configuring a System).
Note: You may be prompted to upgrade your system when opening an
existing file. For details, see the Upgrading System Files section.
3. Edit a system (Configuring a System):
• Add Inputs and Outputs (optional).
• Edit attributes/parameters.
- Change Input and Output signals (optional).
- Set up peer-to-peer communication on Network Inputs or Network
Outputs (optional).
• Edit the State Table (optional).
• Add custom logic (optional).
4. Simulate a system (Simulating a System).
5. Define hardware (Defining Hardware).
6. Save the Controller Application File (File > Save).

Getting Started 119


Commissioning and Servicing Tasks
Commissioning and Servicing tasks include the following:
1. Load a device (Loading Devices):
• Make a connection:
- Bluetooth connection on SAB
- Bluetooth connection on FCB
- Ethernet NAE Passthru
• Upload or Download
2. If you have VAV systems, perform a Box Flow test for all the appropriate
devices of a given MS/TP bus (optional). Repeat this process for other buses.
(Performing a Box Flow Test).
3. Commission a system (Commissioning a System):
• Make a connection:
- Bluetooth connection on SAB
- Bluetooth connection on FCB
- Ethernet NAE Passthru
• Observe the connected application
• Test a system in Test mode
• Adjust Offsets, COVs, and Polarity values as necessary.
• Adjust Inputs and Outputs ranges and Details dialog box Hardware tab
attributes/parameters as necessary.
• Exit commissioning.
4. Save the Controller Application File (File > Save) if you made changes during
commissioning.

120 CCT Help: Introduction


Chapter 4: CCT Help: System Upgrade
Upgrading System Files
Introduction
The CCT upgrade process allows you to easily upgrade an existing .caf file to the
latest modules or system selection default selections.

Concepts
System Module and File Upgrades
When you open a Controller Application File (.caf) that requires an upgrade, CCT
automatically displays a dialog box prompting you to either upgrade the modules
or keep the modules at the current version. Depending on the type of upgrade, CCT
displays two different dialog boxes: a dialog box that displays modules that need to
be upgraded and a dialog box that appears if no modules require upgrading. The
following list describes the two dialog boxes:
• system upgrades with module upgrades
If the file requires module upgrades, then a dialog appears displaying a list of
standard modules included as part of the upgrade process. This dialog box also
displays a list of user-modified modules, if any. CCT does not upgrade
user-modified modules. User-modified modules appear in the Control View
with a triangle next to the module.
• system upgrades without module upgrades
If the file does not require module upgrades, then a smaller dialog box appears
prompting you to upgrade the system.
If you choose not to upgrade the modules, the status bar displays the status of
Upgradeable and the functionality of CCT becomes limited. With this limited
functionality, CCT only allows you to:
• edit detail views
• commission the current application
• edit parameters (default values only)
• view the Hardware Definition Wizard
• view the System Selection tree
If necessary, CCT provides a menu option to upgrade your file at a later time
(Tools > Upgrade System).

Upgrading System Files 121


Upgraded Modules
Table 4-16 displays a list and description of the modules that may appear in the
module upgrade dialog box when you upgrade your system. Use this table as a
reference to determine whether to upgrade the system.
Note: As of Release 3.0, CCT contains modules and system selections to support
UL 864 UUKL Smoke Control sequencing. Some modules were updated to
handle the proper command priority requirements for this support.
Table 4-16: Updated Modules (Part 1 of 3)
Module Version Description
Building Load Calculation (Calculate 3.0 As of Release 3.0, this module is no longer used.
Building Load) System Selection now loads the Building Load
Calculation v2 module, which is a new version of
this module that includes a setup element for proper
support of SI and IP unit sets. The new v2 module
also fixes an error in the calculation of the load
when the medium is water.
Emergency Mode Sequencing 3.0 As of Release 3.0, this module is no longer used.
System Selection now loads the Smoke Control
Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL module. The original
module has been updated to handle the command
priority requirements for UL Smoke Control
sequencing.
Mixed Air Cold Deck Sequencing 3.0 As of Release 3.0, this module is no longer used.
[Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD)] System Selection now loads an instance of the
Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD w HR) module
called Mixed Air Cold Deck HR Sequencing.
Note: HR stands for Heat Recovery.
Mixed Air Single Duct Sequencing 3.0 As of Release 3.0, this module is no longer used for
[Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD)] Mixed Air Single Duct applications. System
Selection now loads an instance of the Occupied
Sequencing (AHU MASD w HR) module called
Mixed Air Single Duct HR Sequencing.
This new module is used by the AHU Mixed Air
Single Duct Application and Rooftop Unit
Application.
Variable Capacity Exhaust Fan BSP 3.0 As of Release 3.0, these modules are no longer
Control and Variable Capacity Return used. System Selection now loads the Return Fan
Fan BSP Control (Fan Return or BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL or Exhaust Fan BSP
Exhaust BSP Control) Control for UL-864-UUKL module. The original
module has been updated to handle the command
priority requirements for UL Smoke Control
sequencing.
Note: BSP stands for Building Static Pressure.
Variable Capacity Exhaust Fan 3.0 As of Release 3.0, these modules are no longer
Volume Match Control and Variable used. System Selection now loads the Exhaust Fan
Capacity Return Fan Volume Match Volume Match Control for UL-864-UUKL or Return
Control (Fan Return or Exhaust Fan Volume Match Control for UL-864-UUKL
Volume Match Control) module. The original module has been updated to
handle the command priority requirements for UL
Smoke Control sequencing.
Variable Capacity Relief Fan BSP 3.0 As of Release 3.0, this module is no longer used.
Control (Fan Relief Variable Capacity System Selection now loads the Relief Fan BSP
BSP Control) Control for UL-864-UUKL module. The original
module has been updated to handle the command
priority requirements for UL Smoke Control
sequencing.

122 CCT Help: System Upgrade


Table 4-16: Updated Modules (Part 2 of 3)
Module Version Description
Variable Capacity Supply Fan Control 3.0 As of Release 3.0, this module is no longer used.
(Fan Supply Duct Static Control) System Selection now loads the Supply Fan Duct
Static Control for UL-864-UUKL module. The
original module has been updated to handle the
command priority requirements for UL Smoke
Control sequencing.
Heating Staged Output with DA-T 3.0 As of Release 3.0, this module is upgraded to
Low Limit provide proper functionality. The changes are
similar to the Release 2.2 changes: includes an
integrated deadband for the PID (based on the MSC
Band), and improves the PRAC and adaptive tuning
performance if used in conjunction with the MSC.
Staged Box Heating Control 2.2.3 This module now sets the Instant Shutdown output
when the Proof of Airflow input is not True.
2 Pipe 2 Position Valve 2.2 Includes an integrated deadband for the PID (based
on the MSC Band).
2 Pipe 2 Position Valve w DA-T Low
Limit Improves the PRAC and adaptive tuning
performance if used in conjunction with the MSC.
Cooling 2 Position Valve
Cooling Staged Output
Cooling Staged Output with
Dehumidification
Heat Pump Staged Compressors
Heating 2 Position Valve
Heating 2 Position Valve with DA-T
Low Limit
Heating Staged Output
Heating Staged Output with DA-T
Low Limit
Heating Staged Output with Low
Limit
Humidification Staged Output
Sideloop PI Staged Output
Sideloop PI With Reset Staged
Output
Application Mode Override 2.2 As of Release 2.2, this module is no longer used.
System Selection now loads the Application Mode
Determination module.
Damper Control for UV Cycle 1, 2, or 2.2 Removes logic that prevented the Min and Max
W Value of the PID from being equal. The PID has
built-in protection; therefore, the exterior objects are
Damper Control with Low Limit
unnecessary.
DA-T Unoccupied Status 2.2 As of Release 2.2, this module is no longer used.
Determination System Selection now loads the DA-T Unocc Status
Determination module for intermittent unoccupied
operation of DA-T control systems.

Upgrading System Files 123


Table 4-16: Updated Modules (Part 3 of 3)
Module Version Description
Sideloop Interlock Binary To Analog 2.2 Provides more generic configuration values
applicable to the Sideloop System Selection
Sideloop PI Proportional Output
feature.
Sideloop PI Staged Output
Sideloop PI With Reset Proportional
Output
Sideloop PI With Reset Staged
Output
Sideloop Reset Output
Steam Isolation Valve Control 2.2 As of Release 2.2, this module is no longer used.
System Mode Pass Through 2.2 As of Release 2.2, this module is no longer used.
System Selection now loads the System Mode
Determination module.
Unoccupied Sequencing (Common) 2.2 Removes two ambiguous combinations of the input
modes. Previously, the command hierarchy had two
active rows when Occupancy = Unoccupied, Zone
Control = False, Off During Unoccupied = False,
and WarmupCooldown = Warmup or Cooldown.
This combination was only applicable to the DA-T
Unoccupied Status Determination instance used in
the Air Handling Unit systems.

124 CCT Help: System Upgrade


New Modules
Table 4-17 displays a list and description of the new modules that were added to
the system since the last release.
Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 1 of 9)
Module Version Description
2 Pipe Pump Alarms (Latching Alarm 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Lockout Switch
2 Pipe Pump Blocking Protection 3.1 This module monitors the command signal to the
pump. If the pump is off for a period of time (default
is 7 days), the pump then starts and runs for a short
period of time.
2 Pipe Pump Command LV [Last 3.1 This module passes the command back to other
Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)] modules in the application and eliminates circular
dependencies (loops) in the application code.
2 Pipe Pump Status Alarm 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
Determination device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
CD-T sp Reset by OA (Setpoint Reset 3.1 This module resets the Cold Deck Setpoint using
by OA) the Outside Air Temperature, and four span
parameters.
Chiller X Control (Where X Is Now 3.1 This module provides enable/disable control of a
1-8) (Plant Control) chiller.
Chiller X Enable LV (Where X Is Now 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum, (loop) to feed the enable signal from the control
Float)] module to the sequencer.
Chiller X Interlock Cmd LV (Where X 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
Is Now 1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, (loop) to feed the chiller interlock signal from the
Enum, Float)] control module to the isolation valve status module.
Chiller X LV (Where X Is Now 1-8) 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
[Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)] (loop) to feed the chiller runtime signal from the
totalization block to the sequencer.
Chiller X Totalization (Where X Is Now 3.1 This module totalizes the runtime for a chiller.
1-8) [Totalization (Enum Runtime)]
CHW PumpX Enable LV (Where X Is 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
Now 1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum, (loop) to feed the enable signal from the control
Float)] module to the sequencer.
Cooling Pump Alarms (Latching 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
Alarm Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Lockout Switch
Cooling Pump Blocking Protection 3.1 This module monitors the command to the cooling
coil pump. If the pump is off for a period of time
(default is 7 days), the output turns on for a short
period of time (default is 5 seconds).
Cooling Pump Command LV [Last 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)] (loop) from the command to the cooling coil pump to
the alarm status determination.

Upgrading System Files 125


Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 2 of 9)
Module Version Description
Cooling Pump Status Alarm 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
Determination device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
CW Pump X Control v2 (Where X Is 3.1 This module provides enable/disable control of a
1-8) (Pump Control v2) condenser water pump.
CW Pump X LV (Where X Is 1-8) [Last 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)] (loop) to feed the condenser water pump runtime
signal from the totalization block to the sequencer.
CW Pump X Totalization (Where X Is 3.1 This module totalizes the runtime for a condenser
1-8) [Totalization (Enum Runtime)] water pump.
CW PumpX Enable LV (Where X Is 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum, (loop) to feed the enable signal from the control
Float)] module to the sequencer.
CWPX Alarms (Where X Is 1-8) 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
(Latching Alarm Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
CWPX Blocking Protection (Where X 3.1 This module monitors the command to the
Is 1-8) condenser water pump. If the pump is off for a
period of time (default is 7 days), the output turns on
for a short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
CWPX Status Alarm Determination 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
(Where X Is 1-8) device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
DA-T sp Reset by OA (Setpoint Reset 3.1 This module resets the Discharge Air Setpoint using
by OA) the Outside Air Temperature, and four span
parameters.
Econ Enable OA versus RA 3.1 This module compares the Outside Air Temperature
(Economizer Availability RA-T to the Return Air Temperature to determine whether
Compare) the conditions are suitable for using the economizer
to condition the air.
Energy Wheel Two Pos Byp (Heat 3.1 This module provides modulating control of a
Recovery Wheel with 2 Pos Bypass variable speed heat recovery wheel that also has
Dampers) two-position bypass dampers.
Exhaust Fan Alarms (Latching Alarm 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
Exhaust Fan Command LV [Last 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)] (loop) from the command to the exhaust fan to its
alarm status determination.

126 CCT Help: System Upgrade


Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 3 of 9)
Module Version Description
Exhaust Fan Status Alarm 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
Determination device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
Frost Protection Determination 3.1 This module monitors the outside air temperature
(Central Heating Low Temp Control) and the zone air temperature to determine when to
take frost protection actions:
• When the OA Temp is below the first setpoint,
the Primary pumps start.
• When the OA Temp is below the second
setpoint and the Zone is above the zone
setpoint, the Boilers start.
• When the OA Temp is below the second
setpoint and the Zone is below the zone
setpoint, the zone loops start.
HD-T sp Reset by OA (Setpoint Reset 3.1 This module resets the Hot Deck Setpoint using the
by OA) Outside Air Temperature, and four span
parameters.
Heat Exchanger with Low Limit 3.1 This module provides control of a high temperature
Output (Heat Exchanger with Return hot water supply heat exchanger. This module also
Water Control) provides a low limit control based on the water’s
leaving high temperature value.
Heat Recovery Pump Alarms 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
(Latching Alarm Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Lockout Switch
Heat Recovery Pump Blocking 3.1 This module monitors the command to the heat
Protection recovery glycol pump. If the pump is off for a period
of time (default is 7 days), the output turns on for a
short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
Heat Recovery Pump Command LV 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
[Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)] (loop) from the command to the heat recovery glycol
pump to its alarm status determination.
Heat Recovery Pump Status Alarm 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
Determination device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
Heating Zone X Output (Where X Is 3.1 This module provides control of a zone hot water
1-8) (Heating Proportional Valve with loop.
Low Limit)
Heating Zone X SP Reset (Where X Is 3.1 This module resets the Heating Zone 1 Setpoint
1-8) (Setpoint Reset by OA) using the Outside Air Temperature and four span
parameters.
High Temp Alarm Pass Through 3.1 This module passes the signal from the Hi Temp
[Pass Through (Enum)] alarm to the State Selection module.
HR Energy Wheel Alarms (Latching 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
Alarm Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch

Upgrading System Files 127


Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 4 of 9)
Module Version Description
HR Energy Wheel Blocking 3.1 This module monitors the command to the heat
Protection recovery energy wheel. If the wheel is off for a
period of time (default is 7 days), the output turns on
for a short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
HR Energy Wheel Command LV [Last 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)] (loop) from the command to the heat recovery
energy wheel to its alarm status determination.
HR Energy Wheel Status Alarm 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
Determination device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
Humidification Pump Command LV 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
[Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)] (loop) from the command to the humidification pump
to its alarm status determination.
Humidity Scrubber Output 3.1 This module provides control of a spray humidifier
(Humidification Scrubber Output) and opens/closes the fill and drain valves.
Min Outdoor Air Fan Command LV 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
[Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)] (loop) from the command to the minimum outdoor
air fan to its alarm status determination.
Min Outdoor Air Fan Status Alarm 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
Determination device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
Minimum OA Fan Alarms (Latching 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
Alarm Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
PCHWPX Alarms (Where X Is 1-8) 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
(Latching Alarm Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
PCHWPX Blocking Protection (Where 3.1 This module monitors the command to the primary
X Is 1-8) chilled water pump. If the pump is off for a period of
time (default is 7 days), the output turns on for a
short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
PCHWPX Command LV (Where X Is 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum, (loop) from the command to a primary chilled water
Float)] pump to its alarm status determination.
PCHWPX Status Alarm Determination 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
(Where X Is 1-8) device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
PHWPX Blocking Protection (Where 3.1 This module monitors the command to the primary
X Is 1-4) hot water pump. If the pump is off for a period of
time (default is 7 days), the output turns on for a
short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.

128 CCT Help: System Upgrade


Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 5 of 9)
Module Version Description
PHWPX Command LV (Where X Is 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
1-4) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum, (loop) from the command to a primary hot water
Float)] pump to its alarm status determination.
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
PHWPX Status Alarm Determination 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
(Where X Is 1-4) device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
Preheat Proportional Valve Output 3.1 This module provides control of a preheat valve.
(Preheat Proportional Valve with This modules also provides low limit control based
Return Water Control) on the leaving water temperature.
Preheat Pump Alarms (Latching 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
Alarm Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Lockout Switch
Preheat Pump Blocking Protection 3.1 This module monitors the command to the preheat
coil water pump. If the pump is off for a period of
time (default is 7 days), the output turns on for a
short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
Preheat Pump Command LV [Last 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)] (loop) from the command to the preheat coil water
pump to its alarm status determination.
Preheat Pump Status Alarm 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
Determination device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
Primary CHW Pump X Control v2 3.1 This module provides enable/disable control of a
(Where X Is 1-8) (Pump Control v2) primary chilled water pump.
Primary CHW Pump X LV (Where X Is 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
Now 1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum, (loop) to feed the primary chilled water pump
Float)] runtime signal from the totalization block to the
sequencer.
Primary CHW Pump X Totalization 3.1 This module totalizes the runtime for a primary
(Where X Is Now 1-8) [Totalization chilled water pump.
(Enum Runtime)]
Primary Pump X Control v2 (Where X 3.1 This module provides enable/disable control of a
Is 1-4) (Pump Control v2) primary hot water pump.
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
RA-T sp Reset by OA (Setpoint Reset 3.1 This module resets the Return Air Setpoint using
by OA) the Outside Air Temperature and four span
parameters.
Reheat Pump Alarms (Latching Alarm 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Lockout Switch
Reheat Pump Blocking Protection 3.1 This module monitors the command to the reheat
coil water pump. If the pump is off for a period of
time (default is 7 days), the output turns on for a
short period of time (default is 5 seconds).

Upgrading System Files 129


Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 6 of 9)
Module Version Description
Reheat Pump Command LV [Last 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)] (loop) from the command to the reheat coil water
pump to its alarm status determination.
Reheat Pump Status Alarm 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
Determination device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
Relief Fan Alarms (Latching Alarm 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
Relief Fan Command LV [Last Value 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(Boolean, Enum, Float)] (loop) from the command to relief fan to its alarm
status determination.
Relief Fan Status Alarm 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
Determination device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
Return Fan Alarms (Latching Alarm 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
Return Fan Command LV [Last Value 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
(Boolean, Enum, Float)] (loop) from the command to the return fan to its
alarm status determination.
Return Fan Status Alarm 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
Determination device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
SCHWPX Alarms (Where X Is 1-8) 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
(Latching Alarm Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
SCHWPX Blocking Protection (Where 3.1 This module monitors the command to the
X Is 1-8) secondary cooling water pump. If the pump is off for
a period of time (default is 7 days), the output turns
on for a short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
SCHWPX Command LV (Where X Is 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum, (loop) from the command to a secondary chilled
Float)] water pump to its alarm status determination.

130 CCT Help: System Upgrade


Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 7 of 9)
Module Version Description
SCHWPX Status Alarm Determination 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
(Where X Is 1-8) device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
Secondary CHW Pump X LV (Where X 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
Is Now 1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, (loop) to feed the secondary chilled water pump
Enum, Float)] runtime signal from the totalization block to the
sequencer.
Secondary CHW Pump X Modulating 3.1 This module provides enable/disable control of a
Control v2 (Where X Is 1-8) (Pump secondary chilled water pump.
Control v2)
Secondary CHW Pump X Totalization 3.1 This module totalizes the runtime for a primary
(Where X Is Now 1-8) [Totalization chilled water pump.
(Enum Runtime)]
Secondary HW Pump X Control v2 3.1 This module provides enable/disable control of a
(Where X Is 1-4) (Pump Control v2) secondary hot water pump.
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
SHWPX Alarms (Where X Is 1-4) 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
(Latching Alarm Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
SHWPX Blocking Protection (Where 3.1 This module monitors the command sent to the
X Is 1-4) secondary hot water pump. If the pump is off for a
period of time (default is 7 days), the output turns on
for a short period of time (default is 5 seconds).
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
SHWPX Command LV (Where X Is 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
1-4) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum, (loop) from the command to a secondary hot water
Float)] pump to its alarm status determination.
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
SHWPX Status Alarm Determination 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
(Where X Is 1-4) device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
Note: A future release will expand the range to 1-8.
Supply Fan Alarms (Latching Alarm 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
Tower Fan X Control v2 (Where X Is 3.1 This module provides enable/disable control of a
1-8) (Pump Control v2) cooling tower fan.
Tower Fan X Enable LV (Where X Is 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
Now 1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum, (loop) to feed the enable signal from the control
Float)] module to the sequencer.

Upgrading System Files 131


Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 8 of 9)
Module Version Description
Tower Fan X LV (Where X Is Now 1-8) 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
[Last Value (Boolean, Enum, Float)] (loop) to feed the cooling tower fan runtime signal
from the totalization block to the sequencer.
Tower Fan X Totalization (Where X Is 3.1 This module totalizes the runtime for a cooling tower
Now 1-8) [Totalization (Enum fan.
Runtime)]
TwrFanX Alarms (Where X Is 1-8) 3.1 This module collects the following alarms and
(Latching Alarm Manager) presents one output that is in alarm when any of the
collected alarms is in the alarm state:
• Status
• Frequency Converter Fault
• Motor Overload Tripped
• Belt Alarm
• Lockout Switch
TwrFanX Blocking Protection (Where 3.1 This module monitors the command sent to the
X Is 1-8) cooling tower fan. If the fan is off for a period of time
(default is 7 days), the output turns on for a short
period of time (default is 5 seconds).
TwrFanX Command LV (Where X Is 3.1 This last value eliminates the circular dependency
1-8) [Last Value (Boolean, Enum, (loop) from the command to a cooling tower fan to
Float)] its alarm status determination.
TwrFanX Status Alarm Determination 3.1 This module compares the command sent to the
(Where X Is 1-8) device with the status of the device to determine
whether the device has failed. A failure occurs when
the Status is lost for a period of time after being
commanded on.
Building Load Calculation v2 3.0 This module replaces the Building Load Calculation
module. This module is a new version of the original
module that includes a setup element for proper
support of SI and IP unit sets. The new v2 module
also fixes an error in the calculation of the load
when the medium is water.
Damper Trouble Detection 3.0 This module provides position detection for VAV
(Cold Deck Damper Trouble dampers. This module also provides an indication of
Detection, Exhaust Damper Trouble failure due to the damper not opening or closing
Detection, Hot Deck Damper Trouble properly. This module is used for UL 864 UUKL
Detection, and Supply Damper Smoke Control support to validate the VAV damper
Trouble Detection) is in the commanded position.
Used by: VAV Single Duct Application, VAV Slave
Single Duct Application, VAV Dual Duct Application,
and VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Exhaust Fan BSP Control for 3.0 This module provides outputs that allow proper
UL-864-UUKL command prioritization of the outputs to meet
UL 864 UUKL requirements.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
Exhaust Fan Volume Match Control 3.0 This module provides outputs that allow proper
for UL-864-UUKL command prioritization of the outputs to meet
UL 864 UUKL requirements.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability 3.0 This module uses the enthalpy of the outdoor and
Determination return air to determine whether the heat recovery
device should be heating or cooling the supply air.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
Heat Recovery Wheel with Bypass 3.0 This module provides control for a heat recover
Dampers wheel that has bypass dampers.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications

132 CCT Help: System Upgrade


Table 4-17: New Modules (Part 9 of 9)
Module Version Description
Mixed Air Cold Deck HR Sequencing 3.0 This module provides proper sequencing for a dual
[Occupied Sequencing (AHU MADD w path air handling unit that supports both mixed air
HR)] control and a heat recovery device.
Used by: AHU Mixed Air Dual Duct Application and
Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Mixed Air Single Duct HR Sequencing 3.0 This module provides proper sequencing for a
[Occupied Sequencing (AHU MASD w single path air handling unit that supports both
HR)] mixed air control and a heat recovery device.
Used by: AHU Mixed Air Single Duct Application
and Rooftop Unit Application
Relief Fan BSP Control for 3.0 This module provides outputs that allow proper
UL-864-UUKL command prioritization of the outputs to meet
UL 864 UUKL requirements.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
Return Fan BSP Control for 3.0 This module provides outputs that allow proper
UL-864-UUKL command prioritization of the outputs to meet
UL 864 UUKL requirements.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
Return Fan Volume Match Control for 3.0 This module provides outputs that allow proper
UL-864-UUKL command prioritization of the outputs to meet
UL 864 UUKL requirements.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
Secondary Chill Water Pump PID v2 3.0 This module provides control of a secondary
(Secondary Pump PID) pumping system.
Used by: Central Cooling Applications
Secondary Hot Water Pump PID v2 3.0 This module provides control of a secondary
(Secondary Pump PID) pumping system.
Used by: Central Heating Applications
Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control 3.0 This module provides the flow setpoint for a slave
single duct VAV box.
Used by: VAV Slave Single Duct Application
Slave Supply Flow Setpoint Control 3.0 This module provides the flow setpoint for a slave
Dual Duct (Slave CD Constant Flow dual duct VAV box.
Setpoint Control, Slave CD Flow Used by: VAV Slave Dual Duct Application
Setpoint Control, and Slave HD Flow
Setpoint Control)
Smoke Control Sequencing for 3.0 This module provides the proper command
UL-864-UUKL prioritization of the fans and dampers to meet
UL 864 UUKL requirements.
Used by: All Applications
Supply Fan Duct Static Control for 3.0 This module provides outputs that allow proper
UL-864-UUKL command prioritization of the outputs to meet
UL 864 UUKL requirements.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout 3.0 This module locks out the fan during unoccupied
periods if the cooling is not available.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications
Unocc Heating Fan Lockout 3.0 This module locks out the fan during unoccupied
periods if the heating is not available.
Used by: Air Handling Unit Applications

Upgrading System Files 133


System Selection Updates
After you upgrade the .caf file, you have the option to replace the logic originally
created by System Selection to receive the updated modules and the functionality
found for the system types in Table 4-18 through Table 4-31.
However, if you decide to modify the System Selection, then all previous
parameters, configurations, and hardware settings are lost. Table 4-18 through
Table 4-31 display a list of system types that changed since the last release of
CCT. Use this table as a reference to determine whether to modify the System
Selection. See Viewing and Modifying System Selections for more information.
Table 4-18: All System Types
Version Description
2.2 • Loads Max Cap Fract LV modules only if two or more stages are selected.
• Loads Water System Flush Pass Through if Hot Water or Chilled Water valves are
selected.

Table 4-19: Air-Handling Unit – Mixed Air Single Duct


Version Description
3.1 This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides a preheat control module with low limit control based on the leaving water
temperature.
• Provides options for alarm management of all devices. Includes alarms for device
status, frequency drive fault, motor overload tripped, belt alarm, and a lockout switch.
• Provides option of blocking protection for all coil pumps.
• Provides additional setpoint reset options.
• Provides a comparison of outdoor air dry bulb temperature to return air dry bulb
temperature to enable economizer cooling.
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected or
an alarm that can stop the fan is loaded.
• Loads Supply Fan Duct Static Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Supply Fan Control.
• Loads Return Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Return Fan BSP Control.
• Loads Return Fan Volume Match Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable
Capacity Return Fan Volume Match Control. This output controller switches to fan
tracking mode when the unit is unoccupied and the differential flow during
unoccupied is zero.
• Loads Relief Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity Relief
Fan BSP Control.
This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides Heat Recovery devices. These options include: single speed enthalpy
wheels with or without bypass dampers; glycol loop with or without a three-way
bypass valve; or enabling heat recovery based on either a dry bulb comparison or an
enthalpy comparison of outdoor and return air.
• Provides options to define the coil pumps as pressure/flow boost or as low
temperature circulation.
• Loads Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout and/or Unocc Heating Fan Lockout. These
modules prevent the fan from operating in the unoccupied mode when heating and/or
cooling are not available.
2.2 • Loads Application Mode Determination instead of Application Mode Override.
• Replaces Proportional Humidification Control with Packaged Humidifier Control and
Proportional Steam Humidification Control modules.
• Loads DA-T Unocc Status Determination instead of DA-T Unoccupied Status
Determination for intermittent unoccupied operation of DA-T control systems.
• Updates State Selection table so that humidification is enabled to operate (if
necessary) during the Economizer mode.

134 CCT Help: System Upgrade


Table 4-20: Air-Handling Unit – Mixed Air Dual Duct
Version Description
3.1 This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides a preheat control module with low limit control based on the leaving water
temperature.
• Provides options for alarm management of all devices. Includes alarms for device
status, frequency drive fault, motor overload tripped, belt alarm, and a lockout switch.
• Provides option of blocking protection for all coil pumps.
• Provides additional setpoint reset options.
• Provides a comparison of outdoor air dry bulb temperature to return air dry bulb
temperature to enable economizer cooling.
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected or
an alarm that can stop the fan is loaded.
• Loads Supply Fan Duct Static Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Supply Fan Control.
• Loads Return Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Return Fan BSP Control.
• Loads Return Fan Volume Match Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable
Capacity Return Fan Volume Match Control. This output controller switches to fan
tracking mode when the unit is unoccupied and the differential flow during
unoccupied is zero.
• Loads Relief Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity Relief
Fan BSP Control.
This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides Heat Recovery devices. These options include: single speed enthalpy
wheels with or without bypass dampers; glycol loop with or without a three-way
bypass valve; or enabling heat recovery based on either a dry bulb comparison or an
enthalpy comparison of outdoor and return air.
• Provides options to define the coil pumps as pressure/flow boost or as low
temperature circulation.
• Loads Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout and/or Unocc Heating Fan Lockout. These
modules prevent the fan from operating in the unoccupied mode when heating and/or
cooling are not available.
2.2 • Loads Application Mode Determination instead of Application Mode Override.
• Replaces Proportional Humidification Control with Packaged Humidifier Control and
Proportional Steam Humidification Control modules.
• Loads DA-T Unocc Status Determination instead of DA-T Unoccupied Status
Determination for intermittent unoccupied operation of DA-T control systems.
• Updates State Selection table so that humidification is enabled to operate (if
necessary) during the Economizer mode.

Table 4-21: Air-Handling Unit – 100% OA Single Duct (Part 1 of 2)


Version Description
3.1 This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides a preheat control module with low limit control based on the leaving water
temperature.
• Provides options for alarm management of all devices. Includes alarms for device
status, frequency drive fault, motor overload tripped, belt alarm, and a lockout switch.
• Provides option of blocking protection for all coil pumps.
• Provides additional setpoint reset options.

Upgrading System Files 135


Table 4-21: Air-Handling Unit – 100% OA Single Duct (Part 2 of 2)
Version Description
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected or
an alarm that can stop the fan is loaded.
• Loads Supply Fan Duct Static Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Supply Fan Control.
• Loads Exhaust Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Exhaust Fan BSP Control.
• Loads Exhaust Fan Volume Match Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable
Capacity Exhaust Fan Volume Match Control.
This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides Heat Recovery devices. These options include: single speed enthalpy
wheels with or without bypass dampers; or enabling heat recovery based on either a
dry bulb comparison or an enthalpy comparison of outdoor and return air.
• Provides options to define the coil pumps as pressure/flow boost or as low
temperature circulation.
• Loads Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout and/or Unocc Heating Fan Lockout. These
modules prevent the fan from operating in the unoccupied mode when heating and/or
cooling are not available.
2.2 • Loads Application Mode Determination instead of Application Mode Override.
• Replaces Proportional Humidification Control with Packaged Humidifier Control and
Proportional Steam Humidification Control modules.
• Loads DA-T Unocc Status Determination instead of DA-T Unoccupied Status
Determination for intermittent unoccupied operation of DA-T control systems.

Table 4-22: Air-Handling Unit – 100% OA Dual Duct


Version Description
3.1 This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides a preheat control module with low limit control based on the leaving water
temperature.
• Provides options for alarm management of all devices. Includes alarms for device
status, frequency drive fault, motor overload tripped, belt alarm, and a lockout switch.
• Provides option of blocking protection for all coil pumps.
• Provides additional setpoint reset options.
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected or
an alarm that can stop the fan is loaded.
• Loads Supply Fan Duct Static Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Supply Fan Control.
• Loads Exhaust Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable Capacity
Exhaust Fan BSP Control.
• Loads Exhaust Fan Volume Match Control for UL-864-UUKL instead of Variable
Capacity Exhaust Fan Volume Match Control.
This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides Heat Recovery devices. These options include: single speed enthalpy
wheels with or without bypass dampers; or enabling heat recovery based on either a
dry bulb comparison or an enthalpy comparison of outdoor and return air.
• Provides options to define the coil pumps as pressure/flow boost or as low
temperature circulation.
• Loads Unocc Cooling Fan Lockout and/or Unocc Heating Fan Lockout. These
modules prevent the fan from operating in the unoccupied mode when heating and/or
cooling are not available.
2.2 • Loads Application Mode Determination instead of Application Mode Override.
• Replaces Proportional Humidification Control with Packaged Humidifier Control and
Proportional Steam Humidification Control modules.
• Loads DA-T Unocc Status Determination instead of DA-T Unoccupied Status
Determination for intermittent unoccupied operation of DA-T control systems.

136 CCT Help: System Upgrade


Table 4-23: Air-Handling Unit – Rooftop Unit
Version Description
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected.
• Provides options to define the coil pumps as pressure/flow boost or as low
temperature circulation.

Table 4-24: Air-Handling Unit – Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)


Version Description
3.1 This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides a preheat control module with low limit control based on the leaving water
temperature.
• Provides options for alarm management of all devices. Includes alarms for device
status, frequency drive fault, motor overload tripped, belt alarm, and a lockout switch.
• Provides option of blocking protection for all coil pumps.
• Provides additional setpoint reset options.
• Provides a comparison of outdoor air dry bulb temperature to return air dry bulb
temperature to enable economizer cooling.
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected.
• Provides Heat Recovery devices. These options include: single speed enthalpy
wheels with or without bypass dampers; glycol loop with or without a three-way
bypass valve; or enabling heat recovery based on either a dry bulb comparison or an
enthalpy comparison of outdoor and return air.
• Provides options to define the coil pumps as pressure/flow boost or as low
temperature circulation.

Table 4-25: VAV – Single Duct


Version Description
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected.
• Loads Supply Damper Trouble Detection when Smoke Control Support is selected.
• Loads Exhaust Damper Trouble Detection when Smoke Control Support and an
exhaust damper are selected.
• Provides support for use of calibration solenoid(s) to set the zero on the differential
pressure sensor(s) instead of closing the damper(s).
2.2 Loads System Mode Determination instead of System Mode Pass Through.

Table 4-26: VAV – Dual Duct


Version Description
3.0 • Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected.
• Loads Hot Deck Damper Trouble Detection and Cold Deck Damper Trouble
Detection when Smoke Control Support is selected.
• Loads Exhaust Damper Trouble Detection when Smoke Control Support and an
exhaust damper are selected.
• Provides support for use of calibration solenoid(s) to set the zero on the differential
pressure sensors instead of closing the dampers.
2.2 Loads System Mode Determination instead of System Mode Pass Through.

Table 4-27: VAV – Slave Single Duct


Version Description
3.0 This application is new at Release 3.0. The VAV Slave Single Duct Application provides
Network Input points to read corresponding values using peer-to-peer communication
from the associated Master Single Duct VAV box to provide control of the damper(s) and
heating devices.

Upgrading System Files 137


Table 4-28: VAV – Slave Dual Duct
Version Description
3.0 This application is new at Release 3.0. The VAV Slave Dual Duct Application provides
Network Input points to read corresponding values using peer-to-peer communication
from the associated Master Dual Duct VAV box to provide control of the dampers and
heating devices.

Table 4-29: Fan Coil


Version Description
2.2 Loads System Mode Determination instead of System Mode Pass Through.

Table 4-30: Unit Vent


Version Description
3.0 Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected.
2.2 • Loads System Mode Determination instead of System Mode Pass Through.
• Updates State Selection table so that staged outputs are held off when Fan Alarm is
active.

Table 4-31: Heat Pump


Version Description
3.1 Updates State Selection table so that the Unocc Status Determination module’s Unocc
Clg and Unocc Htg request Control instead of Max. This allows the heating or cooling
device to operate in the Control mode.
3.0 Loads Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL instead of Emergency Mode
Sequencing. This module is only loaded when Smoke Control Support is selected.
2.2 • Loads System Mode Determination instead of System Mode Pass Through.
• Updates State Selection table so that staged outputs are held off when Fan Alarm is
active.

Table 4-32: Central Cooling


Version Description
3.1 • Loads CW Pump X Control v2 (Pump Control v2) instead of CW Pump X Control
(Pump Control).
• Loads Primary CHW Pump X Control v2 instead of Primary CHW Pump X Control.
• Loads Secondary CHW Pump X Modulating Control v2 instead of Secondary CHW
Pump X Modulating Control.
• Loads Tower Fan X Control v2 instead of Tower Fan X Control.
This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides the option of up to eight devices.
• Provides options for alarm management of all devices. Includes alarms for device
status, frequency drive fault, motor overload tripped, belt alarm, and a lockout switch.
• Provides option of blocking protection for all pumps and cooling tower fans.

138 CCT Help: System Upgrade


Table 4-33: Central Heating
Version Description
3.1 • Loads Primary Pump X Control v2 (Pump Control v2) instead of Primary Pump X
Control (Pump Control).
• Loads Secondary HW Pump X Modulating Control v2 instead of Secondary HW
Pump X Modulating Control.
This selection tree includes new selection options:
• Provides options for alarm management of all devices. Includes alarms for device
status, frequency drive fault, motor overload tripped, belt alarm, and a lockout switch.
• Provides option for high temperature water heat exchanger.
• Provides option of three-stage frost protection.
• Provides option for up to eight zone water loops. Loops support a modulated valve,
an optional pump, and temperature reset for each loop.
• Provides option of blocking protection for all pumps.

Backup Files
When you upgrade your system, CCT creates a backup version of the original file
and stores the file in the same directory as the original file. The backup file has the
same name as the original file; however, the backup file has a .bak extension. To
use the backup file, you need to remove the extension from the file name.

Upgrading System Files 139


Steps
Upgrading Modules
To upgrade a system:
1. From the File menu, select Open.
2. Select the .caf file that requires the upgrade and click OK. One of two dialog
boxes appears, depending on whether the file you selected requires module
upgrades:
• If the file requires module upgrades, a dialog box appears displaying a list
of standard and user-defined modules. Standard modules are included as
part of the upgrade process. For more information about these standard
modules, see Upgraded Modules. User-defined modules are not included
as part of the upgrade process.
• If the file does not require module upgrades, a smaller dialog box appears
prompting you to upgrade the system.
3. Click OK. CCT upgrades the system to the latest version.
Note: If you do not want to upgrade the system or you want to upgrade the
system at a later time, click No.
Note: At any time, you can perform this process by selecting System Upgrade
from the Tools menu.

Modifying the System Selection


To update the system types found in Table 4-18, you need to modify your System
Selection. To modify your System Selection, see Viewing and Modifying System
Selections.

140 CCT Help: System Upgrade


Screens
System Upgrade (with Modules) Screen
See Upgrading Modules.
Table 4-34: System Upgrade (with Modules) Screen
Field Description
Version Information Displays CCT version information.
Standard Modules Displays the modules that require upgrade.
User Modified Modules Displays the modules that have been modified by a user.
User-modified modules are not included in the upgrade.
Yes Closes the System Upgrade screen and upgrades the
.caf file and modules.
No Closes the System Upgrade screen and does not
upgrade the .caf file and modules.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

System Upgrade (without Modules) Screen


See Upgrading Modules.
Table 4-35: System Upgrade (without Modules) Screen
Field Description
Yes Closes the System Upgrade screen and upgrades the
.caf file.
No Closes the System Upgrade screen and does not
upgrade the .caf file.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Upgrading System Files 141


142 CCT Help: System Upgrade
Chapter 5: CCT Help: Preferences
Setting and Using Preferences
Introduction
By default, CCT is set up to apply the Johnson Controls standard object names,
signals, and System Selection type selections. The preferences option allows you
to modify the Johnson Controls default preferences and create your own
preference files for use in a specific region of the country or customer job site.
Example usage of preferences are:
• For Object Naming, the default Johnson Controls suffix for all temperature
points is -T. You can edit the suffix so that all temperature points are -TMP.
• For Signals, the default Johnson Controls selection for all non-Zone
Temperature Sensors is Nickel. You can edit the signal so that the Zone
Temperature is Platinum.
• For System Selection preferences, you can set preheat coils on Air Handling
Units to defaults for colder climates. You also can match economizer strategies
to defaults for the local climate.
• For System Selection preferences, if your site typically has electric heat on its
VAV boxes instead of the default hot water, you can change the preference so
that each new system you create has electric heat selected by default.
Preferences are unique to the computer in which CCT is installed. The preferences
are configured in CCT and used as defaults for any files created by CCT on that
computer. Changing the preferences does not affect existing systems, only those
created after changing the preferences.
You can import and export preference files for the object naming and signal
preferences and for each System Selection tree to use on other computers or to use
specific preferences for different sites.

Concepts
Object Naming and Signal Preferences
Object naming and signal preferences determine the naming conventions to use
when adding input and output objects to your system (via the System Selection
process or when you manually add inputs and outputs after System Selection). The
names and signals you define in the object naming preferences are used when
adding inputs and outputs during the System Selection process, as well as when
adding them manually in the Control View.
An object name consists of a defined Object Name Prefix and a defined Object
Name Suffix. The object name is created by combining them. For example, the
Object Name Prefix BLDG added to the Object Name Suffix of SP results in an
object name of BLDG-SP. Similar functionality is available to define an expanded
identifier for each object.

Setting and Using Preferences 143


A signal specifies the physical communications connection for a given input or
output. This connection allows the controller to receive input values and send
output values.
Use Table 5-36 to determine the signal to use for point types on your system.
Table 5-36: FEC Point Types and Signals (Part 1 of 2)
Point Type Signals Supported
Universal Input (UI) Resistive
Nickel 1k RTD
Platinum 1k RTD
Silicon A99B
2.25k NTC Type 2 Thermistor
10K NTC Type L Thermistor
VAV Velocity Pressure
0-10 VDC
4-20 mA1
Dry Contact Maintained
Binary Input (BI) Dry Contact Maintained
Dry Contact Pulsed
Analog Output (AO) 0-10 VDC
4-20 mA
Binary Output (BO) 24 VAC Incremental2
24 VAC Maintained
24 VAC Pulse
24 VAC Start Stop3
Configurable Output (CO) 0-10 VDC
24 VAC Incremental2
24 VAC Maintained
24 VAC Pulse
24 VAC Start Stop3
Universal Output (UO) 0-10 VDC
4-20 mA
24 VAC Incremental2
24 VAC Maintained
24 VAC Pulse
24 VAC Start Stop3
Relay Output (RO)4 24 VAC Incremental2
24 VAC Maintained
24 VAC Pulse
24 VAC Start Stop3
24 VAC-240 VAC Incremental2
24 VAC-240 VAC Maintained
24 VAC-240 VAC Pulse
24 VAC-240 VAC Start Stop3
Integrated Velocity Integrated Velocity Pressure on VMA-type controllers
Pressure Sensor
Integrated Actuator Integrated actuator on VMA-type controllers

144 CCT Help: Preferences


Table 5-36: FEC Point Types and Signals (Part 2 of 2)
Point Type Signals Supported
Sensor/Actuator Bus The SAB signal type is used to provide the point. Examples of
(SAB) Interfaces this include Network Sensor (Network Duct Sensor or Network
Zone Sensor) and Network VSD.
Wireless Ethernet A wireless Ethernet signal is used to indicate that a wireless
Interfaces Many to One sensor provides the data for this input. An
appropriate value object (AV, BV, MV) is created to which the
NAE passes the sensor data.

1. The UI on VMA1610 and VMA1620 controllers does not support the 4-20 mA signal.
2. Incremental outputs use two binary hardware slots for opening and closing an actuator.
3. Start stop outputs use two binary hardware slots for starting and stopping a device.
4. You can use Relay Outputs to drive incremental/floating 3-wire actuators; however, we
recommend using triac outputs instead of Relay Outputs for the following control loop types:
VAV Flow Control, Airflow, Airflow%, Airflow Diff, Bldg Static, and Duct Static.

System Selection Preferences


The System Selection preferences set the default values of the selection trees of the
System Selection Wizard as specified by the user. For example, if your site
requires a discharge air sensor on all VAV boxes, select Discharge Air
Temperature on the VAV Single Duct Tree.
Setting preferences before going through the System Selection process for similar
systems allows you to save time during selection and helps keep your systems
consistent. Set preferences on the selection trees to match your local climate
conditions. These preferences only specify the starting values for the System
Selection options. System Selection preferences do not prevent you from making
particular selections on any given system.

Unit Preferences
You can set the units of measurement to use when working in CCT from the New
System dialog box (File > New) during the System Selection process. After setting
the units and closing CCT, CCT remembers the last unit’s setting. The selected
units are used until you change them in the New System dialog box. See Selecting
a System (Creating a New System) in the Configuring a System section.

Setting and Using Preferences 145


Import and Export Preferences
You can export and import object naming, signal, and System Selection
preferences using the Export and Import buttons. This functionality allows you to
save preferences files (export) to access them from the same computer for later use
(import), or you can copy the files to use on other computers.
When you export the object naming and signal preferences, the default file name
and location to save the preferences are:
• ObjectNaming.properties
• C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Johnson
Controls\MetasysIII\CCT\Configuration\Backup\Object Naming
When you export System Selection preferences, the default file names and
location to save the preferences are:
• [applicationname].properties:
- Mixed Air Single Duct.properties
- 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct.properties
- Mixed Air Dual Duct.properties
- 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct.properties
- Rooftop Unit.properties
- Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct).properties
- Fan Coil.properties
- Unit Ventilators.properties
- Heat Pumps.properties
- Single Duct.properties (for VAV)
- Dual Duct.properties (for VAV)
- Slave Single Duct.properties (for VAV)
- Slave Dual Duct.properties (for VAV)
- Central Heating.properties
- Central Cooling.properties
- Sideloop.properties
• C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Johnson Controls\MetasysIII\CCT\Configuration\Backup\SelectionTree
You can adjust the file names to indicate specific sites or uses. You also can save
the files to different locations.

146 CCT Help: Preferences


Localization Preferences
You can set localization preferences for the languages installed during the CCT
software installation. See Language Options in the User Interface section.
When you have support for more than one language, the tabs of the Preferences -
Localization screen contain content. See the Setting Localization Preferences and
Preferences-Localization Screen sections for details.

Setting and Using Preferences 147


Steps
Setting Default Object Naming and Signal Preferences
To set default object naming and signal preferences:
1. From the Tools menu, select Preferences > Naming and Signal. The
Preferences - Object Naming and Signal screen appears. See the Preferences-
Object Naming and Signal Screen section.
2. Click a non-shaded cell to change and type the desired text.
Note: You also can use Ctrl+C to copy text from a cell and use Ctrl+V to
paste the copied text to another cell. See Copying and Pasting Naming
and Signal Preferences.
Note: You cannot edit data in columns that are shaded gray. Use the filter and
sorting features to locate and view data of specific items. See the
Filtering Object Naming and Signal Preferences and Sorting Object
Naming and Signal Preferences sections.
3. Repeat Step 2 for other name changes.
Note: To return to the original Johnson Controls standard preferences, use the
resetting options. See the Resetting Object Naming and Signal
Preferences section.
4. Click OK.
Note: Edits to object naming and signal preferences appear in bold text.

Filtering Object Naming and Signal Preferences


To filter object naming and signal preferences, select an item to filter from the
drop-down menu of the desired column. Only items of that type appear on the
screen. To narrow the items further, you can filter on other columns. You also can
use custom filters. See Performing Custom Filters.
Note: Filtering is based on function or application name. For example,
Temperature is a function. If you want to change the suffix from -T to -
TMP you can change one entry for Temperature and copy (Ctrl+C) and
paste (Ctrl+V) the change to the other rows.
Note: To mass edit names, first filter on the gray-shaded columns for Application
or Function.

148 CCT Help: Preferences


Performing Custom Filters
To perform custom filters:
1. In the drop-down menu of the desired column, select Custom. The Custom
AutoFilter Dialog Box appears.
2. In the Filtering Operator drop-down menu, select the filtering operation to use.
Use Table 5-37 as a reference.
Table 5-37: Filtering Operators for Custom Filters
Operator Description
Equals Displays the items that exactly match the words you select or enter.
Does Not Equal Displays the items that do not exactly match the words you select
or enter.
Contains Displays the items that contain the word you select or enter.
Does Not Contain Displays the items that do not contain the word you select or enter.
Ends With Displays the items that end with the word you select or enter.
Does Not End With Displays the items that do not end with the word you select or
enter.
Begins With Displays the items that begin with the word you select or enter.
Does Not Begin With Displays the items that do not begin with the word you select or
enter.

3. In the drop-down menu to the right of the selected filtering operator, enter the
information to filter or select an item from the list.
4. Click OK. CCT displays the filtered information.
Note: To remove the filter, select All from the drop-down menu for the
desired column.
Note: To narrow the items further, you can filter on other columns.

Sorting Object Naming and Signal Preferences


To sort object naming and signal preferences, click the header of the desired
column. Clicking the header repeatedly results in the items switching between
ascending and descending alphabetical order.
Note: If necessary, you can manually move columns around. To move a column,
select the column and move it to the desired location.

Setting and Using Preferences 149


Copying and Pasting Naming and Signal Preferences
To copy and paste naming and signal preferences:
1. In the desired column, select the cell you want to copy.
2. Press Ctrl+C to copy the preference.
3. Select the cell to which you want to paste. To paste to multiple cells, click and
drag multiple cells in the column.
4. Press Ctrl+V to paste the preference.
Note: To mass edit names, first filter on the gray-shaded columns for Application
or Function.

Resetting Object Naming and Signal Preferences


To reset object naming and signal preferences in a single row to the Johnson
Controls standard default value, select a cell in the row to reset and click Reset.
To reset object naming and signal preferences in all rows to the Johnson Controls
standard default values, click Reset All.
Note: The Reset and Reset All functions reset the preferences to the Johnson
Controls standard default values regardless of user session.

Exporting Object Naming and Signal Preferences


To export object naming and signal preferences:
1. Click Export. The Save dialog box appears.
2. Keep the default File name of ObjectNaming.properties or adjust the name to
indicate a specific site or use.
Note: It is not necessary to export/save a separate copy of the Johnson
Controls standard preferences because the Reset and Reset All
functions reset the preferences to the Johnson Controls standard default
values regardless of user session.
3. Keep the default location (C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Johnson Controls\MetasysIII\CCT\Configuration\Backup\Object
Naming) to save the file or adjust it as desired.
4. Click Save. The file saves and you can access it from the same computer for
later use or you can copy the file to use on another computer.

150 CCT Help: Preferences


Importing Object Naming and Signal Preferences
To import object naming and signal preferences:
1. Click Import. The Open dialog box appears.
2. Select the desired file to import.
Note: You may need to browse to the location where you saved the file if you
saved it to a different location from the default or received the file from
others.
3. Click Open. The preferences file opens and populates the Object Naming and
Signal Preferences screen.

Setting Default System Selection Preferences


For information on the System Selection tree types, see the Applications section.
For information on the System Selection Wizard, see System Selection Wizard in
the Configuring a System section.
To set default System Selection preferences:
1. From the Tools menu, select Preferences > System Selection. The Preferences
- System Selection screen appears. The left pane contains the different System
Selection trees available. See the Preferences-System Selection Screen section.
2. Navigate to and select the System Selection tree to modify. The tree appears in
the right pane of the screen.
3. Select and remove selections to fit your specific needs. The options you choose
here determine how the tree appears in the System Selection Wizard when you
add a new system or make changes to an existing system’s selections. Make
selections by:
• checking a check box to turn a setting on and removing a check in a check
box to turn a setting off
• selecting a radio button to select that item from among several possible
options
Note: To return to the original Johnson Controls standard preferences, use the
resetting option. See the Resetting System Selection Preferences
section.
4. Click OK.

Resetting System Selection Preferences


To reset System Selection preferences, click Reset. The current System Selection
tree resets to the Johnson Controls standard default tree values.
Note: The Reset function resets the preferences to the Johnson Controls standard
default values regardless of user session.

Setting and Using Preferences 151


Exporting System Selection Preferences
To export System Selection preferences:
1. In the Preferences - System Selection screen, select the System Selection tree
that you want to export.
2. Click Export. The Save dialog box appears.
3. Keep the default File name of [application].properties or adjust the name to
indicate a specific site or use.
Note: The default File name for each selection tree is listed in the Import and
Export Preferences section ([applicationname].properties).
Note: It is not necessary to export/save a separate copy of the Johnson
Controls standard preferences because the Reset function resets the
preferences of the displayed selection tree to the Johnson Controls
standard default values regardless of user session.
4. Keep the default location (C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Johnson Controls\MetasysIII\CCT\Configuration\Backup\SelectionTree)
to save the file or adjust it as desired.
5. Click Save. The file saves and you can access it from the same computer for
later use or you can copy the file to use on another computer.

Importing System Selection Preferences


To import System Selection preferences:
1. In the Preferences - System Selection screen, select the System Selection tree
that matches the type you want to import.
2. Click Import. The Open dialog box appears.
3. Select the desired file to import.
Note: You may need to browse to the location where you saved the file if you
saved it to a different location from the default, or received the file
from others.
4. Click Open. The preferences file opens and poplulates the System Selection
preferences tree.

152 CCT Help: Preferences


Setting Localization Preferences
To set localization preferences:
1. From the Tools menu, select Preferences > Localization. The Preferences -
Localization screen appears. See the Preferences-Localization Screen section.
2. On the Localization tab, click the desired locale such as German (Germany).

IMPORTANT: If you are selecting a locale/language for the first time, exit
CCT. Then, open CCT again to automatically populate the language data that
was provided during the installation process.

3. On the Naming tab, type the desired text translation in the Translated Value
column.
4. On the Systems tab, type the desired text translation in the Translated Value
column.
5. On the Views tab, type the desired text translation in the Translated Value
column.
6. On the Selection Trees tab, select a selection tree in the navigation pane and
type the desired text translation in the Translated Value column in the right
pane.
7. Click Save.
8. Click Close.

Setting and Using Preferences 153


Screens
Preferences-Object Naming and Signal Screen
See Setting Default Object Naming and Signal Preferences.
Table 5-38: Preferences - Object Naming and Signal Screen
Field Description
Column Headers (Sorting) You can sort the contents in ascending/descending
order. See the Sorting Object Naming and Signal
Preferences section.
Drop-down Menus (Filtering) Each column has a drop-down menu to filter contents on
the screen. See the Filtering Object Naming and Signal
Preferences and Sorting Object Naming and Signal
Preferences sections.
Application Name Column Displays the name of the application in which the object
belongs. You cannot edit items in this column.
Function Name Column Displays the function of the object (for example, used for
an Analog Input or for a command). You cannot edit
items in this column.
Derived Name Column Displays the format of the object’s name. You cannot
edit items in this column.
An object name consists of a defined Object Name
Prefix and a defined Object Name Suffix. The object
name is created by combining them. For example, the
Object Name Prefix BLDG added to the Object Name
Suffix of SP results in an object name of BLDG-SP.
Name Prefix Column Displays the full prefix of the object name. You can edit
items in this column.
Name Suffix Column Displays the full suffix of the object name. You can edit
items in this column.
Description Prefix Column Displays the full prefix of the object’s Expanded ID. You
can edit items in this column.
Description Suffix Column Displays the full suffix of the object’s Expanded ID. You
can edit items in this column.
Signal Displays the default signal used for the application. See
the Object Naming and Signal Preferences section.
Reset Resets the selected row to the Johnson Controls
standard default value. See the Resetting Object
Naming and Signal Preferences section.
Reset All Resets all rows to the Johnson Controls standard default
values. See the Resetting Object Naming and Signal
Preferences section.
Import Opens a saved object naming preference file and
populates the object naming and signal preferences
screen with its data. See the Import and Export
Preferences section.
Export Saves object naming and signal preferences to a file so
you can access it from the same computer for later use
or you can copy the file to use on another computer. See
the Import and Export Preferences section.
OK Applies the changes and closes the Preferences -
Object Naming and Signal screen.
Cancel Closes the Preferences - Object Naming and Signal
screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

154 CCT Help: Preferences


Preferences-System Selection Screen
See Setting Default System Selection Preferences.
Table 5-39: Preferences - System Selection Screen
Field Description
System Selection Tree Displays the System Selection trees available. For
Navigation Panel information on the system types, see the Applications
section. For information on the System Selection
Wizard, see System Selection Wizard in the Configuring
a System section.
Display Panel Displays the selected tree and allows you to make
changes to the default selections. See the Setting
Default System Selection Preferences section.
Reset Resets the selected tree to the Johnson Controls
standard default tree values. See the Resetting System
Selection Preferences section.
Import Opens a saved System Selection tree preference file
and poplulates the screen with its data. See the Import
and Export Preferences section.
Export Saves System Selection tree preferences to a file so you
can access it from the same computer for later use or
you can copy the file to use on another computer. See
the Import and Export Preferences section.
OK Applies the changes and closes the Preferences-
System Selection screen.
Cancel Closes the Preferences - System Selection screen
without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Custom AutoFilter Dialog Box


See Performing Custom Filters.
Table 5-40: Custom AutoFilter Dialog Box
Field Description
Filtering Operator Displays a list of filtering operations to use when you
perform custom filters. For example, if you select the
filtering operator Equals, CCT displays the items that
exactly match the words you select or enter in the Filtering
Criteria field.
Filtering Criteria Displays a list of criteria that you can select when you
perform custom filters. The criteria in this field is
determined by the column you select.
OK Applies the changes and closes the Custom AutoFilter
dialog box.
Cancel Closes the Custom AutoFilter dialog box without applying
the changes.

Setting and Using Preferences 155


Preferences-Localization Screen
See Setting Localization Preferences.
Table 5-41: Preferences - Localization Screen
Field Description
Localization Tab Displays a list of the locales installed during the CCT
installation process.
Naming Tab Allows you to enter text in the desired language for the
English text in CCT. For example, for Exhaust Filter, you
can enter text in another language that should appear in
place of the English text. The table in this tab has the
following columns:
• Context Id: Indicates where the item appears in the
CCT software (for example, Application).
• English Value: Displays the English text to be
translated.
• Translated Value: Indicates the text translation.
Systems Tab Allows you to enter text in the desired language for the
English text in CCT. For example, for Rooftop Unit, you can
enter text in another language that should appear in place
of the English text. The table in this tab has the following
columns:
• Context Id: Indicates where the item appears in the
CCT software (for example, Air Handling Unit
Configuration).
• English Value: Displays the English text to be
translated.
• Translated Value: Indicates the text translation.
Views Allows you to enter text in the desired language for the
English text in CCT. For example, for Device Type, you can
enter text in another language that should appear in place
of the English text. The table in this tab has the following
columns:
• Context Id: Indicates where the item appears in the
CCT software (for example, HW device view).
• English Value: Displays the English text to be
translated.
• Translated Value: Indicates the text translation.
Selection Trees Allows you to enter text in the desired language for the
English text in the CCT System Selection trees. For
example, for Device Type, you can enter text in another
language that should appear in place of the English text.
This tab has a navigation tree in the left pane of all the
system selection trees (for example, Fan Coil) to select the
context. The right pane has a table with the following
columns:
• English Value: Displays the English text to be
translated.
• Translated Value: Indicates the text translation.
Reset All Resets all values to the defaults.
Save Applies the changes and closes the screen.
Close Closes the screen. If you did not save your changes, a
dialog appears asking if you want to save them before
closing the screen.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

156 CCT Help: Preferences


Chapter 6: CCT Help: Configuration
Configuring a System
Introduction
Configuring a system involves opening or selecting a system, modifying a system,
and defining hardware for a system. You can open an existing Controller
Application File (.caf) in CCT using the Open option from the File menu, select a
new system using the System Selection Wizard, or upload a Controller Application
File from an existing device.
Before selecting a new system using the System Selection Wizard, you can
optionally set naming preferences and System Selection Wizard defaults to
customize to your specific needs. See the Setting and Using Preferences section
for more information.
Using a Johnson Controls standard file or the System Selection Wizard allows you
to create systems in CCT according to common system configurations. We
recommend using Johnson Controls standards whenever possible. If your system
requires customization outside what is provided by the Johnson Controls
standards, you can create custom control logic in CCT by adding, removing, and
modifying items in the Control View of CCT.
This section covers how to add and configure a system in Configuration mode. For
information on uploading a Controller Application File, see the Loading Devices
section. See the Simulating a System and Defining Hardware sections after
configuring your system.
For information on the Control View, Logic View, and Details View interfaces,
see the User Interface section. For information on the types of systems you can
create and details on the selections available, see the User Interface and
Applications sections.
Before performing tasks in CCT, see the Getting Started section for guidance.

Configuring a System 157


Concepts
System Selection Wizard
The System Selection Wizard is used to identify the mechanical equipment, its
related control components, and the control strategy. The Mechanical System
Selection screen allows you to choose the mechanical components for your
system, such as actuator type or fan type. The Control Logic Selection screen lets
you select the control logic strategies to control the mechanical system.
When creating a new system, the File > New option opens the New System dialog
box that allows you to name the system and choose the desired system type and
configuration. After completing this dialog box, the System Selection Wizard
opens prompting you to make the selections corresponding to your system. See the
Selecting a System (Creating a New System) section.
You also can use the Select System button to open the System Selection Wizard to
review and make changes to previously made selections. Any customization
changes made are lost because these selections are laid down over the previous
selections. See the Viewing and Modifying System Selections section.
See the System Types and Configurations and System Selection Tree sections.
Similarly, the Sideloop button opens a System Selection Wizard specific to
defining a sideloop. See the Creating a Sideloop and Sideloop Applications
sections for more information.

158 CCT Help: Configuration


System Types and Configurations
When selecting a system, you first choose the overall type of system and a specific
configuration to create. For example, you may select VAV as the system type and
Single Duct as the specific configuration to use. See the Selecting a System
(Creating a New System) steps and the Applications section for details on the
System Selection options:
Air Handling Unit
• Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
• Rooftop Unit Application
• Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application
Fan Coil (Fan Coil Applications)
Unit Ventilators (Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications)
Heat Pumps (Heat Pump Applications)
VAV
• VAV Single Duct (VAV Single Duct Application)
• VAV Dual Duct (VAV Dual Duct Application)
• VAV Slave Single Duct (VAV Slave Single Duct Application)
• VAV Slave Dual Duct (VAV Slave Dual Duct Application)
Central Heating (Central Heating Applications)
Central Cooling (Central Cooling Applications)
Custom Applications
• Electrical
• Misc Fan
• Elevator
• Security
• Fire
• SMOKE
• Miscellaneous

Configuring a System 159


Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only
• Electrical
• Misc Fan
• Elevator
• Security
• Fire
• SMOKE
• Miscellaneous
For information on creating Custom Applications and Monitoring/Supervisory
Control Only applications, see Creating Custom Applications and Creating
Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only Applications.

System Selection Tree


The System Selection Wizard has a Mechanical System Selection screen and
Control Logic Selection screen containing selection tree/folder structures for
selecting options for a system.
The selection trees contain folders that you can expand and collapse, check boxes,
and radio buttons. The check boxes let you include or exclude an option. The radio
buttons let you select one option from a list. Click the + and - next to a node in the
tree to show and hide selections.
When you select a parent node in the selection tree, its child nodes become
available for selection. You cannot select a child node without first selecting its
parent node.
Nodes are tied together logically so that if you select a node option, another node
option activates or deactivates accordingly. This functionality helps prevent you
from making selections that are not used together. For example, in the VAV Single
Duct Selection Tree’s Mechanical System Selection screen, when you choose Box
Heating as Electric Staged, the Hot Water option becomes disabled.
Another example is if you choose Discharge Air Control for Temperature Control
Strategy on an Air Handling Unit system, the Discharge Air Temperature sensor
on the Control Logic Selection portion of the wizard is disabled. The Discharge
Air Temperature sensor is disabled because a Discharge Air Temperature sensor is
required for the control strategy, and is automatically selected.
Nodes in the selection tree that do not have check boxes and radio buttons are
options that are automatically selected by the wizard. These nodes are required for
a system such as a Fan for a Fan Coil application or a Zone Temperature Sensor for
any Terminal Unit Control application.
The tree selections provided for each system type define commonly expected
system configurations and control strategies. The default selections are simply a
place to start. You can customize these configurations in the Control View, if
necessary.

160 CCT Help: Configuration


Control View Configuration
In Configuration mode, the Control View allows you to add, remove, and modify
its contents. For example, you can add an input and define state generators. You
also can modify parameters/attributes in the Parameters table and modify
connections in the Connections table.
See the Steps section for details on how to perform the configuration tasks in the
Control View. See the User Interface section for a description of the Control View
user interface and its contents.

Logic View Configuration


In Configuration mode, the Logic View allows you to modify your system’s
control logic. For example, you can connect inputs and outputs, add and remove
logic blocks, and expose ports. See the Steps section for details on how to perform
the configuration tasks in the Logic View. See the User Interface section for a
description of the Logic View user interface and its contents.
Once a system is selected and configured using the System Selection Wizard, the
modules and logic provided will control your system as expected. Only modify
logic if you require a unique control that the System Selection Wizard did not
address.

Details Configuration
The Details dialog box allows you to view and modify the attribute/parameter,
input, output, and hardware details of modules/blocks selected from the Control
View or Logic View. See the Steps section for details on how to perform the
configuration tasks in the Details dialog box. See the User Interface section for a
description of the Details dialog box interface and its contents.

Simulation
After configuring your system, verify your system is configured properly in
Simulation mode. Simulation mode allows you to see your system as though it
were in Commissioning mode. This allows you to test your configuration and
make adjustments before setting up communications to devices and going farther
in the workflow. See the Simulating a System section for information on how to
simulate your system.

Hardware Definition
After configuring your system, define the hardware for your system using the
Hardware Definition wizard. This wizard allows you to define devices such as
FECs and IOMs, map points to hardware slots, and define network settings. See
the Defining Hardware section for details.

Configuring a System 161


Peer-to-Peer Communication
The peer-to-peer configuration provides communication directly between two
devices on a trunk (for example, communication between two FECs). This setup
allows a device to read values from another device or write values to it using
Network Inputs or Network Outputs. To read a value from another device, set up
peer-to-peer communication using a Network Input. The recommended method for
peer-to-peer communication is reading values from other devices (as opposed to
writing values to devices). To write a value to another device, set up peer-to-peer
communication using a Network Output (for example, to send a value to a
third-party device). Configure the Peer Reference attribute in the Network Input or
Output to enable or disable the communication.
Peer-to-Peer Communication Devices:
• Johnson Controls Devices: Peer-to-peer communication occurs between two
Johnson Controls devices (for example, two FECs). The updates are done
based on Change-of-Value (COV).
• Third-Party MS/TP Device: Peer-to-peer communication occurs between a
Johnson Controls device and a third-party MS/TP device (for example, an FEC
and TEC). In this case, the reference is a poll with a poll rate of 30 seconds,
which cannot be changed.
Guidelines for Peer-to-Peer Communication:
• You should not exceed 15 output references per device.
• We recommend a limit of 50 input references to a single device. That is, do not
define a single device as the source of peer-to-peer data to more than 50 other
devices.
Note: Peer-to-peer communication requires processor time on both devices
and bandwidth on the MS/TP communication bus.
• The preferred method of peer-to-peer communication for FECs is to use
Network Inputs to reference a source. Using a Network Input with a referenced
source allows the reliability of the reference to be used in logic (for example,
for referencing the OA-T analog input). If you use Network Outputs to send a
value to a peer controller, make sure that the destination is only sent a value
from a single source (that is, avoid using fan-in references from multiple
Network Outputs).

162 CCT Help: Configuration


Examples of Peer-to-Peer Communication:
• Many applications provide a Network Input for Outdoor Air Temperature
when a physical sensor is not installed. You can use peer-to-peer
communication to reference the OA-T analog input on a different controller on
the same MS/TP Field Bus.
• You can configure the Unit Enable input of cooling only VAV boxes to
reference the Supply Fan Status BI (SF-S) of the Air Handling Unit that serves
them.
• You may no longer need to configure Global Data Sharing in the NAE. For
example, in previous releases you had to define an Outdoor Air Temperature
object in the NAE and use Global Data Sharing to write the Outdoor Air
Temperature to the necessary FECs. Using peer-to-peer communication,
reference the OA-T analog inputs on the FECs located on the same MS/TP
Field Bus.
For more information, see the following sections:
• Setting Up Peer-to-Peer Communication
• Disabling Peer-to-Peer Communication
• CCT Input and Output Object Overview (see the specific object listed)

Application Logic View


The View Application Logic option of the Quick Navigation drop-down menu
allows you to view the logic of the entire application in the Logic View. This
option is available only in Configuration mode.
You cannot edit logic in this tool. Use this feature to view and print application
logic. You can use standard Logic View options such as select, pan, zoom, Trace
mode, and print. The Control Block palette, the Set Default Element button, and
the Export Module button do not appear when viewing application logic.
The application logic diagram is organized in the same order as the Control View
columns. The modules flow from the left side of the screen to the right side in the
following order: Network Inputs and Inputs, Setpoint/Miscellaneous modules,
State Generation modules, Output Control modules, and lastly Network Outputs
and Outputs.
See the Viewing/Printing Application Logic section.

Configuring a System 163


Steps
Selecting a System (Creating a New System)
For information on the types of systems you can create and details on the
selections available, see the User Interface and Applications sections.
To select a system (create a new system):
1. From the File menu, select New. The New System dialog box appears.
2. Type a name for the system in the System Name text box. Illegal characters
include:
:*?"<>|/[]#@
3. Select a type from the System Type drop-down menu.
Note: For information on the Custom Applications and Monitoring/
Supervisory Control Only options, see the Creating Custom
Applications and Creating Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only
Applications sections.
4. Select a type from the System Configuration drop-down menu, if options
appear.
5. Select Imperial or Metric from the System of Units drop-down menu.
Note: After setting the units and closing CCT, CCT remembers the last units’
setting. See Unit Preferences in the Setting and Using Preferences
section.
Note: In the Download Language drop-down menu, English (United States)
is currently the only option available.
6. Click OK. The CCT System Selection Wizard appears with the Mechanical
System Selection screen active. See the System Selection Tree section for
information on tree behavior and use (for example, using the check boxes,
radio buttons, and the + and - next to a node in the tree to show and hide
selections).
7. Select the mechanical options for your system and click Next. The CCT
System Selection Wizard appears with the Control Logic Selection screen
active.
8. Select the control logic options for your system and click Finish. The CCT
software applies the selections to your system and closes the wizard. The
system you selected appears in the Control View of CCT in Configuration
mode.

164 CCT Help: Configuration


Opening an Existing Controller Application File
For information on the types of systems and applications, see the User Interface
and Applications sections.
To open an existing system from a saved Controller Application File (.caf):
1. From the File menu, select Open. The Open dialog box appears.
2. Browse to the location of the saved Controller Application File and select the
file to open.
Note: The default location of a Controller Application File (.caf) is
C:\Documents and Settings\username.
3. Click Open. The Controller Application File appears in the Control View of
CCT in Configuration mode.
Note: If the selected Controller Application File requires an upgrade, the
System Upgrade dialog box appears. For details on upgrading the file,
see the Upgrading System Files section.

Entering or Viewing Job Information


To enter or view job information associated with the open Controller Application
File (.caf):
1. From the Tools menu, select Job Information. The Job Information dialog box
appears.
2. Enter or view the data in the Operator Name, Job Name, Contract Number, and
History text boxes as described in the Job Information screen section.
3. Click OK.

Renaming a System
To rename a system:
1. With a system open, select System Rename from the Tools menu. The System
Rename Dialog box appears.
2. In the System Name text box, type the desired name. Illegal characters include:
:*?"<>|/[]#@
3. Click OK.
Note: This option does not change the name of the Controller Application File
(.caf).

Configuring a System 165


Viewing and Modifying System Selections
IMPORTANT: If you have already selected a system or opened a Controller
Application File (.caf) in CCT, you can view and change the selections made.
Any customization changes made are lost if you make changes to the System
Selections. For information on the types of systems and selections available, see
the User Interface and Applications sections.

Before modifying System Selections, print a copy of the current System Selections
using the System Selection Summary option in the Summary Report Options
dialog box. See Printing Summary Reports in the User Interface section.
To view and modify System Selections:
1. Select a system, open an existing Controller Application File, or upload a
Controller Application File from a device. See the Selecting a System
(Creating a New System), Opening an Existing Controller Application File, or
the Loading Devices sections for details.
2. Click the Select System button in the CCT user interface. The CCT System
Selection Wizard appears with the Mechanical System Selection screen active.
Note: Adding Inputs and Outputs used for monitoring only purposes should
not be done by modifying the System Selection if custom logic or
changes were made after the initial System Selection process. For
information on manually adding modules, see the Creating Custom
Logic (Adding Modules) section.
3. View the mechanical options for your system and make any changes.
Note: You can only make changes to System Selection in Configuration
mode. See the System Selection Tree section for information on tree
behavior and use (for example, using the check boxes, radio buttons,
and the + and - next to a node in the tree to show and hide selections).
4. Click Next. The CCT System Selection Wizard appears with the Control Logic
Selection screen active.
5. View the control logic options for your system and make any changes
(Configuration mode only).
6. If you did not make any changes (or do not wish to apply any of the changes
you made), click Cancel to close the wizard. Clicking Cancel prevents the
selections from being laid down over your previously selected system and
overwriting any customization changes made. Stop here.
Any customization changes made are lost when your selections are laid
down. If you made changes, click Finish. A Rebuild Application Warning
dialog box appears. Click Yes to continue. The CCT software rebuilds your
system and closes the wizard. The system you selected appears in the Control
View of CCT in Configuration mode.

166 CCT Help: Configuration


System Selection Logic Upgrade and Modification Rules
If you run System Selection after upgrading a Controller Application File, the
original logic created by System Selection in the previous version of CCT is
completely replaced with the logic that would result if you make the same
selections for a new system with the newer version of CCT. See the Upgrading
System Files section.
The following rules apply any time you modify the System Selections:
• Changes you make to the logic created from the original System Selection
process are lost.
• Inputs and Outputs are created based on Signal and Naming preferences
from the active instance of CCT (that is, only current preferences apply and
preferences used to create the original .caf file have no effect).
• If you added modules to the system manually or if you used the Sideloop
selection tree after running System Selection for the first time, CCT does
not delete those modules. However, the Output Controllers for the
sideloops are deleted from the State Table and must be manually added and
connected again. To add the Output Controllers back to the State Table, see
Adding a Column to the State Selection Tables. To connect the outputs of
the State Table to the Output Controllers, see Making a Connection.
• All values in the State Tables created by the System Selection process
return to their default values, thus matching a system created with the File
> New option.
• All custom logic modules added by a user within the original .caf file
remain untouched.
• Connections between custom logic and the original System Selection logic
are lost as well any values in the State Tables created by the System
Selection process.
• The hardware definitions from the original .caf file are preserved,
including:
- the base controller, IOMs, Network Devices, and parameters for each
device (for example, the Device Address and BACnet ID).
- the point assignments for manually added inputs and outputs.
You may need to reassign System Selection created points to the desired
slots.

Configuring a System 167


Viewing and Modifying Details
The Details dialog box has no tabs for the Network Inputs, Setpoint/Miscellaneous
modules, State Generation modules, Output Control modules, and Network
Outputs. For only Inputs and Outputs, the Details dialog box has two tabs: Details
tab and Hardware View tab. See the Details Dialog Box concept and Details
Dialog Box screen topics in the User Interface section for more information.
To view and modify Details from the Control View, right-click a module to view
and select View Details, or from the Logic View, right-click the block to view and
select View > Details. You also can double-click a module from the Control View
to open the Details dialog box. The Details dialog box appears with the module/
block’s data. See Details and Hardware View.
Note: If you change the enumeration set for an Input or Output associated with a
binary object, the enumeration set for the binary object is also updated if
the set exists in the Two State enumeration set list, otherwise the binary
object’s enumeration set defaults to the Inactive/Active set. When this
happens, the binary object’s States Text attribute is set to the Inactive/
Active enumeration set instead of the set you selected.
Note: When you change the units for analog values, the function of the value
does not change. For all modules, the value passes, but the units do not. For
example, if you change timers from seconds to minutes or hours, the
function of the number does not change.

Details
For information on the attribute/parameter, input, and output data of the selected
module, see the Modules section.
To view and modify the Details:
1. Click the Details tab (if applicable and if it is not already active). A table of
attributes/parameters appears in the left pane of the view, and tables of inputs
and outputs appear in the right pane of the view.
Note: The splitter bar between the panes has left and right arrows allowing
you to achieve the desired view. Click the arrows to show/hide the
panes. If you click the splitter bar and drag it to the desired location,
clicking the left/right arrows returns the view to the location you moved
the splitter bar. Clicking the left/right arrows a second time shows/
hides the entire pane.
2. Click Edit.
3. Make changes to the attribute/parameter, input, and output data using the text
boxes and drop-down menus and click Apply.
4. Click Close.
Note: If you modify a custom module to expose ports for BACnet systems, close
and reopen the Controller Application File (.caf) to view the input/output
ports in the Parameters table.

168 CCT Help: Configuration


Hardware View
The Hardware View tab only applies to Inputs and Outputs. For information on the
hardware attributes/parameters, input, and output data of a selected module/block,
see the Modules, Logic, and CCT Input and Output Object Overview sections.
To view and modify the Hardware View:
1. Click the Hardware View tab. A table of hardware attributes/parameters
appears.
2. Click the Advanced radio button, if it is not already selected, to see more
hardware attributes/parameters.
3. Click Edit.
4. Make changes to the hardware attributes/parameters using the text boxes and
drop-down menus and click Apply.
5. Click Close.

Viewing Controller Information


You can view controller information for one or more controllers on the field bus in
the Configuration mode. You must open a Controller Application File (.caf) before
viewing controller information.
To view controller information:
1. From the Tools menu, select Controller Information. The Controller
Information Wizard appears.
2. Follow the wizard steps.
Note: The Controller Information Wizard contains the same information as
the Commissioning Device Wizard, with the addition of the Copy To
Clipboard option.
For information on viewing information of a controller while it is being
commissioned (Commissioning mode only), see the Commissioning a System
section.

Configuring a System 169


Control View Steps
System selection makes all the necessary module and associated configurations
and connections required for your system. You do not need to change
configurations or connections if you are not modifying logic after selecting the
system.
For information on creating Custom Applications and Monitoring/Supervisory
Control Only applications, see Creating Custom Applications and Creating
Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only Applications.

Viewing and Modifying Connections


System selection makes all the necessary connections required for your system.
You do not need to review connections if you are not modifying logic after
selecting the system.
To view and modify connections:
1. Right-click the module to view and select View Connections. The module’s
connection data appears in the Connections tab. See Connections Table in the
User Interface section.
Note: You can select multiple modules (within a module category) to view
connections on the selected modules at once. Holding down the Ctrl
key while selecting the modules, then right-click and select View
Connections. A table appears in the Connections area for each module
selected.
To return to the default, showing all module connections, right-click
within the overall table header and select Show All.
2. See Exposing Ports for Connection, Making a Connection, Changing a
Connection, and Breaking a Connection.

Exposing Ports for Connection


By default, all ports are exposed for connection. You cannot remove the selection
for connected ports because the ports are disabled in the Port Exposure dialog box.
To expose (or hide) ports for connection in the Connections table:
1. Right-click an input or output header and select Expose Ports. The Port
Exposure dialog box appears. See the Port Exposure (For Connection) screens
section. All available modules for connection become visible.
Note: Some items in the lists may appear disabled because they are
automatically exposed for connection and cannot be changed, or if they
are already connected.
2. Select ports to expose (or remove the selection on ports to hide) from the Input
Port List and Output Port List sections of the dialog box, using the Select All
and/or Deselect All buttons as necessary, and click OK.

170 CCT Help: Configuration


Making a Connection
To make a connection in the Connections table:
1. Right-click an input or output that has no connections and select Make
Connection. All modules that have exposed ports with compatible data type or
enumerations sets turn green.
Note: A module output can have more than one connection (fan-out). A
module input cannot have more than one connection (fan-in is not
allowed).
2. Click the desired module highlighted in green. The Port Selection dialog box
appears.
3. Select the input/output port in which to connect from the Port List and click
OK.

Changing a Connection
To change a connection in the Connections table:
1. Right-click an input or output that has an existing connection and select
Change Connection. All modules that have exposed ports with compatible
units or enumerations sets turn green.
Note: A module output can have more than one connection (fan-out). A
module input cannot have more than one connection (fan-in is not
allowed).
2. Click the desired module highlighted in green. The Port Selection dialog box
appears.
3. Select the input/output port in which to connect from the Port List and click
OK.

Breaking a Connection
To break a connection in the Connections table, right-click an input or output that
has an existing connection and select Break Connection.

Viewing and Modifying Parameters


To view and modify parameters:
1. Click the Parameters tab if not already active. See the Control View screen
description in the User Interface section.
2. Click Edit.
3. Make changes to the parameters/attributes using the text boxes and drop-down
menus and click Apply.
Note: You cannot modify outputs of modules from the Parameters table.
Note: You cannot save or switch modes while editing in the Parameters tab. Click
Apply or Cancel before proceeding.

Configuring a System 171


Viewing and Modifying State Selection Tables
System Selection makes all the necessary state configurations required for your
system. You do not need to review state configurations if you are not modifying
logic after selecting the system.
To view and modify State Selection tables:
1. Right-click the State Generation or State Selection header in the Control View
and select View State Tables. The State Selection dialog box appears with the
system’s state selection data populated within tables. See the State Selection
(State Tables) screen section.
Note: The individual tables in the State Tables are the State Generators and
the column headings are the Output Controllers. See State Selection,
State Tables, and Control View Application Example in the User
Interface section.
Note: For each State Generator state, there is a corresponding Output
Controller state. The States column lists the states from highest priority
to lowest priority in descending order from top to bottom. An asterisk
(*) or an X appearing instead of a valid Output Controller state
indicates that the current State Generator has no interaction with the
Output Controller, and the Output Controller is controlled by the next
highest priority State Generator showing a valid Output Controller
state. An X also indicates that the field should not be modified unless
certain control specifications are required.
2. To change the Output Controller state for a given State Generator state, click
the cell and select the Output Controller state from the drop-down menu.
3. To change the hierarchy of the State Generators (reordering tables), click the
up or down arrow in the upper right-hand corner of the corresponding State
Selection Table until the tables appear in the desired order.
Note: After making a change, the border around the State Selection Table
appears green if the changes are OK. The border appears red when
there are problems with the changes made.
Note: After reordering the tables, the order that the corresponding modules
appear in the Control View remains the same until the next time you
load the Control View screen (for example, by switching modes or
views).
4. Click OK.
Note: At least one of the rows in a state table for an input must have all of its
options defined to prevent an Output Controller from having an unreliable
mode input.
See the Customizing State Selection Tables section for making changes for custom
applications.

172 CCT Help: Configuration


Viewing and Modifying a Module’s Logic
To view and modify a module’s logic, right-click a module that contains logic that
can be viewed and/or modified (appears tan in the Control View) and select View
Logic. The Logic View appears and displays the logic diagram for that module.
See the Logic View Steps section for details on how to modify logic.

Changing an Input or Output Signal


Note: You can designate default input and output signals before creating systems
from the Signal column in the Naming and Signal Preferences screen. See
the Setting and Using Preferences section for details.
To change an input or output signal:
1. Right-click the input or output module and select Setup. The Setup dialog box
appears. See the Setup (Input or Output) screen section.
2. Select a signal from the drop-down menu and click OK.
Wireless Ethernet Network Tips:
Tip: For Inputs such as Temperature, Setpoint, Warm/Cool Adjust, and Temp
Occ, select the Wireless Ethernet signal.
Tip: Make sure you remove any unused Network Sensor (Network Duct
Sensor or Network Zone Sensor) Inputs or Outputs from the system.

Adding a Module
System Selection adds all the necessary modules required for your system. You do
not need to add modules if you are not modifying logic after selecting the system.
See one of the following sections to add modules:
• Adding a Network Input
• Adding an Input
• Adding a Setpoint/Miscellaneous Module
• Adding a State Generation Module
• Adding an Output Control Module
• Adding a Network Output
• Adding an Output

Configuring a System 173


Renaming a Module
To rename a module:
1. Right-click the module to rename and select Rename. The Rename dialog box
appears. See the Rename (Module/Block) screen section.
2. Type a name for the module in the User Name text box.
3. Click OK.
To rename an Input or Output:
1. Right-click an Input or Output and select View Details, or double-click the
module. The Details dialog box appears.
2. On the Details tab, click Edit.
3. Modify the Name attribute/parameter as desired.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click Close.

Deleting a Module
To delete a module:
1. Right-click the module to delete and select Delete, or select multiple modules
by holding down the Ctrl key while selecting the modules, then right-click and
select Delete. The Confirm dialog box appears asking you to confirm that you
want to delete the module(s). See the Confirm (Delete) screen section.
2. Click Yes.

174 CCT Help: Configuration


Navigating between Control View and Logic View
Only the modules that contain logic that can be viewed and/or modified appear in
the Quick Navigation menu. The modules appear in alphabetical order. If a module
has a child, the child does not appear in the menu until after the parent is viewed
once.
For information on viewing and printing the logic of the entire application, see the
Viewing/Printing Application Logic section.
To navigate between the Control View and a module’s Logic View (using the
Quick Navigation menu in the upper left-hand side of the workspace; see Quick
Navigation Menu in the User Interface section):
In Control View:
From the Quick Navigation drop-down menu, select a module to view. The
Logic View of the selected module appears.
In Logic View:
From the Quick Navigation drop-down menu, select the system name (appears
first in the list below the displayed item). The Control View of the system
appears.
Or, select another module to view from the menu. The Logic View of the
selected module appears.

Viewing/Printing Application Logic


You can view and print application logic only in Configuration mode. See the
Application Logic View section. Also see Quick Navigation Menu in the User
Interface section.
To view/print application logic:
1. From the Quick Navigation drop-down menu, select View Application Logic
(appears second in the list below the system name). The logic of the entire
application appears in the Logic View.
2. Use the Logic View’s select, pan, and zoom options to view the application
logic. See the Panning and Zooming sections for details.
3. Use the Logic View’s Print Preview and Print options to print the logic of the
entire application. See the Printing the Logic Diagram section for details.

Configuring a System 175


Logic View Steps
See the User Interface section for information on the Logic View and descriptions
of its content, including the meanings of the color indicators used in this view. See
the Logic section for information on the logic blocks.
System Selection makes all the necessary logic configurations required for your
application. You do not need to change configurations if you are not modifying
logic after selecting the system.
For information on creating Custom Applications and Monitoring/Supervisory
Control Only applications, see Creating Custom Applications and Creating
Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only Applications.

Selecting a Block from the Control Block Palette


To select a block from the Control Block palette:
1. Browse through the folders in the palette to locate the block. See the Logic
View screen description in the User Interface section.
Note: Or, use the Block Finder to locate a block. See the Searching for a
Block Using the Block Finder section.
2. Drag and drop the block from the palette to the logic diagram in the right panel.

Searching for a Block Using the Block Finder


To search for a block using the Block Finder:
1. Drag and drop the Block Finder from the control block palette to the logic
diagram in the right panel. The Block Selection dialog box appears. See the
Block Selection (Block Finder) screen section.
2. Type the name of the block to locate in the Search For text box. The search
displays and filters results for each letter you type. For example, to find the
PID block you would begin by typing the letter P, which brings up all blocks
starting with the letter P. Then you would type the letter I, and only blocks
starting with PI appear in the list. Then typing the letter D narrows the results
to blocks beginning with PID.
3. Select a block from the list and click OK. The selected block appears in the
logic diagram in the right panel.

176 CCT Help: Configuration


Renaming a Block
We typically do not recommend renaming logic blocks because their names
identify their function. You may wish to rename a Container logic block (Activity
or Hybrid Activity) to identify the logic it contains.
To rename a block in the Logic View:
1. Right-click the block to rename and select Rename. The Rename dialog box
appears. See the Rename (Module/Block) screen section.
2. Type a name for the block in the User Name text box.
3. Click OK.

Deleting a Block
To delete a block in the Logic View:
1. Right-click the block to delete and select Delete, or select multiple blocks by
holding down the Ctrl key while selecting the blocks, then right-click and
select Delete. The Confirm dialog box appears asking you to confirm that you
want to delete the block(s). See the Confirm (Delete) screen section.
2. Click Yes.

Configuring a System 177


Exposing Ports
You can expose ports to make them available for connection. If you expose ports
for BACnet systems, the BACnet exposed ports are viewable objects through the
NAE. You cannot remove the selection for connected ports because the ports are
disabled in the Port Exposure dialog box.
To expose ports for connection in the Logic View:
1. Right-click a block and select Expose Ports > For Connection. The Port
Exposure dialog box appears. See the Port Exposure (For Connection) screen
section.
Note: This menu option is not available for blocks that do not have additional
ports to expose, such as Activity Inputs, Activity Outputs, and MUX
blocks.
2. Select input/output ports to expose or hide from the Input Port List and Output
Port List sections of the dialog box, using the Select All and/or Deselect All
buttons as necessary, and click OK.
To expose ports for BACnet systems in the Logic View:
1. Right-click a block and select Expose Ports > For BACnet. The Port Exposure
dialog box appears. See the Port Exposure (For BACnet System) screen
section.
2. Select input/output ports to expose or hide from the table of available ports by
checking the check box in the Expose column of the desired rows, and click
OK.
Note: After exposing ports for BACnet systems in Custom Logic, close and
reopen the Controller Application File (.caf) to view the ports in the
Parameters table.
Note: For blocks that do not have any available ports to expose (such as
Activity Inputs and Activity Outputs), you can expose ports by setting
the BACnet Exposed attribute to True in the Details dialog box.

178 CCT Help: Configuration


Connecting Blocks
To connect blocks in the Logic View (See the Logic View screen description in the
User Interface section.):
1. Place the cursor over the starting connection point or right side of an Activity
Input block [appears yellow]) until it changes shape from an arrow to a magic
wand and click on the starting connection point. The cursor changes to a +
sign. Compatible inputs/outputs of all blocks change color from orange to
green indicating where you can connect.
Note: If do not wish to complete the connection, press the Escape (Esc) key
or click within the empty space in the logic diagram to remove the
starting connection point.
2. Drag the cursor (+ sign) to the desired destination connection point and when
the cursor changes to the magic wand, click the point. The connection line
appears in the logic diagram and the connected input point appears yellow.
Note: A tooltip appears when you place your cursor over an invalid
connection point. An invalid connection is when the data type of the
source and destination do not match (for example, a Boolean source
and a Float destination).
Figure 6-11: Connecting a Block Process

Configuring a System 179


Adding a Port

IMPORTANT: Not all logic blocks support the New Port feature. The Logic
section indicates the blocks that support this feature. You can add up to 99 input
connections for blocks that support the New Port feature.

Although the New Port feature may appear for some logic blocks, only use this
feature for the blocks that indicate New Port support as documented in the
Logic section. Using the New Port feature to add ports to blocks that do not
support the feature may break your logic.

To add a port using the New Port feature:


1. When making a connection as described in the Connecting Blocks section,
place the + sign cursor over the lower left-hand corner of a block (for example,
the Add Math block) until New Port appears and the cursor changes to the
magic wand cursor.
2. Click New Port. An additional input appears on the block.
Note: Once you add a port, you cannot remove it. If you want to remove a port,
you must delete the block and then add it with the desired number of ports.
Figure 6-12: Adding a Port (New Port)

180 CCT Help: Configuration


Showing and Hiding Connection Lines
See the Logic View screen description in the User Interface section.
To hide a connection line, right-click a connection line and select Hide. The
connection line becomes a hidden edge label (numbered circle next to an Activity
Input, Activity Output, block input, or block output: , , or ).
To show a connection line, right-click a hidden edge label and select Unhide. The
hidden edge label becomes a connection line.

Deleting a Connection
See the Logic View screen description in the User Interface section.
To delete a connection line:
1. Right-click the connection line or hidden edge label (numbered circle next to
an Activity Input, Activity Output, block input, or block output: , , or
) and select Delete. The Confirm dialog box appears asking you to confirm
the deletion. See the Confirm (Delete) screen section.
2. Click Yes.
Note: When a hidden edge label indicates multiple connections (for example,
1:5), only the connected added last is deleted. If you need to delete a
specific connection, unhide the connection lines and remove the
appropriate connection.

Changing the Hidden Edge Label of a Connection


See the Logic View screen description in the User Interface section.
To change the hidden edge label of a connection:
1. Double-click the connection’s hidden edge label (numbered circle next to an
Activity Input, Activity Output, block input, or block output: , , or ).
The Hidden Edge Label dialog box appears.
2. Type a name or number for the label and click OK. The label text changes as
defined.

Configuring a System 181


Configuring a Hybrid Activity
A Hybrid Activity block contains state-based logic. You can define different logic
for each state in the chosen enumeration set. See the Logic View screen
description in the User Interface section. For information on the Hybrid Activity
container block, see Container in the Logic section.
To configure a Hybrid Activity:
1. In Logic View, drag and drop the Hybrid Activity Container block from the
Control Block palette to the logic diagram.
2. Select the enumeration set to use for the block:
a. Right-click the Hybrid Activity and select View > Details. The Details
dialog box appears.
b. Click Edit.
c. Select the desired enumeration set to use for the States Text attribute/
parameter.
d. Click Apply.
e. Click Close.
Note: You may need to view another block and view the Hybrid Activity
block to refresh the enumeration set visible in the Logic View.
3. Double-click the Hybrid Activity block or right-click the block and select
View Logic to access the Hybrid Activity’s Logic View.
Note: By default, the Hybrid Activity’s State Table’s State is selected (blue
background).
4. With the State header selected, create logic that determines how the states
change in this view.
5. Double-click on a state (The logic you created for the State header is hidden.)
and create logic for this particular state.
6. Repeat Step 5 for all states.
The following figures show the Hybrid Activity logic of the Proportional Box
Heating Control module. The State block is the HTG-OUTSTATE. This example
shows details for only two of the module’s seven states. See Heating Proportional
Valve in the Output Controller section for more information on the Proportional
Box Heating Control module.

182 CCT Help: Configuration


Figure 6-13: Proportional Box Heating Control - State Logic

Figure 6-14: Proportional Box Heating Control - Enum Off Logic

Configuring a System 183


Figure 6-15: Proportional Box Heating Control - Enum Control Logic

184 CCT Help: Configuration


Configuring the Command Hierarchy Block
For information on the Command Hierarchy block, see the Selection section in the
Logic.
To configure the Command Hierarchy block:
1. Double-click a Command Hierarchy block. The Command Hierarchy (Enum
Output) or Command Hierarchy (Boolean Output) dialog box appears. See the
Command Hierarchy (Enum Output or Boolean Output) screen section.
2. Review the column types and add, remove, and rename columns, and change
enumeration sets as necessary for your logic using the right-click menus
accessible from the column headers.
Note: By default, I1 is an Enum input (Off, On), and I2 is a Boolean input
(False, True).
3. In the input columns, use the drop-down menus for each cell to select a value
to assign when in the State listed in the State column for that row.
Note: Gray table rows with asterisks indicate that when the block is in a
particular state, no behavior change occurs, and the block checks for
the next state listed.
Note: A complete configuration is when all possible combinations of inputs
and values are represented in the rows (for example, the I1 column has
an Off row and an On row in Figure 6-17).
Note: An incomplete configuration is when the input and value combinations
listed in the rows do not cover all of the possible combinations. The
output of the command hierarchy holds the last value and the output is
flagged as Output cannot be determined. Use an incomplete
configuration to hold the last value if an unlisted or undesirable
condition occurs. The condition does not match any of the rows in the
table (that is, none of the rows are true) and the output remains at the
last value. When the configuration is incomplete, a dialog box appears
stating: “This Command Hierarchy table is Underspecified (missing
some possible combinations).”
Note: A yellow border surrounding the table cells indicates that the
combination of inputs and values configured is redundant. A
redundant configuration means that there are multiple rows that cover
the same combination of inputs and values. The command hierarchy
selects the row that has higher priority (appears higher) in the table to
generate the output. In the first and third rows in Figure 6-16, for
example, when the Mode is Off and the Maintenance Switch is Disable,
both rows are True. Since the first row is of greater priority, the State
output is set to False. Additionally, to create an Else condition, add a
row of asterisks as the last row in the table with a True state. When
using redundant rows, lower priority rows may not be active, which
could indicate unused rows or an improperly configured command
hierarchy block.

Configuring a System 185


Figure 6-16: Command Hierarchy Redundancy Example

Tip: To change the label of a column, right-click the column header and select
Change Column Label. The Port Name Dialog appears. Type a name in
the Port label text box and click OK. We recommend leaving this text box
empty so that dynamic naming may be used.
Tip: To add an enumeration input column, right-click the column header and
select Add Enum Column. After adding an enumeration input column,
make sure you select the appropriate enumeration set to use. The default
set is Off/On.
Tip: To add a boolean input column, right-click the column header and select
Add Boolean Column.
Tip: To remove a column, right-click the column header and select Remove
Column. When removing a column that you wish to replace with another,
make sure you remove the existing column first, then add the new
column. For example, to replace the I1 column that has an Off/On
enumeration input with a boolean input column, first remove the existing
I1 column, then add a boolean input column and rename the column to I1.
Tip: To change the enumeration set of a column (including the State column),
right-click the column header and select Change Column Enum Set. The
Enum Set Change Dialog appears. Select the Enum Set and click OK.
Tip: To add a row, right-click a cell and select Insert Row.
Tip: To add 5 rows, right-click a cell and select Insert 5 Rows.
Tip: To add 10 rows, right-click a cell and select Insert 10 Rows.
Tip: To remove a row, right-click a cell and select Delete Row.
Tip: To copy a row, right-click a cell and select Copy Row. The copied row
appears at the end of the table.
Tip: To move a row, right-click a cell and select Move Row Up or Move Row
Down. Or, select a row and use the up or down arrows to the right of the
table.

186 CCT Help: Configuration


Tip: To indicate a state to use when the input is NOT a specific value (for
enumeration input columns only), right-click a cell and select ! Value. For
example, when you want an event to occur during any other state than the
Satisfied state and you use ! Value, the state is indicated as ! Satisfied. To
remove the NOT indication and use a regular value, right-click the cell
and select Value.
4. Click OK to apply the changes.
For example, the following figure indicates:
• Row 1: When Input 1 (I1) is Off and Input 2 (I2) is False, the Output State is
False.
• Row 2: When Input 1 (I1) is On, the Output State is True regardless of Input 2
(I2).
Figure 6-17: Command Hierarchy (Boolean Output) Example

Configuring a System 187


Configuring the Line Segment Block
For information on the Line Segment block, see the Calculation section in the
Logic.
To configure the Line Segment block:
1. Double-click a Line Segment block. The Line Segment dialog box appears.
2. In the Input Points and Output Points columns, select a cell and type the
desired values.
Tip: To add a row, right-click a cell and select Insert Row.
Tip: To add 5 rows, right-click a cell and select Insert 5 Rows.
Tip: To remove a row, right-click a cell and select Delete Row.
3. Click OK to apply the changes.

Configuring the MUX Block


For information on the MUX blocks, see the Selection section in the Logic.
To configure the MUX block:
1. Double-click a MUX block. The MUX dialog box appears.
2. Select the number of inputs to use from the Inputs drop-down list.
3. For MUX blocks with Enum Mode, select the enumeration set to use from the
Enum Set drop-down list.
Note: This field is used for MUX blocks with Enum Mode only and is
disabled for Boolean Mode. If you change the Enum Set, the Input X -
Mode(s) fields are cleared and need to be configured.
4. Click an Input X - Mode(s) button. The Mode Selection dialog box appears.
5. Select the value to use for the mode and click OK.
6. Click OK.

188 CCT Help: Configuration


Configuring the Translation Blocks
For information on the Enum to Boolean Translation and Boolean to Enum
Translation blocks, see the Selection section in the Logic.
To configure the Translation block:
1. Double-click a Translation block. The Enum to Boolean Translation or
Boolean to Enum Translation dialog box appears. See the Translation (Enum
to Boolean or Boolean to Enum) screen section.
2. In the input columns, use the drop-down menus for each cell to select a value
to assign when in the State listed in the State column for that row.
Note: Gray table rows with asterisks indicate that when the block is in a
particular state, no behavior change occurs, and the block checks for
the next state listed.
Note: A complete configuration is when all possible combinations of inputs
and values are represented in the rows (for example, the I1 column has
an Off row and an On row).
Note: An incomplete configuration is when the input and value combinations
listed in the rows do not cover all of the possible combinations. The
output of the command hierarchy holds the last value and the output is
flagged as Output cannot be determined. Use an incomplete
configuration to hold the last value if an unlisted or undesirable
condition occurs. The condition does not match any of the rows in the
table (that is, none of the rows are true) and the output remains at the
last value. When the configuration is incomplete, a dialog box appears
stating: “This Translation table is Underspecified (missing some
possible combinations).”
Note: A yellow border surrounding the table cells indicates that the
combination of inputs and values configured is redundant. A
redundant configuration means that there are multiple rows that cover
the same combination of inputs and values. The command hierarchy
selects the row that has higher priority (appears higher) in the table to
generate the output. Additionally, to create an Else condition, add a
row of asterisks as the last row in the table with a True state. When
using redundant rows, lower priority rows may not be active, which
could indicate unused rows or an improperly configured block.
Tip: To change the label of a column, right-click the column header and select
Change Column Label. The Port Name Dialog appears. Type a name in
the Port label text box and click OK. We recommend leaving this text box
empty so that dynamic naming may be used.
Tip: To add an enumeration input column, right-click the column header and
select Add Enum Column. After adding an enumeration input column,
make sure you select the appropriate enumeration set to use. The default
set is Off/On.

Configuring a System 189


Tip: To add a boolean input column, right-click the column header and select
Add Boolean Column.
Tip: To remove a column, right-click the column header and select Remove
Column. When removing a column that you wish to replace with another,
make sure you remove the existing column first, then add the new
column. For example, to replace the I1 column that has an Off/On
enumeration input with a boolean input column, first remove the existing
I1 column, then add a boolean input column and rename the column to I1.
Tip: To change the enumeration set of a column, right-click the column header
and select Change Column Enum Set. The Enum Set Change Dialog
appears. Select the Enum Set and click OK.
Tip: To add a row, right-click a cell and select Insert Row.
Tip: To add 5 rows, right-click a cell and select Insert 5 Rows.
Tip: To add 10 rows, right-click a cell and select Insert 10 Rows.
Tip: To remove a row, right-click a cell and select Delete Row.
Tip: To copy a row, right-click a cell and select Copy Row. The copied row
appears at the end of the table.
Tip: To move a row, right-click a cell and select Move Row Up or Move Row
Down. Or, select a row and use the up or down arrows to the right of the
table.
Tip: To indicate a state to use when the input is NOT a specific value (for
enumeration input columns only), right-click a cell and select ! Value. For
example, when you want an event to occur during any other state than the
Satisfied state and you use ! Value, the state is indicated as ! Satisfied. To
remove the NOT indication and use a regular value, right-click the cell
and select Value.
3. Click OK to apply the changes.

Setting the Default Element of a Module


To set the Default Element of a module:
1. Click the Set Default Element button in the Logic View toolbar or select Set
Default Element from the right-click menu in the logic diagram. The Default
Element Selection dialog box appears.
Note: When creating custom logic in an Activity or Hybrid Activity, you
must toggle between the Control View and Logic View to populate the
element list.
2. Select the radio button of the desired element and click OK. The default
element appears black in the logic diagram.

190 CCT Help: Configuration


Exporting a Module
To export a module, click the Export Module button from the Logic View toolbar,
or right-click within the white space of the Logic diagram and select Export
Module. The module currently displayed in the logic diagram and its children are
added to the Custom folder in the palette.
The exported module is saved in a file in the C:\Program
Files\Johnson Controls\CCT\Custom Control Modules directory on your computer
using the current name of the module with a .caf.module file extension.
You can share this file with other users. Place a copy of the file in the C:\Program
Files\Johnson Controls\CCT\Custom Control Modules directory on a different
computer and the module appears in the Custom folder in the palette the next time
CCT is started on that computer.
You can import or use the module by adding the module the same way you add
other modules. See the Adding a Module and Selecting a Block from the Control
Block Palette sections.

Panning
See the Logic View screen description in the User Interface section.
To pan in the logic diagram:
1. Click the Pan (hand) button in the Logic View toolbar.
2. Click and hold the cursor down while moving the mouse.
3. Release the hold when you reach the desired location.

Configuring a System 191


Zooming
See the Logic View screen description in the User Interface section.
To zoom the logic diagram:
Marquee:
1. Click the Marquee zoom button in the Logic View toolbar.
2. Place the cursor to the left and just above the location to zoom.
3. Click and drag the cursor over the desired area.
4. Release the hold when you reach the desired view.
Interactive:
1. Click the Interactive zoom button in the Logic View toolbar.
2. Click and drag the cursor over the desired area to zoom in and out. Drag down
to zoom in and drag up to zoom out.
3. Release the hold when you reach the desired view.
Fit to Window:
Click the Fit to Window button in the Logic View toolbar. The logic diagram
resizes to fit all blocks within the right panel.
Selective Zoom (Drop-Down Menu):
Select the desired zoom level option from the Selective zoom’s drop-down menu
in the Logic View toolbar.
Selective Zoom (Custom Zoom Level):
Type the desired zoom level in the Selective zoom’s text box in the Logic View
toolbar and press Enter.

192 CCT Help: Configuration


Printing the Logic Diagram
See the Logic View screen description in the User Interface section.
For information on printing summary reports, see Printing Summary Reports in the
User Interface section.
To print the logic diagram:
Print Preview
Click the Print Preview button in the Logic View toolbar. The Print Preview screen
appears with the following options:
• Print
• Print Setup
Note: The Print Setup dialog box contains a Page Setup button that allows
you to change the orientation of the page from Portrait to Landscape
and vice versa.
• Zoom In
• Zoom Out
• Selective Zoom Menu
• Fit In Window
• Close
Print
Click the Print button in the Logic View toolbar. The Print dialog box appears.
Select the desired print settings/properties and click Print/OK.

Configuring a System 193


Creating Custom Applications
You can create custom applications by modifying an existing Controller
Application File (.caf), making changes to a selected system, or by using the File >
New: Custom Applications option to start from scratch. For details on specific
applications, modules, and logic, see the Applications, Modules, and Logic
sections.
For information on creating a Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only application,
see the Creating Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only Applications section.
To create custom applications, perform the steps that apply:
1. Begin creating a custom application according to the steps in Using File >
New: Custom Applications or Modifying an Existing Controller Application
File or Selected System.
2. Create custom logic by adding the desired modules and modifying them as
necessary. See Creating Custom Logic (Adding Modules) and the Control View
Steps.
3. Create logic for the modules in the Logic View as necessary. See the Logic
View Steps.
4. Expose and make connections between the modules according to the
instructions in the Viewing and Modifying Connections section.
5. Add the State Generation modules as tables in the State Tables and add the
Output Control modules as columns in the State Tables as necessary. See the
Viewing and Modifying State Selection Tables and Customizing State Selection
Tables sections.
6. In the Control View, make connections between the State Selection Table and
the State Generators and Output Controllers as necessary. See Viewing and
Modifying Connections.

194 CCT Help: Configuration


Modification Example
For example, you may want to add lighting control to a Mixed Air Single Duct Air
Handling Unit application where the lights turn on/off when the AHU turns on/off.
To add lighting control to a Mixed Air Single Duct Air Handling Unit application:
1. With your MASD application open, add the Output Control Lighting module
and the LIGHT-C Output module.
Figure 6-18: MASD Application with Lighting Modules

Configuring a System 195


2. View Connections (A) for the Output Control Lighting module and connect its
Present Value (B) to the LIGHT-C Output module (C).
Figure 6-19: Viewing and Making Connections (Lighting/LIGHT-C)

196 CCT Help: Configuration


Figure 6-20: Lighting/LIGHT-C Connection Complete

Configuring a System 197


3. View State Tables and add a Lighting column.
Figure 6-21: Adding Lighting Column to the State Tables

4. In the Start Stop Sequencing DA-T table, set the Lighting to Off when the State
is Off and On when the State is On.
Figure 6-22: Start Stop Sequencing DA-T and Lighting State Table
Configuration

198 CCT Help: Configuration


5. View Connections for State Selection and connect the Lighting output to the
Output Control Lighting module.
Figure 6-23: Viewing and Making Connections (State Selection/Lighting)

Configuring a System 199


Figure 6-24: State Selection/Lighting Connection Complete

200 CCT Help: Configuration


Using File > New: Custom Applications
The Custom Applications option available from the File > New dialog box lays
down a blank Control View workspace where you can create specialized
applications.
To create a custom application using File > New: Custom Applications:
1. From the File menu, select New. The New System dialog box appears.
2. Type a name for the system in the System Name text box. Illegal characters
include:
:*?"<>|/[]#@
3. Select Custom Applications from the System Type drop-down menu.
4. Select a type from the System Configuration drop-down menu.
5. Select Imperial or Metric from the System of Units drop-down menu.
Note: After setting the units and closing the application, the application
remembers the last units setting. See Unit Preferences in the Setting
and Using Preferences section.
Note: In the Download Language drop-down menu, English (United States)
is currently the only option available.
6. Click OK. The blank Custom Application appears in the Control View of CCT
in Configuration mode.
7. Follow the remaining steps in the Creating Custom Applications section.

Modifying an Existing Controller Application File or Selected System


To create a custom application by modifying an existing Controller Application
File (.caf) or selected system:
1. Open an existing Controller Application File (.caf) or a select a system similar
to the one you wish to customize. See the Opening an Existing Controller
Application File and Selecting a System (Creating a New System) sections.
Note: The default location of a Controller Application File (.caf) is
C:\Documents and Settings\username.
2. Follow the remaining steps in the Creating Custom Applications section.

Configuring a System 201


Creating Custom Logic (Adding Modules)
See one of the following sections to add modules:
• Adding a Network Input
• Adding an Input
• Adding a Setpoint/Miscellaneous Module
• Adding a State Generation Module
• Adding an Output Control Module
• Adding a Network Output
• Adding an Output

Adding a Network Input


To add a Network Input:
1. Right-click the Network Input header in the Control View and select New. The
Network Input Selection dialog box appears. See the Module Selection (New)
screen section.
2. Select an input from the palette.
3. Type a name for the input in the User Name text box.
4. Click OK. The input appears in the Network Input section of the Control View.

202 CCT Help: Configuration


Adding an Input
Note: You can designate default input signals before creating systems from the
Signal column in the Naming and Signal Preferences screen. See the
Setting and Using Preferences section for details.
To add an input:
1. Right-click the Inputs header in the Control View and select New. The Input
Selection dialog box appears. See the Input Selection (New) screen section.
2. Use the drop-down menus to filter the input data and click the column headers
to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
Note: You can filter on multiple columns. For example, you can filter on
Function first and Data Type second to see if there is an Application
type that meets your requirements. If not, you can select Unknown for
Application type and pick the Signal to use.
If your system requires a 0-10 VDC Humidity sensor, select Humidity
from the Function drop-down menu, select an Application type from
the Application drop-down menu, and select 0-10 VDC from the Signal
drop-down menu.
When choosing an input to which you wish to provide a control
strategy, use an appropriate input type from the list provided. Populated
inputs carry tuning attributes/parameters for use with PID Pre-
Processors and PID logic blocks.
Note: To perform custom filters, select Custom from the drop-down menu,
select the filtering operator, and enter/select the information to filter.
3. Select one or more inputs with the appropriate signal types from the list using
the check boxes in the Create column.
Note: Each SA Bus device must have a unique Application ID.
4. In the Count column, type the desired number of inputs to add and press the
Enter key.
5. Click OK. The input module or modules appear in the Inputs section of the
Control View.
Note: To rename the input module, use the View Details option and modify
the Name attribute/parameter.
Note: If you must change the signal, right-click the module and select Setup.
See Changing an Input or Output Signal.

Configuring a System 203


Adding a Setpoint/Miscellaneous Module
To add a Setpoint/Miscellaneous module:
1. Right-click the Setpoint/Miscellaneous header in the Control View and select
New. The Setpoint/Miscellaneous Module Selection dialog box appears. See
the Module Selection (New) screen section.
2. Select a module from the palette.
Note: If you need to create your own non-state based custom logic, choose
Activity from the palette and be sure to provide a meaningful name for
the module to indicate the type of logic it will contain.
Note: Any custom modules of this type also appear in the palette.
3. Type a name for the module in the User Name text box.
4. Click OK. The module appears in the Setpoint/Miscellaneous section of the
Control View.

Adding a State Generation Module


To add a State Generation module:
1. Right-click the State Generation header in the Control View and select New.
The State Generation Module Selection dialog box appears. See the Module
Selection (New) screen section.
2. Select a module from the palette.
Note: If you need to create your own state based custom logic, choose Hybrid
Activity from the palette and be sure to provide a meaningful name for
the module to indicate the type of logic it will contain.
Note: Any custom modules of this type also appear in the palette.
3. Type a name for the module in the User Name text box.
4. Click OK. The module appears in the State Generation section of the Control
View.

204 CCT Help: Configuration


Adding an Output Control Module
To add an Output Control module:
1. Right-click the Output Control header in the Control View and select New.
The Output Control Module Selection dialog box appears. See the Module
Selection (New) screen section.
2. Select a module from the palette.
Note: If you need to create your own state based custom logic, choose Hybrid
Activity from the palette and be sure to provide a meaningful name for
the module to indicate the type of logic it will contain.
Note: Any custom modules of this type also appear in the palette.
3. Type a name for the module in the User Name text box.
4. Click OK. The module appears in the Output Control section of the Control
View.

Adding a Network Output


To add a Network Output:
1. Right-click the Network Output header in the Control View and select New.
The Network Output Selection dialog box appears. See the Module Selection
(New) screen section.
2. Select an output from the palette.
3. Type a name for the output in the User Name text box.
4. Click OK. The output appears in the Network Output section of the Control
View.

Configuring a System 205


Adding an Output
Note: You can designate default output signals before creating systems from the
Signal column in the Naming and Signal Preferences screen. See the
Setting and Using Preferences section for details.
To add an output:
1. Right-click the Outputs header in the Control View and select New. The
Output Selection dialog box appears. See the Output Selection (New) screen
section.
2. Use the drop-down menus to filter the output data and click the column headers
to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
Note: You can filter on multiple columns. For example, you can filter on
Function first and Data Type second to see if there is an Application
type that meets your requirements. If not, you can select Unknown for
Application type and pick the Signal to use.
Note: To perform custom filters, select Custom from the drop-down menu,
select the filtering operator, and enter/select the information to filter.
3. Select one or more outputs with the appropriate signal types from the list using
the check boxes in the Create column.
4. In the Count column, type the desired number of outputs to add and press the
Enter key.
5. Click OK. The output module or modules appear in the Outputs section of the
Control View.
Note: To rename the output module, use the View Details option and modify
the Name attribute.
Note: To change the signal, right-click the module and select Setup. See
Changing an Input or Output Signal.

206 CCT Help: Configuration


Customizing State Selection Tables
See the Viewing and Modifying State Selection Tables section and State Selection
(State Tables) screen section for general details on working with the state selection
tables before changing a table label or adding a table or column to the State
Selection tables. Then, see the following procedures:
• Changing a State Table Label
• Adding a Table to the State Selection Tables
• Adding a Column to the State Selection Tables

Changing a State Table Label


To change a state table label:
1. Right-click the State Selection or State Generation header in the Control View
and select View State Tables. The State Selection dialog box appears with the
system’s state selection data populated within tables. See the State Selection
(State Tables) screen section.
2. Right-click the module name (table heading: yellow = connected or orange =
not connected) and select Change Table Label. The Port Name Dialog box
appears.
Note: You must right-click the module name (table heading: yellow =
connected or orange = not connected) towards the left of the center of
the screen to access the right-click menu.
3. Type a name in the Port Label text box.
Note: We recommend leaving this text box empty so that dynamic naming
may be used.
4. Click OK.

Changing a Column Label


To change a state table column label:
1. Right-click the State Selection or State Generation header in the Control View
and select View State Tables. The State Selection dialog box appears with the
system’s state selection data populated within tables. See the State Selection
(State Tables) screen section.
2. Right-click the turquoise column header and select Change Column Label. The
Port Name Dialog box appears.
3. Type a name in the Port Label text box.
Note: We recommend leaving this text box empty so that dynamic naming
may be used.
4. Click OK.

Configuring a System 207


Adding a Table to the State Selection Tables
To add a table to the State Selection tables:
1. Right-click the State Selection or State Generation header in the Control View
and select View State Tables. The State Selection dialog box appears with the
system’s state selection data populated within tables. See the State Selection
(State Tables) screen section.
2. Right-click the module name (table heading: yellow = connected or orange =
not connected) and select Create State Selection Table. The Create State
Selection Table dialog box appears.
Note: You must right-click the module name (table heading: yellow =
connected or orange = not connected) towards the left of the center of
the screen to access the right-click menu.
3. Type a name in the Port Label text box.
Note: We recommend leaving this text box empty so that dynamic naming
may be used.
4. Select a priority for the table.
Note: Selecting 0 places the table at the top of the list, thus giving it the
highest priority in the list.
5. Select the type of data for the table (Enumeration or Boolean).
6. Click OK.

208 CCT Help: Configuration


Adding a Column to the State Selection Tables
To add a column to a State Selection table:
1. Right-click the State Selection header in the Control View and select View
State Tables. The State Selection dialog box appears with the system’s state
selection data populated within tables. See the State Selection (State Tables)
screen section.
2. Right-click the module name (table heading: yellow = connected or orange =
not connected) and select Create State Selection Column. The Create State
Selection Column dialog box appears.
Note: You must right-click the module name (table heading: yellow =
connected or orange = not connected) towards the left of the center of
the screen to access the right-click menu.
3. Type a name in the Port Label text box.
Note: We recommend leaving this text box empty so that dynamic naming
may be used.
4. Select where you want the column to appear in the table using the Column
Index drop-down menu.
Note: Selecting 1 places the column in the left most column position.
5. Select the type of data for the column (Enumeration or Boolean).
6. Click OK.

Adding the Hybrid Activity to the State Tables


To add the Hybrid Activity to the State Tables:
1. Add a table to the State Tables according to the instructions in the Adding a
Table to the State Selection Tables section. Be sure to select the States Text
enumeration set.
2. In the Control View, right-click the Hybrid Activity and select View
Connections.
Note: If no items appear in the Connections table, expose ports for
connection. See Exposing Ports.
3. Connect the inputs and outputs as desired, including the State output.

Configuring a System 209


Creating Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only Applications
The Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only option available from the File > New
dialog box lays down a blank Control View workspace where you can create
specialized applications for monitoring purposes.
To create a Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only application:
1. From the File menu, select New. The New System dialog box appears.
2. Type a name for the system in the System Name text box. Illegal characters
include:
:*?"<>|/[]#@
3. Select Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only from the System Type drop-down
menu.
4. Select a type from the System Configuration drop-down menu.
5. Select Imperial or Metric from the System of Units drop-down menu.
Note: After setting the units and closing the application, the application
remembers the last units setting. See Unit Preferences in the Setting
and Using Preferences section.
Note: In the Download Language drop-down menu, English (United States)
is currently the only option available.
6. Click OK. The blank monitoring/supervisory control application appears in the
Control View of CCT in Configuration mode.
7. Add the desired input and output modules and modify them as necessary. See
Adding an Input, Adding an Output and the Control View Steps.

210 CCT Help: Configuration


Creating a Sideloop
For information on the specific Sideloop Output Control modules, see Sideloop in
the Output Controller section.
Note: To manually create a Sideloop by adding the desired sideloop modules to
the system, see the Adding an Output Control Module section. If you are
not using the System Selection Wizard to create the sideloop, skip to
Step 5.
To create a sideloop:
1. Click the Sideloop button. The CCT System Selection Wizard appears with the
Sideloop Selection screen active.
Note: The Previous and Next buttons are disabled.
2. Select the sideloop options for your system and click Finish. See the System
Selection Tree section for information on tree behavior and use (for example,
using the check boxes, radio buttons, and the + and - next to a node in the tree
to show and hide selections). For information on the selection options in the
Sideloop Selection screen, see the Sideloop Applications section. The Sideloop
dialog box prompts you to name the sideloop.
3. Type a name to identify the sideloop being created.
4. Click OK. The sideloop modules are added to the system with the name
entered in Step 3 as their prefix.
5. View and modify the sideloop modules’ details according to the steps in the
Viewing and Modifying Details section. Make sure you note the enumeration
set selected for the mode input of this module.
Note: Make sure the Process ID and Process Units attributes are set
according to the needs of your system. If the Process ID selected is
Airflow, Airflow Diff, or Other, you must set the Process Range as
necessary. See the PID Pre-Processor logic block description and the
Process ID Configuration Restrictions in the Control topic of the
Logic section for details.
6. If necessary, expose and make connections between the modules according to
the instructions in the Viewing and Modifying Connections section.
7. View the Sideloop module column in the State Tables and modify the states as
necessary. Keep in mind the enumeration set selected for the mode input of this
module in Step 5. See the Viewing and Modifying State Selection Tables
section.
Note: If you did not use the System Selection Wizard to create the sideloop,
you must add the sideloop Output Control module as a column in the
State Tables and modify the states as necessary. See the Customizing
State Selection Tables section.

Configuring a System 211


8. In the Control View, view and modify the connections between the State
Selection Table and the State Generators and Sideloop Output Controllers as
necessary. See the Viewing and Modifying Connections section.
Tip: You can run the Sideloop System Selection Wizard as many times as
desired.
Tip: Once a sideloop is created, you cannot re-run the sideloop selection
process on one of the sideloops.
Tip: If you re-run System Selection for the main application after sideloops
have been created, the sideloops are not deleted.

212 CCT Help: Configuration


Setting Up Peer-to-Peer Communication
For information on peer-to-peer communication and guidelines, see the Peer-to-
Peer Communication section.
To set up peer-to-peer communication:
1. Identify and record the Instance Number (BACnet ID) of the device to which
you want to communicate. You can locate this attribute on the Network
Settings screen of the Hardware Definition Wizard.
Note: You also can locate the Instance Number of devices using the
Metasys system UI. This method allows you to look up multiple device
instance numbers at once.
If the Johnson Controls Point Schedule was used to download the
controllers, check the instance number on the MSTP Field Device tab
of the project's Point Schedule.
2. Identify and record the Object Identifier of the object in which you want to
read/write a value. You can locate this attribute in the Advanced view of the
Details dialog box.
Note: The Object Identifier consists of the BACnet Class ID and the object’s
Instance Number separated by a colon. For example, an Object
Identifier of AV:10026 has a BACnet Class ID of AV and an Instance
Number of 10026.
3. View the details of the desired Network Input or Network Output.
4. Click Edit.
5. In the configuration table for the Peer Reference attribute, modify the
elements as follows:
a. Instance Number (BACnet ID): Enter the device’s Instance Number in
the text box as recorded in Step 1.
b. Object Identifier: Select the BACnet Class ID from the drop-down menu
and enter the object’s Instance Number in the text box as recorded in
Step 2.
The BACnet Class ID should typically be of the same Data Type as the
object for which the peer-to-peer attribute is being configured (for
example, an AV Network Input should reference another AV, an AI, or an
AO object). If multistate values are used in peer-to-peer references, the
Enumeration sets should be the same. If the sets do not match, you must
determine if the values in the sets are compatible.
6. Click Apply and then click Close.

Configuring a System 213


Note: Check the Error Status attribute to diagnose communication problems.
This attribute displays the status of the last communication that occurred
with an input or output reference. Common errors include:
• Surrogate Object is Not Bound: The referenced device (Device ID)
has never responded because a device with the entered Device ID either
does not exist or is offline.
• Remote Device is Offline: The referenced device did respond at one
time but is no longer responding.
• Unknown Object: The referenced device exists and is online, but the
Object ID that was entered does not exist on that device.
• Type Mismatch: The referenced object exists but the data type of the
referenced attribute/property is invalid. This error generally does not
appear for inputs on Johnson Controls or third-party devices. For
outputs on third-party devices, the Object Type of the output needs to
match the type of output object making the peer reference.
• Unknown Property: This error generally does not appear if you leave
the Peer Reference Attribute field as Present Value. If you change
this setting, the Unknown Property error means the referenced object
exists but the referenced attribute does not exist.

Disabling Peer-to-Peer Communication


To disable peer-to-peer communication:
1. View the details of the Network Input or Network Output.
2. Click Advanced and then click Edit.
3. In the Peer Reference attribute’s configuration table, select the Peer to Peer
Disabled option from the Object Identifier drop-down menu.
4. Click Apply and then click Close.

214 CCT Help: Configuration


Screens
New System
See Selecting a System (Creating a New System).
Table 6-42: New System Dialog Box (Part 1 of 2)
Field Description
System Name Allows you to type a name for your new system.
Illegal characters include:
:*?"<>|/[]#@
System Type Allows you to select the type of system to create. Options include (see Applications):
• Air Handling Unit
• Fan Coil
• Unit Ventilators
• Heat Pumps
• VAV
• Central Heating
• Central Cooling
• Custom Applications (Creating Custom Applications)
• Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only (Creating Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only
Applications)

Configuring a System 215


Table 6-42: New System Dialog Box (Part 2 of 2)
Field Description
System Allows you to select a configuration type for your new system. Options include (see
Configuration Applications):
Air Handling Unit
• Mixed Air Single Duct
• 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct
• Mixed Air Dual Duct
• 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct
• Rooftop Unit
• Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct)
Fan Coil
• Blank: This system type covers all configuration options.
Unit Ventilators
• Blank: This system type covers all configuration options.
Heat Pumps
• Blank: This system type covers all configuration options.
VAV
• Single Duct
• Dual Duct
• Slave Single Duct
• Slave Dual Duct
Central Heating
• Blank: This system type covers all configuration options.
Central Cooling
• Blank: This system type covers all configuration options.
Custom Applications (Creating Custom Applications)
• Electrical
• Misc Fan
• Elevator
• Security
• Fire
• SMOKE
• Miscellaneous
Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only (Creating Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only
Applications)
• Electrical
• Misc Fan
• Elevator
• Security
• Fire
• SMOKE
• Miscellaneous
System of Units Allows you to select the units to use in your new system (Imperial or Metric).
Note: After setting the units and closing CCT, CCT remembers the last units setting. See
Unit Preferences in the Setting and Using Preferences section.
OK Applies the selections and closes the dialog box. The system appears in the Control View.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

216 CCT Help: Configuration


CCT System Selection Wizard
See Selecting a System (Creating a New System) and Viewing and Modifying
System Selections.
Table 6-43: CCT System Selection Wizard
Field 1 Description
Mechanical System Selection Allows you to select the mechanical components to use in your system by
Screen browsing through the folders of the selection tree and selecting the check boxes
and radio buttons. For information on the types of systems you can create and
details on the selections available, see the User Interface and Applications
sections.
Control Logic Selection Allows you to select the control logic to use in your system by browsing through
Screen the folders of the selection tree and selecting the check boxes and radio buttons.
For information on the types of systems you can create and details on the
selections available, see the User Interface and Applications sections.
Previous Moves to the previous screen of the wizard.
Next Moves to the next screen of the wizard.
Finish Applies the selections and closes the wizard. The system appears in the Control
View in Configuration mode.
Cancel Closes the wizard without applying the selections.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

1. For Sideloops, there is only one Selection screen called Sideloop Selection. The Previous button is enabled but
does not work. The Next button is disabled. For information on creating sideloops, see the Creating a Sideloop
section.

Configuring a System 217


Controller Information Wizard
See the Viewing Controller Information section. The Controller Information
Wizard contains the same device connection information as the Commissioning
Device Wizard, with the addition of the Copy To Clipboard option. For
information on viewing information of a controller while it is being commissioned
(Commissioning mode only), see the Commissioning a System section.
Table 6-44: Controller Information Wizard
Field Description
Name Displays the names of the controllers.

Description Displays information for the controllers.

Model Displays the model numbers for the controllers.

Maincode Version Displays the firmware version for the controllers.

Bootcode Version Displays the bootcode version for the controllers.

System Name Displays the system name for the controllers.

CPU Usage % Displays the CPU usage for the controllers.

Object Memory Usage % Displays the memory usage for the controllers.

Status Displays the status for the controllers.

Device Address Displays the device address for the controllers.

Copy To Clipboard Copies the selected device’s data to the clipboard for
pasting into another program.

Close Closes the Controller Information Wizard.

218 CCT Help: Configuration


Control View
See the Control View screen description in the User Interface section.

Module Selection (New)


The following dialog boxes are the same:
• Network Input Selection
• Setpoint/Miscellaneous Module Selection
• State Generation Module Selection
• Output Control Module Selection
• Network Output Selection
See Adding a Module and Creating Custom Logic (Adding Modules).
Table 6-45: Module Selection (New)
Field Description
Palette Lists the modules you can add to the system.
Show Description/ Displays or hides the description of the selected module in the
Hide Description palette.
User Name Allows you to type a name for the module.
Standard Name Displays a Johnson Controls standard name for the module.
OK Applies the selections and closes the dialog box. The module
appears in the Control View.
Cancel Closes the wizard without applying the selections.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Input Selection (New)


See Adding an Input.
Table 6-46: Input Selection (New) (Part 1 of 2)
Field Description
Drop-Down Filter Menus Allows you to filter each column to narrow the list and identify the
desired input.
Note: The Custom option allows you to perform custom filters by
selecting the filtering operator and entering/selecting the
information to filter.
Column Headers Allows you to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
Create Column Allows you to select one or more inputs to add to the system.
Note: When you select a check box, the Count column text
updates to 1. You can type the desired number of inputs to
add in that column and press the Enter key.
Count Column Allows you to enter the number of inputs to add to the system.
Note: When you type a number in the Count column and press the
Enter key, the check box in the Create column is selected.

Configuring a System 219


Table 6-46: Input Selection (New) (Part 2 of 2)
Field Description
Application Column Lists the application types available for the inputs.
Note: Miscellaneous is the default category that appears in this
column when you open this dialog box. You can change the
default setting to another category in the
ApplicationConfiguration.properties file. Access this file
in the C:\Program Files\Johnson Controls\CCT\lib directory.
Then change Miscellaneous in the following entry to the
desired category. For example, to display all categories,
change Miscellaneous to All. Save the file. The change
appears the next time you open CCT.
controlview.newFilterColumnValue=Miscellaneous
controlview.newFilterColumnName=Application
Function Column Lists the functions available for the inputs.
Data Type Column Lists the data types available for the inputs.
Signal Column Lists the signals available for the inputs.
OK Applies the selections and closes the dialog box. The input appears
in the Inputs section of the Control View.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without adding the input.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Output Selection (New)


See Adding an Output.
Table 6-47: Output Selection (New) (Part 1 of 2)
Field Description
Drop-Down Filter Menus Allows you to filter each column to narrow the list and identify the
desired output.
Note: The Custom option allows you to perform custom filters by
selecting the filtering operator and entering/selecting the
information to filter.
Column Headers Allows you to sort the data in ascending or descending order.
Create Column Allows you to select one or more outputs to add to the system.
Note: When you select a check box, the Count column text
updates to 1. You can type the desired number of outputs to
add in that column and press the Enter key.
Count Column Allows you to enter the number of outputs to add to the system.
Note: When you type a number in the Count column and press the
Enter key, the check box in the Create column is selected.
Application Column Lists the application types available for the outputs.
Note: Miscellaneous is the default category that appears in this
column when you open this dialog box. You can change the
default setting to another category in the
ApplicationConfiguration.properties file. Access this file
in the C:\Program Files\Johnson Controls\CCT\lib directory.
Then change Miscellaneous in the following entry to the
desired category. For example, to display all categories,
change Miscellaneous to All. Save the file. The change
appears the next time you open CCT.
controlview.newFilterColumnValue=Miscellaneous
controlview.newFilterColumnName=Application
Function Column Lists the functions available for the outputs.
Data Type Column Lists the data types available for the outputs.
Signal Column Lists the signals available for the outputs.

220 CCT Help: Configuration


Table 6-47: Output Selection (New) (Part 2 of 2)
Field Description
OK Applies the selections and closes the dialog box. The output
appears in the Outputs section of the Control View.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without adding the output.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Configuring a System 221


State Selection (State Tables)
Each table shows the behavior that occurs when its corresponding State Generator
module is in a particular state (the State Generator Module in State X yields the
Behavior of the Output Controller). See the Viewing and Modifying State Selection
Tables and Customizing State Selection Tables sections for more information.
Table 6-48: State Selection (State Tables)
Field Description
Module Name and Port Displays the name of the State Generator module in which the state
(Yellow or Orange Table table is associated. The module name is followed by the connected
Captions) port in the following format: Module Name.Port (for example, Start
Stop Sequencing DA-T.STARTSTOP-STATE).
Note: A yellow table header indicates a connected module and
orange indicates that the module is not connected.
State Column (Gray Column Lists the states of the State Generator module from highest priority
Headers) to lowest priority.
Output Controller Columns Indicates the name of the Output Controller module state in which
(Turquoise Column Headers) the column is associated.
Table Rows (White with Text White table rows with text indicate the Output Controller state value/
or Gray with Asterisks or Xs) behavior associated with the State Generator state.
Gray table rows with asterisks or Xs indicate that when the State
Generator module is in a particular state, no behavior change
occurs, and the Output Controller module checks for the next State
Generator state listed.
An X also indicates that the field should not be modified unless
certain control specifications are required.
Up and Down Arrows Moves a state generation table up or down in the order. The tables
appear in order of priority where the top most table has the highest
priority.
Note: After reordering the tables, the order that the corresponding
modules appear in the Control View remain the same until
the next time you load the Control View screen (for example,
by switching modes or views).
OK Applies the changes and closes the screen.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Create State Selection Table


See Customizing State Selection Tables.
Table 6-49: Create State Selection Table
Field Description
Port Label Allows you to type a name for the module/table. We recommend
leaving this text box empty so that dynamic naming may be used.
Table Priority Indicates the order in which the table appears in the State Tables
dialog box.
Table Data Type (Port Type) Allows you to select an Enumeration set to use or indicates to use a
Boolean data type.
OK Creates the table and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the change.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

222 CCT Help: Configuration


Create State Selection Column
See Customizing State Selection Tables.
Table 6-50: Create State Selection Column
Field Description
Port Label Allows you to type a name for the module/column. We recommend
leaving this text box empty so that dynamic naming may be used.
Column Index Indicates the order in which the column appears in the table.
Column Data Type (Port Allows you to select an Enumeration set to use or indicates to use a
Type) Boolean data type.
OK Creates the column and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the change.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Setup (Input or Output)


See Changing an Input or Output Signal.
Table 6-51: Setup
Field Description
Current Signal Allows you to select a different signal for the input or output.
OK Applies the change and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the change.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Configuring a System 223


Logic View
See the Logic View screen description in the User Interface section.

Command Hierarchy (Enum Output or Boolean Output)


See Configuring the Command Hierarchy Block.
Table 6-52: Command Hierarchy (Enum Output or Boolean Output)
Field Description
Input Columns (Yellow or Indicates the name of the input (Boolean Input or Enumeration
Orange Column Headers) Output) in which the column is associated.
Note: A yellow table header indicates a connected module and
orange indicates that the module is not connected.
State Column (Turquoise Lists the output states of the commands in its rows.
Column Headers)
Table Rows (White with Text White table rows with text indicate the enumeration state or True/
or Gray with Asterisks) False state that is associated with the input column.
Gray table rows with asterisks indicate that the associated input
column has no effect on the resulting output state.
Up and Down Arrows Moves the row selection up or down, but does not move the row
itself.
OK Applies the changes and closes the screen.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Translation (Enum to Boolean or Boolean to Enum)


See Configuring the Translation Blocks.
Table 6-53: Translation (Enum to Boolean or Boolean to Enum)
Field Description
Input (Orange Column Indicates the name of the input in which the column is associated.
Headers)
State Column (Turquoise Lists the output states of the commands in its rows.
Column Headers)
Table Rows (White with Text White table rows with text indicate the enumeration state or True/
or Gray with Asterisks) False state that is associated with the input column.
Gray table rows with asterisks indicate that the associated input
column has no effect on the resulting output state.
Up and Down Arrows Moves the row selection up or down, but does not move the row
itself.
OK Applies the changes and closes the screen.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

224 CCT Help: Configuration


Port Name Dialog
This dialog box is used to make changes to the labels in the State Tables, the
Command Hierarchy block’s state, and Translation block’s states. See
Customizing State Selection Tables, Configuring the Command Hierarchy Block,
and Configuring the Translation Blocks.
Table 6-54: Port Name Dialog
Field Description
Port Label Allows you to type a name for the input port. We recommend leaving
this text box empty so that dynamic naming may be used.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Enum Set Change Dialog


This dialog box is used to make changes to the enumeration sets in the State Tables
and the Command Hierarchy and Translation blocks. See Customizing State
Selection Tables, Configuring the Command Hierarchy Block, and Configuring the
Translation Blocks.
Table 6-55: Enum Set Change Dialog
Field Description
Enum Set Allows you to select an enumeration set to use.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Line Segment
See Configuring the Line Segment Block.
Table 6-56: Line Segment
Field Description
Input Points Lists the inputs associated with the line segment.
Output Points Lists the outputs associated with the line segment.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Configuring a System 225


MUX
See Configuring the MUX Block.
Table 6-57: MUX
Field Description
Input Allows you to define how many inputs the MUX block contains
(range = 2-12).
Enum Set Allows you to select the enumeration set to use.
Note: This field is used for MUX blocks with Enum Mode only and
is disabled for Boolean Mode. If you change the Enum Set,
the Input X - Mode(s) fields are cleared and need to be
configured.
Input 1 - Mode(s) Defines the modes that are configured for this input. If the mode
value equals one of the input mode configurations, the value on the
input is passed. See Mode Selection.
Input 2 - Mode(s)1 Defines the modes that are configured for this input. If the mode
value equals one of the input mode configurations, the value on the
input is passed. See Mode Selection.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

1. The number of Input X - Mode(s) fields is determined by the number selected in the Input field.

Mode Selection
See Configuring the MUX Block.
Table 6-58: Mode Selection
Field Description
Mode Allows you to select a value to use for the input mode of a MUX
block.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Block Selection (Block Finder)


See Searching for a Block Using the Block Finder.
Table 6-59: Block Selection (Block Finder)
Field Description
Search For Allows you to type the name of a block to find.
Results List Lists the blocks matching the Search For entry.
OK Closes the dialog box and places the selected block in the logic
diagram.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without selecting a block to add to the logic
diagram.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

226 CCT Help: Configuration


Default Element Selection
See Setting the Default Element of a Module.
Table 6-60: Default Element Selection
Field Description
List of Elements Lists the elements you can select as the default element for the
module.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box. The default element
appears with a black background and white text.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Hidden Edge Label


See the Changing the Hidden Edge Label of a Connection section.
Table 6-61: Hidden Edge Label
Field Description
Label Allows you to type a label name to use to indicate the associated
hidden connection line.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Details
See the Details dialog box description in the User Interface section. See Viewing
and Modifying Details.

Port Exposure (For BACnet System)


See Exposing Ports.
Table 6-62: Port Exposure (For BACnet System)
Field Description
Name Column Lists the names of the input/output ports you can expose to BACnet
systems.
Expose Column Allows you to select a check box indicating the inputs/outputs to
expose to BACnet systems.
Exposed Name Lists the input/output names that are exposed to BACnet systems.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Configuring a System 227


Port Exposure (For Connection)
You cannot remove the selection for connected ports as such ports are disabled in
this dialog box. See Exposing Ports for Connection and Exposing Ports.
Table 6-63: Port Exposure (For Connection)
Field Description
Input Port List Lists the input ports you can hide or expose for connections and
allows you to select ports using check boxes.
Output Port List Lists the output ports you can hide or expose for connections and
allows you to select ports using check boxes.
Select All Selects all input/output ports in the Input Port List and Output Port
List.
Deselect All Removes the selection of all input/output ports in the Input Port List
and Output Port List.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Port Selection
See Making a Connection and Changing a Connection.
Table 6-64: Port Selection
Field Description
Port List Lists the input/output ports to which you can connect.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Confirm (Delete)
The Confirm dialog box appears after selecting to delete a module or block. Click
Yes to delete it or No to cancel the deletion. See Deleting a Module, Deleting a
Block, and Deleting a Connection.

Rename (Module/Block)
See Renaming a Module and Renaming a Block.
Table 6-65: Rename (Module/Block)
Field Description
User Name Allows you to type a name for the module/block.
Standard Name Displays a Johnson Controls standard name for the module/block.
OK Applies the name change and closes the dialog box. The name
change appears in the Control View or Logic View.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the change.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

228 CCT Help: Configuration


System Rename Dialog
See Renaming a System.
Table 6-66: System Rename Dialog
Field Description
System Name Allows you to enter a name for the system.
Illegal characters include:
:*?"<>|/[]#@
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.

Job Information
See Entering or Viewing Job Information.
Table 6-67: Job Information
Field Description
Operator Name Allows you to enter or view the name of the operator responsible for
the open Controller Application File (.caf).
Job Name Allows you to enter or view the name of the job associated with the
open Controller Application File (.caf).
Contract Number Allows you to enter or view the contract number associated with the
job and Controller Application File (.caf).
History Allows you to enter or view notes indicating the history of the job and
Controller Application File (.caf).
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.

Configuring a System 229


230 CCT Help: Configuration
Chapter 7: CCT Help: Configuration
Configuring the Local Controller Display
Introduction
CCT configures the information used with the Local Controller Display for a
Network Control Engine (NCE) or Field Equipment Controller (FEC). You can
configure the Display after selecting the hardware in the Hardware Definition
Wizard (Defining Hardware).
For information on installing or operating the Local Controller Display, see the
documents listed in the Related Documentation section.

Concepts
Local Controller Display Configuration
You can customize many items particular to the display from the
Tools > Configure Display menu option while in Configuration mode. The
Configure Display menu option allows you to:
• define which points appear on the Display pages (Input/Output View,
Parameter/Setpoint View, and Idle View) and in what order
• define which points are read-only (cannot be commanded using the display)
• edit point user names and descriptions
• set display attributes including contrast and backlight intensity
• select timeout settings
• select authorization including password definition
After configuring the display, you can download the application to the controller
with CCT. The changes then become effective.

Configuring the Local Controller Display 231


Steps
Configuring the Local Controller Display

Selecting Points to Appear on Display Pages


To select points to appear on the Display pages:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Under the Display Page column for each controller view, place a check mark
next to each point that you want displayed. Click All to select or clear all
points.
Note: If you intend to select a point for the Idle page, you must first select it
for the Display page.
Note: Inputs and outputs used to interface the Occupancy Status to a Network
Sensor, or the Integrated Actuator settings for Minimum Position and
Stroke Time on VMA controllers cannot be selected for use in the
Local Controller Display. In Figure 7-25, for example, you can select
all Inputs, but can select only three of the outputs. The
PARAM-DPR-MINP and PARAM-DPR-ST outputs are not available
to display on the Local Controller Display. Clicking the All check box
in the Display Page column selects all items available for display while
leaving the unavailable items cleared.

232 CCT Help: Configuration


Figure 7-25: Display Selection Example

4. Click OK. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This change
becomes effective after you download the application to the controller. See
Downloading the Application to the Display Device.

Configuring the Local Controller Display 233


Selecting Points to Appear on Idle Page
To select points to appear on the Idle page:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Under the Idle Page column for each controller view, place a check mark next
to each point that you want displayed under the Idle Page column. Click All to
select or clear all points.
Note: You cannot select a point for the Idle page unless it is already selected
under the Display Page column. Also, clearing a point from the Display
Page column clears it under the Idle Page and Read Only columns.
4. Click OK. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This change
becomes effective after you download the application to the controller. See
Downloading the Application to the Display Device.

Specifying User Names and Descriptions


When you modify user names for the Display, the changes also apply to and
appear in CCT.
To specify user names and descriptions:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Under the User Name column for the point name you want to specify, click
inside the cell and type a new name.
Note: Click outside of the cell for the change to take effect.
4. Under the Description column for the desired point description, click inside the
cell and type a new description. The description is limited to a maximum of
40 characters.
Note: Click outside of the cell for the change to take effect.
Note: The primary use of the Description is for the Display. The Description
field is generally not used in CCT.
5. Click OK. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This change
becomes effective after you download the application to the controller. See
Downloading the Application to the Display Device.
Note: The changes you made to the User Name appear in the Control View of
CCT after you click OK. The changes appear at the Local Controller
Display after the download.

234 CCT Help: Configuration


Selecting Points for Read-Only Display
To select points for read-only display:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Under the Read Only column for each controller view, place a check mark next
to each point that you want to configure as read-only. Points marked as
read-only cannot be commanded with the controller. Click All to select or clear
all points.
Note: You cannot select a point under the Read Only column unless it is
already selected under the Display Page column. Also, clearing a point
from the Display Page column clears it under the Idle Page and Read
Only columns.
4. Click OK. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This change
becomes effective after you download the application to the controller. See
Downloading the Application to the Display Device.

Defining Display Page Display Order


To define Display page display order:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. To move a point up in the list, select the point and click Move Up. The point
moves up one row. Repeat this step until the point is at the desired location.
4. To move a point down in the list, select the point and click Move Down. The
point moves down one row. Repeat this step until the point is at the desired
location.
Note: To move a group of items together (group select), drag the mouse
across the items you want to move, and then click Move Up or Move
Down.
5. When satisfied with the display order, click OK. The Local Controller Display
configuration is saved. This change becomes effective after you download the
application to the controller. See Downloading the Application to the Display
Device.

Configuring the Local Controller Display 235


Defining Idle Page Display Order
To define Idle page display order:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Click Define Idle Order. The Define Idle Order dialog box appears with the
current list of points.
4. To move a point up in the list, select the point and click Move Up. The point
moves up one row. Repeat this step until the point is at the desired location.
5. To move a point down in the list, select the point and click Move Down. The
point moves down one row. Repeat this step until the point is at the desired
location.
Note: To move a group of items together (group select), drag the mouse
across the items you want to move, and then click Move Up or Move
Down.
6. When satisfied with the display order, click OK. The Local Controller Display
Configuration screen returns.
7. Click OK again. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This
change becomes effective after you download the application to the controller.
See Downloading the Application to the Display Device.

Specifying Local Controller Display Settings


To specify Local Controller Display settings:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Select the Setup tab. The setup options appear.
4. Under Display Settings, select a Contrast level.
5. Under Display Settings, select a Backlight Intensity.
6. Click OK. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This change
becomes effective after you download the application to the controller. See
Downloading the Application to the Display Device.

236 CCT Help: Configuration


Specifying Display Timeout Settings
To specify display timeout settings:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Select the Setup tab. The setup options appear.
4. Under Timeout Settings, select an Idle Page Timeout value.
5. Under Timeout Settings, select a Backlight Timeout.
6. Click OK. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This change
becomes effective after you download the application to the controller. See
Downloading the Application to the Display Device.

Defining Display Authorization


To define display authorization:
1. Start CCT and open the controller application.
2. Select Tools > Configure Display. The Configure Display dialog box appears.
3. Select the Setup tab. The setup options appear.
4. If you want to disable password access to the display, select Disabled under
Authorization. The Password fields are disabled.
Or, select Local to enable password access. The Password fields become
enabled.
5. If you selected Local, enter a password in the Password field, and then enter it
again in the Re-enter Password field.
Note: Valid characters are uppercase letters A through Z and numbers 0 to 9.
The password can range from 1 to 32 characters in length.
6. Click OK. The Local Controller Display configuration is saved. This change
becomes effective after you download the application to the controller. See
Downloading the Application to the Display Device.

Downloading

Downloading the Application to the Display Device


After making the desired changes in the Configure Display dialog box, you need to
download the application to the device (NCE or FEC) with the Display for the
changes to become effective. Use the Load Device Wizard to perform the
download. See the Loading Devices section for details.

Downloading the Main Code of the Display Device


When updated Local Controller Display code becomes available, you can use the
Load Device Wizard to perform a main code download. See the Loading Devices
section for details.

Configuring the Local Controller Display 237


Screens
Configure Display
The Configure Display screen is split into two tabs: Display (Table 7-68) and
Setup (Table 7-69). The Display tab allows you to configure which of the defined
Inputs, Outputs, and Parameters you wish to show in the Local Controller Display.
The Setup tab allows you to configure the display, timeout, and authorization
settings.
See Configuring the Local Controller Display.
Table 7-68: Configure Display Dialog Box - Display Tab (Part 1 of 2)
Field Description
Input/Output View Provides a scrollable list of inputs (sensors) and outputs (control points) defined by the
application.
Parameter/ Provides a scrollable list of BACnet exposed elements for all modules within the application. This
Setpoint View list is identical to what is shown in the Parameters table of the Control View screen. It also
includes any network inputs or outputs defined by the system. The default order is: network
inputs, parameters, network outputs. You can re-order this list using the Move Up and Move Down
buttons. If you select to show one or more items, the selected items appear at the top of the list
the next time you open the dialog box.
Tables (Columns) Provides Input/Output and Parameter/Setpoint data in table format. The Input/Output View and
Parameter/Setpoint View tables contain five columns of data:
• User Name – Use this column to edit the default names given by the application. If you use a
blank or empty user name, that object is not available on the display. The specified user name
appears in the ADS user interface of your browser when the field controller is added as a
monitored device under a supervisory controller. The changes you made to the User Name
appear in the Control View of CCT after you click OK. The changes appear at the Local
Controller Display after the download.
• Display Page – Use this column to select which items to show in the Local Controller Display.
The Display Page box must be selected for an item in order to enable the Idle Page and Read
Only selections for the item. Some Inputs and Outputs cannot be selected for display as they
cannot be viewed on the Local Controller Display.
• Idle Page – Use this column to select which items to show while the Local Controller Display
is in idle mode. The Local Controller Display is in idle mode when no one is logged onto the
Display. The Idle Mode page cycles through the selected items in the order they are arranged.
You can define this order by clicking the Define Idle Order button. The Idle Page option is
disabled for any item that is not selected in the Display Page column.
• Read Only – Use this column to select which items should be marked as read-only on the
display. The values of items selected for read-only can be viewed but not commanded. The
Read Only option is disabled for any item that is not selected in the Display Page column.
• Description – Use this column to enter or modify the description for an item. The description
is limited to 40 characters in length. The description appears in the ADS user interface of your
browser when the field controller is added as a monitored device under a supervisory
controller.

238 CCT Help: Configuration


Table 7-68: Configure Display Dialog Box - Display Tab (Part 2 of 2)
Field Description
Tables (Details) Three dots are appended to the names of items that are not fully shown in the window. Resize the
column to view the item in its entirety. The tool then retains the new size of the column for the next
time the Display tab window is opened. Also, the cells in the columns provide a tool tip that
displays the full name of the item, which shows long item names without resizing the column.
Note: A tooltip appears when you place your cursor over an item in the User Name column of the
Parameter/Setpoint View table only, displaying the user name followed by the standard
name (User Name: Standard Name). Also, when you place your cursor over an item in the
Description column of the Parameter/Setpoint View table only, a tooltip appears showing
the description and standard name (Description: Standard Name).
Each column header contains the All check box. Checking this box selects all the items in the
column for that category. Checking the box again clears the All box and removes the check boxes
from all the items in the column.
To reposition the order of items as they appear within a category, use the Move Up and Move
Down buttons. Select the item you want to reposition, then click Move Up to move it one position
above or click Move Down to move it one position below. To move a group of items together
(group select), hold down and slide the mouse across the items you want to move, then click
Move Up or Move Down. These buttons are disabled if no items are selected.
Idle View Provides a scrollable list of points that appear on the Idle page of the controller.
You can define the sort order of items defined on the Idle page. Clicking Define Idle Order on the
Display tab displays the current sort order in the Define Idle Order dialog box.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Table 7-69: Configure Display Dialog Box - Setup Tab


Field Description
Display Settings Defines the contrast percentage and backlight intensity value for the display using drop-down
menus:
• Contrast – 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, or 90%
• Backlight Intensity – Off, Dim, Medium, or Bright
Timeout Settings Sets the idle page timeout and backlight timeout values used by the display using drop-down
menus:
• Idle Page Timeout – 1 minute, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, or 1 hour
• Backlight Timeout – 1 minute, 5 minutes, 1 hour, or 8 hours
Authorization Enables or disables password access to the display. The choices are Disabled or Local.
If you select Disabled, the password fields in this window are disabled and a password is not
required to use the Local Controller Display.
If you select Local, the password fields are enabled and the specified password is required to
access the Local Controller Display. Asterisk characters (*) are shown to hide a password as it is
entered. Acceptable characters are uppercase letters A to Z and numbers 0 to 9. Lowercase
letters convert to uppercase characters when typed. The maximum password length is
40 characters.
Note: The Site option is intended to allow password authorization to come from the Site Director
and is not available at this release.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Configuring the Local Controller Display 239


Define Idle Order
Table 7-70: Define Idle Order Dialog Box
Field Description
Idle View Displays the current sort order of the items on the Idle page.
Note: A tooltip appears when you place your cursor over an item in the list, displaying the user
name followed by the standard name (User Name: Standard Name).
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the list of items. The group select option for
moving items is also available in this window.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

240 CCT Help: Configuration


Chapter 8: CCT Help: Configuration
Simulating a System
Introduction
Simulation mode allows you to test your logic. When you enter Simulation mode,
the Simulation dialog box appears allowing you to set startup values for the
simulation session. Simulation mode allows you to see your system as though it
were in Commissioning mode.

Concepts
Simulation Overview
When you simulate your system, you are in the Test Mode. You can set the
simulation speed (1-5) and the default values for network inputs and outputs.
Simulation speed allows processes like time delays on Binary Outputs (BO) or
Stroke Times on Actuators to run 5 times as fast. For example, a 60 second delay
timer runs in 12 seconds if the simulation time is set to 5.
Use the start up values to modify the defaulted starting points for all the Network
Inputs and Inputs. The start up values display the values that the Network Inputs
and Inputs use in the system because they are not connected to physical hardware.
Once simulation is running, you can command the values to see how the system
behaves.

Simulating a System 241


Steps
Starting Simulation
To start the simulation mode:
1. Click Simulate. The Simulation dialog box appears.
Note: You can also use the Modes > Simulate menu option.
2. Select the simulation parameters/attributes.
3. Click OK.
Note: When simulating a VAV box, verify SA-VP is set to zero. Once
Autocalibration is complete, the SA-VP can be increased to simulate
airflow.

Stopping Simulation
To stop the simulation mode:
1. Click Stop Simulation. The Simulation Exit - Confirmation Dialog Box
appears.
2. Click Yes to confirm that you want to stop simulation.
3. If you made changes during Simulation session, a second Confirm dialog box
appears.
4. Click Yes if you want to apply the changes you made during the simulation
session or No to discard the changes.

Control View Steps

Commanding Items
To command items:
1. In the Control view, right-click on an item that can be viewed and/or modified.
The right-click menu appears.
2. Select Commands. The parameter/attribute’s specific command dialog box
appears.
3. Make your selections.
4. Click Send or OK depending on which button appears. If you clicked Send, the
command is issued and the dialog box closes and you are finished. If you
clicked OK, a second dialog box appears. Continue to Step 5.
5. Make your selections.
6. Click Send.

242 CCT Help: Configuration


Viewing and Modifying Parameters
You can view and modify parameters/attributes in the Configuration mode,
Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See Viewing and Modifying
Parameters in the Configuring a System section for more information.

Viewing and Modifying Details


You can view and modify Details in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode,
and Commissioning mode. See Viewing and Modifying Details in the Configuring
a System section for more information.

Viewing Connections
You can view connections in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and
Commissioning mode. See Viewing Connections in the Configuring a System
section for more information.

Showing and Hiding Involvement


You can show and hide involvement in the Simulation mode and Commissioning
mode. See Showing and Hiding Involvement in the Commissioning a System
section for more information.

Navigating Between the Control View and a Module’s Logic View


You can navigate between the control view and a module’s logic view in the
Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See Navigating
Between the Control View and a Module’s Logic View in the Configuring a System
section for more information.

Simulating a System 243


Logic View Steps

Viewing Logic
To view logic, on the Action menu, select View Logic.
Note: You can also right-click on a module containing logic that can be
viewed and/or modified. The right-click menu appears. Select View
Logic. The Logic View appears and displays the logic diagram for that
module.

Viewing and Modifying Details


You can view and modify details in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode,
and Commissioning mode. See Viewing and Modifying Details in the Configuring
a System section for more information.

Panning
You pan in the logic view in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and
Commissioning mode. See Panning in the Configuring a System section for more
information.

Zooming
You can zoom in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning
mode. See Zooming in the Configuring a System section for more information.

Printing
You can print in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning
mode. See Printing the Logic Diagram in the Configuring a System section for
more information.

244 CCT Help: Configuration


Screens
This section describes screens specific to the Simulation mode. For information on
screens that appear in both the Simulation mode and the Configuring mode, see
Configuring a System section for more information.

Simulation Screen
See the Starting Simulation section.
Table 8-71: Simulation Parameters
Field Description
Simulation Speed Allows you to indicate the speed of the simulation. The
speed range is 1-5.
Item Displays the name of the item.
Startup Value Displays the item’s starting value.
Units Displays the item’s units.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Command Dialog Box


See the Commanding Items section.
Table 8-72: Command Dialog Box
Field Description
Commands and Attributes Allows you to select the command to send via a radio
button and any further command parameters via
drop-down menus, text boxes, or other fields.
OK Opens a second screen with more command choices
based on your selections.
Send Sends the command.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.

Simulation Exit - Confirmation Dialog Box


See the Stopping Simulation section.
The Simulation Exit - Confirmation dialog box appears when attempting to exit the
Simulation mode. A second Confirm dialog box appears prompting you to save
your changes, if any were made.

Simulating a System 245


246 CCT Help: Configuration
Chapter 9: CCT Help: Hardware Definition
Defining Hardware
Introduction
The Hardware Definition Wizard allows you to select devices and define hardware
point assignments. You need to have a Controller Application File (.caf) open in
CCT to use the Hardware Definition Wizard. After you save your file, you can
make modifications.

Concepts
Hardware Definition Wizard
The Hardware Definition Wizard consists of three main sections: controller
selection, point assignment, and network settings. A summary of the three main
selections appears after you complete the main sections. When you define your
hardware assignments, you are assigning items to the device.

Hardware Considerations
When you define your hardware, keep the following points in mind about Network
Sensors (Network Duct Sensors or Network Zone Sensors), Network VSDs, and
VMA Hardware for Integrated Flow and Integrated Actuators.
In addition to these considerations, note that the Network Sensors, Network VSDs,
and Local Controller Displays are SAB devices.
Network Sensors (Network Duct Sensors or Network Zone Sensors)
During the System Selection process, the Temperature Sensor functions can be
defaulted to use Network Sensors based on naming and signal preference settings.
The points do not count towards the Hardware Slot Summary calculation. The
Network Sensor shows up as an SA Bus device in Step 3 of the Hardware
Definition Wizard (where you can set the address).
Network VSDs
During the System Selection process, the key points for variable speed fans or
pumps can be defaulted to use Network VSDs based on naming and signal
preference settings. The points do not count towards the Hardware Slot Summary
calculation. The Network VSD shows up as an SA Bus device in Step 3 of the
Hardware Definition Wizard (where you can set the address). For more
information, see the VSD document referenced in the Related Documents table.

Defining Hardware 247


VMA Hardware for Integrated Flow and Integrated Actuators
The FEC VMA hardware sets integrate Velocity Pressure and the Supply Damper
Actuator. The points show up in the System Requires column of the Hardware Slot
Summary table (located on the Controller Selection screen). During the Point
Assignment setup, these points are automatically assigned to the correct slots in
the VMA.

Steps
Defining Hardware
This section includes selecting a device, assigning points, and defining network
settings device.

Selecting a Device
To select a device:
1. Click Define Hardware. The Hardware Definition Wizard opens with the
Controller Selection screen active.
Note: You can also use the Operations menu > Define Hardware to open the
Hardware Definition Wizard.
2. Click Select next to the Field Device row. The Controller Device Selection
Dialog Box appears.
3. Select the desired field device (for example, a VMA1610 or an FEC1610) and
click OK. The Add Device dialog box appears.
Note: If necessary you can filter devices. To filter devices, select an item to
filter from the drop-down menu of the desired column. Only items of
that type appear on the screen. To narrow the items further, you can
filter other columns.
Note: To perform custom filters, select Custom from the drop-down menu,
select the filtering operator, and enter the information to filter.
4. Enter a device name and click OK. The device name appears in the Field
Device text box.
5. Verify the devices you selected meet the requirements of the selected system in
the Hardware Slot Summary. If any of the fields are red, then you need to add
an IOM device (described in Step 6) to support the System Selection.

248 CCT Help: Hardware Definition


6. Click Add Device next to the SA Bus Devices section. The SA Bus Device
Selection Dialog Box appears. Different steps apply to the different devices.
Follow the steps listed here for the specific device type to add.
For an IOM device:
a. Select the IOM device and click OK. The Add IOM Devices screen
appears.
b. If necessary, enter a new device name, quantity, and starting index and
click OK. The Hardware Definition Wizard - Controller Selection screen
appears with the selected device in the SA Bus Devices text box.
For a Local Controller Display:
Note: A Local Controller Display is always defined for the system and cannot
be removed. You cannot have more than one Local Controller Display
in the system.
For a Network Sensor device (Network Duct Sensor or Network Zone
Sensor):
a. Select the Network Sensor device and click OK. The Add NetSensor
Devices or Add NetSensorDuct Devices dialog box appears.
b. Select the check boxes next to the applications you want and click OK. The
Hardware Definition Wizard - Controller Selection screen appears with the
selected device in the SA Bus Devices text box.
For a Network VSD device:
a. Select the Network VSD device and click OK. The Add NetVSD Devices
dialog box appears.
b. Select the check boxes next to the applications you want and click OK. The
Hardware Definition Wizard - Controller Selection screen appears with the
selected device in the SA Bus Devices text box.
For a Romutec IOM device:
a. Select the Romutec IOM device and click OK. The Add RT_IOM Devices
dialog box appears.
b. If necessary, enter a new device name, quantity, and starting index and
click OK. The Hardware Definition Wizard - Controller Selection screen
appears with the selected device in the SA Bus Devices text box.
7. If necessary, add points to the SAB Bus Device. See Adding Points to an SAB
Bus Device.
Note: To delete an SAB Bus Device, see Deleting an SAB Bus Device.
8. Click Next. The Point Assignment screen for the device appears. See Assigning
Points.

Defining Hardware 249


Adding Points to an SAB Bus Device
You can only add points to an SAB Bus device if the device is a Network Sensor
(Network Duct Sensor or Network Zone Sensor) or a Network VSD.
To add points to an SAB bus device:
1. In the SAB Bus Devices section of the Controller Selection Screen, select the
device you want to add points to.
2. Click Add Points. The Add Points dialog box appears.
3. Select the check boxes next to the points you want and click OK. CCT adds the
points to the device.

Deleting an SAB Bus Device


To delete an SAB bus device:
1. In the SA Bus Devices section, select the device you want to delete.
2. Click Delete. A confirmation screen appears.
3. Click Yes.

Assigning Points
CCT automatically assigns the points based on the selections made. Points that it
could not assign appear in the Unassigned Points list. You need to assign the points
in the Unassigned Points list. You cannot proceed until all points are assigned.
To assign points:
1. Assign your points. Use the right arrow to assign a point to an object. Use the
left arrow to unassign a point from an object. Use drag-and-drop functionality
to move a point up and down the Assigned Points list.
Note: An alert message appears if you attempt to move a point to an invalid
location and the point remains in its original location.
Note: The slider bar between the Unassigned Points and Assigned Points lists
has left and right arrows allowing you to achieve the desired view.
Click the arrows to show/hide the lists. If you click the slider bar and
drag it to the desired location, clicking the left/right arrows returns the
view to the location you moved the slider bar. Clicking the left/right
arrows a second time shows/hides the entire list.
2. Click Next. The Network Settings screen appears. See Defining Network
Settings.

250 CCT Help: Hardware Definition


Defining Network Settings
To define network settings:
1. Review and modify the settings, if needed.
Note: The Local Display (Local Controller Display) Address is always set to
3 and cannot be modified.
Note: The NCE Address is always set to 4 and cannot be modified.
Note: The Network Settings table does not allow you to enter duplicate
device addresses. An alert message appears if you type an address
assigned to another device.
Note: Click the Advanced button to select the BACnet Localization and Baud
Rate parameters. See Advanced Dialog Box for details.
2. Click Finish.

Defining Hardware 251


Screens
The Hardware Definition Wizard contains the following screens: Controller
Selection Screen, Point Assignment Screen, and Network Settings Screen.

Controller Selection Screen


See the Defining Hardware section
Table 9-73: Hardware Definition Wizard - Controller Selection Screen
Field Description
Field Device Displays the name of the device. The name in this field
appears on the Point Assignment Screen when you auto
discover your device.
Select Opens the Controller Device Selection Dialog Box to
select the device.
SA Bus Devices Lists all the SA Bus Devices assigned to the Field
Device.
Add Device Opens the SA Bus Device Selection Dialog Box to select
your SA Bus device.
Delete Deletes the selected device from the SA Devices field.
Add Points Opens the Add Points dialog box to add points to your
SA Bus device.
Note: You can only add points to an SAB Bus device if
the device is a Network Sensor (Network Duct
Sensor or Network Zone Sensor) or a Network
VSD.
Hardware Slot Summary Displays the requirements of the system you select. The
Hardware Slot Summary displays the hardware
requirements of the system in the Controller Application
File (.caf), the hardware capacity of the selected devices
(Selected Hardware), unused space, and available
space (Unused/Available Space).
When the Controller Application File exceeds the
capacity of the selected hardware, the field turns red to
indicate an additional hardware device is needed to
support System Selections.
• Category: Displays the System Requirements,
Selected Hardware, and Unused and Available
points.
The Hardware Slot Summary included the following
types:
• UI: Universal Inputs
• AI: Analog Inputs
• BI: Binary Inputs
• UO/CO: Universal Outputs/Configurable Outputs
• AO: Analog Outputs
• BO: Binary Outputs
• RO: Relay Outputs1
Previous Returns to the previous screen.
Next Skips to the next screen.
Finish Completes your selections.
Cancel Closes the wizard without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

1. You can use Relay Outputs to drive incremental/floating 3-wire actuators; however, we
recommend using triac outputs instead of Relay Outputs for the following control loop
types: VAV Flow Control, Airflow, Airflow%, Airflow Diff, Bldg Static, and Duct Static.

252 CCT Help: Hardware Definition


Point Assignment Screen
See the Defining Hardware section.
Table 9-74: Hardware Definition Wizard - Point Assignment Screen
Field Description
Unassigned Points Displays all the unassigned points. The object names
appear alphabetically.
• Name: Displays the point name.
• Description: Displays the expanded ID for the point.
• Signal: Displays the signal information.
• Data Type: Displays the data type.
• Type: Displays the type information.
Assigned Points Displays all the assigned points.The object names
appear alphabetically, including the Object Name,
Expanded ID, Signal, Data Type, and Type.
• Controller: Displays the controller information.
• Name: Displays the point name.
• Description: Displays the expanded ID for the point.
• Signals: Displays the signal information.
Note: Select a point and use drag-and-drop
functionality to move a point up or down on the
list. An alert message appears if you attempt to
move the point to an invalid location and the point
remains in its original location.
Moves the selected point from the Unassigned Points
pane to the Assigned Points pane.

Moves the selected point from the Assigned Points pane


to the Unassigned Points pane.

Previous Returns you to the previous screen.


Next Skips to the next screen.
Finish Applies the changes and closes the wizard.
Cancel Closes the wizard without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Defining Hardware 253


Network Settings Screen
See the Defining Hardware section
Table 9-75: Hardware Definition Wizard - Network Settings Screen
Field Description
Field Device & Bus Settings Displays the information for the selected field device.
• Model: Displays the device model.
• Name: Displays the name you entered in the New
Device dialog box.
• Device Address: Displays the address of the device.
• Instance Number (BACnet ID): Displays the BACnet
ID number. This value is the same value used in the
Peer Reference attribute in the Details View.
• Advanced Button: Opens the Advanced dialog box to
edit the BACnet Localization and Baud Rate
parameters. See Advanced Dialog Box for details.
SA Bus Device Settings Displays the information for the SA Bus Devices.
• Name: Displays the device name.
• Address: Displays the device address.
• Type: Displays the hardware component connected
to the SA Bus. IOM, Network Sensors (Network Duct
Sensors or Network Zone Sensors), and Network
VSDs are the available types.
Previous Returns you to the previous screen.
Next Skips to the next screen. This button is inactive because
this is the last screen in the wizard.
Finish Applies the changes and closes the wizard.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Controller Device Selection Dialog Box


See the Defining Hardware section.
Table 9-76: Controller Device Selection Dialog Box
Field Description
Selections Includes information for the following:
• Name: Displays the names of the available
selections.
• Description: Displays the description of the available
selections.
• Bus Type: Displays the bus type.
• Device Type: Displays the device type.
• Universal Inputs: Displays the number of universal
inputs.
• Binary Inputs: Displays the number of binary inputs.
• Universal Outputs: Displays the number of universal
outputs.
• Analog Outputs: Displays the number of analog
outputs.
• Binary Outputs: Displays the number of binary
outputs.
• Relay Outputs: Displays the number of relay outputs.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

254 CCT Help: Hardware Definition


SA Bus Device Selection Dialog Box
See the Defining Hardware section
Table 9-77: SA Bus Device Selection Dialog Box
Field Description
Selections Includes information for the following:
• Name: Displays the names of the available
selections.
• Description: Displays the description of the available
selections.
• Bus Type: Displays the bus type.
• Device Type: Displays the device type.
• Universal Inputs: Displays the number of universal
inputs.
• Analog Inputs: Displays the number of analog inputs.
• Binary Inputs: Displays the number of binary inputs.
• Universal Outputs: Displays the number of universal
outputs.
• Analog Outputs: Displays the number of analog
outputs.
• Binary Outputs: Displays the number of binary
outputs.
• Relay Outputs: Displays the number of relay outputs.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Add IOM Devices Dialog Box


See the Defining Hardware section.
The Add IOM Devices dialog box appears after you select an IOM device to add in
the Controller Selection Screen. Use this dialog box to name your device.
Table 9-78: Add IOM Devices Dialog Box
Field Description
Device Name Displays the device name.
Quantity Allows you to enter the number of IOMs you are adding
to your system.
Starting Index Allows you to enter the starting index for the IOMs you
are adding to your system.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Add LocalDisplay Devices Dialog Box


A Local Controller Display is always defined for the system and cannot be
removed. You cannot have more than one Local Controller Display in the system.

Defining Hardware 255


Add NetSensor/NetSensorDuct Devices Dialog Box
See the Defining Hardware section.
The Add NetSensor/NetSensorDuct Devices dialog box appears after you select a
Network Sensor (NetDuctSensor or NetZoneSensor) device to add in the
Controller Selection Screen. Use this dialog box to add applications to the device.
Table 9-79: Add NetSensor/NetSensorDuct Devices Dialog Box
Field Description
Add Allows you to add applications to the device.
Application Displays the available applications for the device.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Add NetVSD Devices Dialog Box


See the Defining Hardware section.
The Add NetVSD Devices dialog box appears after you select a Network VSD
(NetVSD) device to add in the Controller Selection Screen. Use this dialog box to
add applications to the device.
Table 9-80: Add NetVSD Devices Dialog Box
Field Description
Add Allows you to add applications to the device.
Application Displays the available applications for the device.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Add RT_IOM Devices Dialog Box


See the Defining Hardware section.
The Add RT_IOM Devices dialog box appears after you select a Romutec IOM
device to add in the Controller Selection Screen. Use this dialog box to name your
device.
Table 9-81: Add RT_IOM Devices Dialog Box
Field Description
Device Name Displays the device name.
Quantity Allows you to enter the number of IOMs you are adding
to your system.
Starting Index Allows you to enter the starting index for the IOMs you
are adding to your system.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

256 CCT Help: Hardware Definition


Add Points Dialog Box
See the Adding Points to an SAB Bus Device section.
Table 9-82: Add Points Dialog Box
Field Description
Add Allows you to select whether or not to add the point to
the device.
Type Displays the point type.
Function Displays the point function.
Data Type Displays the point data type.
OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the screen without applying the changes.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Advanced Dialog Box


See the Defining Network Settings section.
Table 9-83: Advanced Dialog Box
Field Description
BACnet Localization Allows you to select whether the file type is Unicode or
ASCII. By default, BACnet Localization is set to Unicode.
Unicode is the required setting when FECs are
integrated into a Metasys NAE network. The ASCII
option is required if the FEC is integrated into a BACnet
system that is not NAE based and does not support
Unicode characters.
Baud Rate Allows you to select the Baud Rate of Auto, 1200, 9600,
19200, 38400, or 76800. This field is set to Auto by
default.
Close Closes the screen and applies the changes.

Defining Hardware 257


258 CCT Help: Hardware Definition
Chapter 10: CCT Help: Load Process
Loading Devices
Introduction
The Load Wizard allows you to perform upload and downloads to a device. You
must be in the Configuration mode to use the Load Wizard.

Concepts
Load Wizard
The Load Wizard allows you to perform uploads and downloads to a device. The
Load Wizards determines the network connection method by the Connections-
either Ethernet NAE Passthru or Bluetooth Wireless.

Upload
You can upload devices using the Load Wizard. You are able to discover available
devices. The Discover option is only available when you upload devices.

Download
You can download devices using the Load Wizard. You can only download fully
mapped (hardware assigned) systems.

Connections

Ethernet NAE Passthru


The Ethernet NAE Passthru connection mode consists of three steps: Load Type,
Device Selection, and Summary. You can select which NAE to connect through to
perform the load operation.

Bluetooth Wireless
The Bluetooth Wireless connection mode consists of three steps: Load Type,
Device Selection, and Summary.

Loading Devices 259


Codes

Boot Code
The boot code is the start up code for the device. The boot code acts like a mini-
operating system in the device and supports the communications necessary to
download the Main Code. The boot code is a minimal size version of the main
code.

Main Code
The main code acts like an on-board library and gives the device information on
the modules. You need to update the main code whenever there is a change to a
module (used in the Application Code). Together the boot code and main code
make up the firmware.

Application Code
The application code tells the device the actual code/sequence and priorities of the
control strategy created in CCT. For example, definitions of the Inputs, Outputs,
Control Logic, and Network variables.

Code Download Order


When upgrading devices from one release to the next, you must download Boot
code before Main code and Application code to successfully upgrade the firmware
and application. If you do not download Boot code first, the MS/TP device may
become inoperable.
Required download order:
1. Boot code
2. Main code
3. Application code

260 CCT Help: Load Process


Steps
Uploading a Device
To upload a device:
1. Click Load. The Load Device Wizard appears with the Connection Screen
active.
2. Select Upload From Device and choose connection type, connection
parameters, and discovery type.
Note: For the Bluetooth Wireless connection, we recommend you keep the
Baud Rate default (38400).
3. Click Next.
Note: If you selected the Manual discovery type, CCT skips the Device
Selection Screen and the Load Summary Screen appears. Go to Step 6.
If you selected the Auto discovery type, go to Step 4.
4. When the Device Selection Screen appears, click Discover if the wizard does
not automatically begin the discovery process.
Note: Once the desired device appears in the list, click Stop.
5. Select a device from the list and click Next. The Load Summary Screen
appears.
6. Click Finish. The upload status appears.
Note: When the upload completes, the Finish button changes to Done. This
does not happen if you selected the Close wizard after successful load
check box on the Load Summary screen. Instead, the wizard closes and
you can skip Step 7.
7. Click Done.
Note: If the selected Controller Application File requires an upgrade, the
System Upgrade dialog box appears. For details on upgrading the file,
see the Upgrading System Files section.

Loading Devices 261


Downloading a Device
If you are downloading devices over the SA Bus, first download the individual
device to which you are connected. Then, download the remaining devices.
See Code Download Order if you are upgrading a device from one release to the
next.
To download a device:
1. Click Load. The Load Device Wizard appears with the Connection Screen
active.
2. Select Download To Device and choose connection type and connection
parameters.
3. Click Next. The Device Selection Screen appears.
4. Select the device to download and click Next. The Load Summary Screen
appears.
Note: The Discover option is not available during downloads because the
application code disables. Therefore, the Object code cannot be
downloaded to these devices. You can only download object codes
from IOMs on the FC Bus.
5. Select the code to download following the rules in the Code Download Order
section. See the Codes section for information on each code type.
6. Click Finish. The selected device code downloads.
Note: See the Status column of the Download Operation table and the Status
bar for information on the load progress and other status indicators.
Note: When the download completes, the Finish button changes to Done.
This does not happen if you selected the Close wizard after successful
load check box on the Load Summary screen. Instead, the wizard
closes and you can skip Step 7.
7. Click Done.

262 CCT Help: Load Process


Screens
Load Device Wizard
Table 10-84: Load Device Wizard
Field Description
Connection Screen
Load Type Allows you to specify which type of load to perform: upload or
download. Download options include boot code, main code,
and object code.
Connection Type Allows you to select the type of connection to use:
• Ethernet
• Bluetooth
Connection Parameters Ethernet NAE Passthru connection: Allows you to specify the
supervisory device and trunk number through which you want
to connect.
Bluetooth Wireless connection: Allows you to specify the
COM port and baud rate to use.
Discovery (Upload Only) Allows you to choose the type of discovery process to use:
• Auto
• Manual (Allows you to select the specific address.)
Device Selection Screen
Discover (Upload Only) Performs a device Discovery to find a device you can upload.
The Discovery option only returns field devices and IOMs that
are on the Field Bus.
Note: You can only discover devices for an upload. After a
Discovery, when you click Discover again, the list clears
from the Device Selection table.
Stop (Upload Only) Stops the Discovery process (upload only).
Device Table Displays the available devices, including:
• Device Name: Displays the name of the device.
• System Name: Displays the name of the system.
• Address: Displays the address of the device.
• Type: Displays the type of device.
• Status: Displays the status of the device.
Load Summary Screen
Device Information Displays the following device information:
• Name: Displays the name of the device.
• Description: Displays a description of the device.
• Model: Displays the model number of the device.
• Maincode Version: Displays the main code version
• Bootcode Version: Displays the boot code version.
• System Name: Displays the system name.
• CPU Usage: Displays the CPU usage.
• Object Memory Usage: Displays the memory used by the
objects in the device.
• Status: Displays the device’s status.
• Device Address: Displays the address of the device.
Load Operation Displays the load type, code type, and load status.
For the Download Operation, check boxes appear next to the
Code type (Boot, Main, and Application) for selection and the
version of the code also appears.
Close wizard after successful Closes the Load Device wizard after successfully completing
load the load operation, when selected.
Previous Moves to the previous screen of the wizard.
Next Moves to the next screen of the wizard.

Loading Devices 263


Table 10-84: Load Device Wizard
Field Description
Finish/Done Finish starts the load.
Done appears in place of Finish after the load completes and is
used to close the wizard.
Cancel Closes the wizard without performing the load.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

264 CCT Help: Load Process


Chapter 11: CCT Help: Commissioning
Commissioning a System
Introduction
CCT commissioning provides you with the ability to commission your device with
or without a Controller Application File (.caf). In the Commissioning mode, you
can make passthru or wireless connections, work with the Test Mode, and balance
VAV boxes.
Note: If you are running the CCT Commissioning software, this section describes
the main tasks available to you. The CCT Commissioning Only Software
topic in the User Interface section describes this software version.

Concepts
System and Device Connections
There are two connection options available: Ethernet NAE Passthru and Bluetooth
Wireless.

Ethernet NAE Passthru Connection


CCT opens in Ethernet mode when you launch it from the Metasys system User
Interface (UI). The Ethernet mode allows you to specify which NAE (and trunk
number) to connect through to perform the commissioning operation. The device
Discovery option is available when you commission using the Application in
Controller.
Note: For the Ethernet NAE Passthru connection to work properly, you must
install SCT on the computer due to software components.

Bluetooth Wireless Connection


CCT opens in the Bluetooth wireless connection mode when you launch it from
the desktop icon. The Bluetooth Wireless Connection allows you to connect
through a BTCVT to a controller and access it through CCT. You must configure
your Bluetooth connectivity settings in the Commissioning Device Wizard menu
to set the COM Port and Baud Rate before you can use your Bluetooth connection.
The device Discovery option is available when you choose to commission using
the Application in Controller.

Commissioning a System 265


Balancer Tab
The Balancer tab appears in the Control View workspace and includes a
parameters table and task buttons to autocalibrate VAV boxes and set flow
constants. This tab appears in Commissioning mode only for VAV applications.
The task buttons are active only when in the Test mode; however, you do not need
to be in Test mode to edit the parameters table.
The parameters that appear on the Balancer tab depend on the setup of your system
and the .caf file. The parameters fall into the following categories:
• Mode - Indicates the current balancing modes (for example, for the
autocalibration and flow setpoint override commands).
• Duct - Indicates the values for flow and other balancing calculations. This
section is organized by duct type (supply, return, and so on). The number of
duct parameter sections appearing in this tab depends on the number of ducts in
the system (single duct or dual duct).
• Flow Setpoints - Indicates the flow setpoint values such as the heating/cooling
min/max flow.
The Balancer tab user interface is described in the Control View Screen topic of the
User Interface section. See the Using the Balancer Tab section for information on
tasks to perform in the Balancer tab.

Test Mode
The Test Mode allows you to command inputs, modules, and outputs to assist in
commissioning your system. During Test Mode, the controller being
commissioned is taken offline from the supervisory system to ensure that only the
commands from the CCT Commissioning session override the inputs and outputs.
You must exit Test Mode before you exit the Commissioning mode. See the
Working with the Test Mode section.

266 CCT Help: Commissioning


Steps
Making Connections

Making an Ethernet Passthru Connection


To make an Ethernet Passthru connection:
1. Open the Metasys system user interface.
2. From the Tools menu, select Field Device Tools > CCT (MSTP).
3. Select the device to make a Passthru connection. The Passthru Wizard screen
appears.
4. Follow the Wizard steps.
Note: If you create an Ethernet Passthru connection and let it run overnight, the
next day the connections do not work unless you shut down CCT and then
restart it. The policy file that is created is only good until midnight of the
day the Ethernet passthru connection was made.

Making a Bluetooth Wireless Connection


To make a Bluetooth wireless connection:
1. Open the CCT user interface.
2. Click Commission. The Commission Device Wizard appears.
3. Make your application and connection parameter selections and click Next.
4. Select the device and click Next. The Commission Device Summary dialog
box appears.
Note: Only defined devices appear in the selection list.

Commissioning a Device
To commission a device:
1. Click Commission. The Commission Device Wizard appears.
2. Choose the application type and the connection point information.
3. Click Next.
4. From the Device Selection screen, select a device.
Note: If the application type is Application in Controller and no devices
appear on the Device Selection screen, click Discover.
5. Click Next. The Commission Summary appears.
6. Click Finish. The application appears to be commissioned in the Control View.
Note: If the application type is Application in Controller, CCT uploads the
application from the selected device.

Commissioning a System 267


Control View Steps

Viewing Controller Information


You can view controller information for a single controller in Commissioning
mode. This option is not available in the Simulation mode. Use this procedure to
access information from the controller to which you are connected and
commissioning. You must open a Controller Application File (.caf) before viewing
controller information.
To view controller information for the controller, from the Tools menu, select
Controller Information. The Controller Information Wizard appears with the
information from the controller being commissioned. Click the Refresh button to
update the contents of the wizard.
Note: For information on viewing controller information from the Configuration
mode, see the Configuring a System section.

Commanding Items
You can command items in the Commissioning mode and Simulation mode. You
must be in Test mode to issue commands while commissioning. The controller
goes offline and the field point displays ???? as well as the value sent using the
Commands option. The commands you perform in Test mode are temporary. CCT
releases these commands when you leave Test mode in Commissioning mode. The
controller goes online, and the point value returns to its value. See Commanding
Items in the Simulating a System section.

Issuing Metasys Commands


You can issue Metasys Commands on inputs and outputs in the Commissioning
mode. Metasys Commands send commands (for example, adjust or override) as if
you performed them through the Metasys system User Interface. Metasys
commands are not released when you leave Commissioning mode. The value is
retained in the Metasys system at the priority level commanded. You can view and
clear the command from the Metasys system UI or from the Metasys Command
option in CCT.
To issue Metasys commands:
1. In the Control view, right-click on an Input or Output. The right-click menu
appears.
2. Select Metasys Commands. The parameter/attribute’s specific command
dialog box appears.
3. Make your selections.
4. Click Send.

268 CCT Help: Commissioning


Viewing and Modifying Details
You can view and modify information in the Details dialog box in the
Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See Viewing
and Modifying Details in the Configuring a System section.

Viewing and Modifying Parameters


You can view and modify parameters/attributes in the Configuration mode,
Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See Viewing and Modifying
Parameters in the Configuring a System section for more information.

Viewing Connections
You can view connections in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and
Commissioning mode. See Viewing and Modifying Connections in the
Configuring a System section for more information.

Viewing a Module’s Logic


You can view logic in modules in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and
Commissioning mode. See Viewing and Modifying a Module’s Logic in the
Configuring a System section for more information.

Showing and Hiding Involvement


To show and hide involvement:
1. Right-click on an output. The right-click menu appears.
2. Select Show Involvement. The magenta background color change indicates
which modules are affecting the selected output. See Control View Status
Colors and Icons in the User Interface section for more information.
3. To hide the involvement, right-click on the output again and select Hide
Involvement.

Commissioning a System 269


Commissioning Inputs

Modifying Offsets
To modify offsets:
1. Right-click on an input. The right-click menu appears.
2. Select Setup. The Setup Screen for Inputs appears.
3. Enter the desired offset value.
4. Click OK.

OR

1. Right-click on an input. The right-click menu appears.


2. Select View Details. The Details dialog box appears.
3. Click the Hardware View tab and select the Advanced Radio button.
4. Modify the offset attribute/parameter.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click Close.

270 CCT Help: Commissioning


Commissioning Outputs

Modifying the Change of Value Increment


You can modify the Change of Value increment to filter change update notices.
To modify the Change of Value increment:
1. Right-click on an output. The right-click menu appears.
2. Select Setup. The Setup Screen for Outputs appears.
3. Enter the desired COV value.
4. Click OK.

OR

1. Right-click on an output. The right-click menu appears.


2. Select View Details. The Details dialog box appears.
3. Click the Hardware View tab and select the Advanced Radio button.
4. Click Edit.
5. Modify the COV Inc attribute/parameter.
6. Click Apply.
7. Click Close.

Modifying the Polarity of Position Adjust Outputs (PAOs)


To modify the polarity of PAOs:
1. Right-click on an output. The right-click menu appears.
2. Select Setup. The Setup Screen for Outputs appears.
3. Enter the desired PAO value.
4. Click OK.

OR

1. Right-click on an output. The right-click menu appears.


2. Select View Details. The Details dialog box appears.
3. Click the Hardware View tab and select the Advanced Radio button.
4. Modify the polarity attribute/parameter.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click Close.

Commissioning a System 271


Logic View Steps

Viewing and Modifying Details


You can view and modify information in the Details dialog box in the
Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See Viewing
and Modifying Details in the Configuring a System section for more information.

Showing and Hiding Connection Lines

Use the Trace Mode button to show and hide the Connection Lines in the
logic diagram.

Panning
You can pan in the logic view in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and
Commissioning mode. See Panning in the Configuring a System section for more
information.

Zooming
You can zoom in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning
mode. See Zooming in the Configuring a System section for more information.

Printing
You can print the logic diagram in the Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and
Commissioning mode. See Printing the Logic Diagram in the Configuring a
System section for more information.

272 CCT Help: Commissioning


Navigating between Control View and Logic View
You can navigate between the control view and a module’s logic view in the
Configuration mode, Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See Navigating
between Control View and Logic View in the Configuring a System section for
more information.

Working with the Test Mode


The Test Mode allows you to command inputs, modules, and outputs to assist in
commissioning your system. See the Test Mode section.

Starting the Test Mode


To start the Test Mode, on the Action menu, select Start Test Mode. When the Test
Mode is active, the header area appears with blue highlighting and states Test
Mode Active. You now have the ability to issue commands.

Modifying Outputs
You can view and modify output attributes/parameters in the Configuration mode,
Simulation mode, and Commissioning mode. See Viewing and Modifying
Parameters in the Configuring a System section.

Stopping the Test Mode


To stop the test mode, on the Action menu, select Stop Test Mode.
Note: Stop test mode before you exit Commissioning mode. If you exit
Commissioning mode without stopping test mode, the controller stays
offline and the commanded value remains on the point. To resolve this
situation, enter Commissioning mode and start test mode. Then, stop test
mode and exit Commissioning mode.

Commissioning a System 273


Using the Balancer Tab
Note: The task buttons of the Balancer tab are active only when in the Test mode;
however, you do not need to be in Test mode to edit the parameters table.
The following steps describe a typical use of the Balancer tab:
1. Start the Test mode. See the Starting the Test Mode section.
2. Edit the VAV balancing parameters such as Flow Setpoints to the desired
values, if necessary. See the Editing the Balancing Parameters section.
3. Autocalibrate the VAV. See the Autocalibrating the VAV section.
4. Issue a Flow Override command to measure the flow in the space (for example,
drive the VAV box to the maximum cfm). See the Issuing a Flow Override
Command section.
• If the flow measurement is accurate, restore the flow as is. See the
Restoring Flow section.
• If the flow measurement is inaccurate, calculate the K-Factor with the new
measurement. See the Calculating the K-Factors section.
5. Exit the Test mode. See the Stopping the Test Mode section.

Editing the Balancing Parameters


To edit the balancing parameters:
1. Click the Edit button on the Balancer tab.
2. Modify the parameters as desired (for example, change the flow setpoints).
Note: Click Cancel to exit Edit mode without applying changes.
3. Click Apply. The changes are made and the system exits Edit mode.
Return to the Using the Balancer Tab section.

Autocalibrating the VAV


To autocalibrate the VAV:
1. Click the Auto Calibrate button on the Balancer tab. The Auto Calibrate
Command dialog box appears asking if you want to autocalibrate the device.
2. Click Send.
3. Monitor the Auto Calibrate Complete parameter in the Mode section of the
parameter table:
• When False, the autocalibration is in progress and the task buttons are
inactive.
• When True, the autocalibration is complete and the task buttons are active.
Note: Autocalibration takes approximately 60 seconds to complete, which is
the stroke time of the actuator over 90 degrees of travel.
Return to the Using the Balancer Tab section.

274 CCT Help: Commissioning


Issuing a Flow Override Command
To issue a flow override command:
1. Click the Flow Override button on the Balancer tab. The Flow Override
Command dialog box appears.
2. Select a value from the menu. For example, select Supply Duct Max to drive
the VAV to the maximum cfm.
3. Click Send to issue the command.
Return to the Using the Balancer Tab section.

Restoring Flow
To restore the flow:
1. Click the Flow Restore button on the Balancer tab. The Flow Restore
Command dialog box appears asking if you want to send the restore flow
command.
2. Click Send.
Return to the Using the Balancer Tab section.

Calculating the K-Factors


To calculate the K-Factors:
1. Click the Calculate K-Factors button on the Balancer tab. The Calculate K-
Factors dialog box appears.
2. Select the duct from the Duct Selection menu.
3. Enter the proper value in the Measured Flow text box.
4. Click Send. The values on the Balancer tab update according to this new value.
Return to the Using the Balancer Tab section.

Commissioning a System 275


Screens
This section describes screens specific to the Commissioning mode. For
information on screens that appear in both the Configuration mode and the
Commissioning mode, see the Configuring a System section for more information.

Commissioning Device Wizard


Table 11-85 through Table 11-87 describe the screens in the Commissioning
Device Wizard. See the Commissioning a Device section.
Table 11-85: Commission Device Wizard - Main Screen
Field Description
Choose Application Allows you to select either the current Controller Application
File (Current Application) or a Controller Application File in the
device (Application in Controller). When you select Application
In Controller, the wizard uploads the file from the device.
Connection Parameters Displays the default Baud Rate and COM Port information for
Bluetooth Wireless Connections. Keep the default Baud
(38400).
Displays Supervisory Device and Trunk number information for
Ethernet Passthru Connections.

Table 11-86: Commission Device Wizard - Device Selection Screen


Field Description
Device Name Displays the device name after the discovery process finishes.
System Name Displays the system name after the discovery process finishes.
Address Displays the controller’s address after the discovery process
finishes.
Type Displays the type after the discovery process finishes.
Status Displays the status after the discovery process finishes.
Previous Moves to the previous screen of the wizard.
Next Moves to the next screen of the wizard.
Finish Closes the wizard and starts Commissioning mode.
Cancel Closes the wizard without starting Commissioning mode.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

276 CCT Help: Commissioning


Table 11-87: Commission Device Wizard - Commission Summary
Screen
Field Description
Device Information Displays information for the following:
• Name: Displays the name of the controller.
• Description: Displays a description for the controllers.
• Model: Displays the model number.
• Maincode Version: Displays the maincode version for the
controller.
• Bootcode Version: Displays the bootcode version for the
controller.
• System Name: Displays the system name for the controller.
• CPU Usage: Displays the CPU usage for the controller.
• Object Memory Usage: Displays the amount of memory
used by the controller.
• Status: Displays the status of the controller.
• Device Address: Displays the device address for the
controller.
Previous Moves to the previous screen of the wizard.
Next Moves to the next screen of the wizard.
Finish Closes the wizard and starts Commissioning mode.
Cancel Closes the wizard without starting Commissioning mode.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Setup Screen for Inputs


See the Modifying Offsets section.
Table 11-88: Setup Screen (Inputs)
Field Description
Offset Allows you to enter offset for the selected input.

OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.


Cancel Closes the screen without starting Commissioning
mode.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Setup Screen for Outputs


See the Commissioning Outputs section.
Table 11-89: Setup Screen (Outputs)
Field Description
COV Incr Allows you to enter the Change of Value Increment for
the selected output.

Polarity Allows you to enter the polarity for the selected output.

OK Applies the changes and closes the dialog box.


Cancel Closes the screen without starting Commissioning
mode.
Help Opens the CCT Help system.

Commissioning a System 277


Controller Information Wizard
See the Viewing Controller Information section.
For information on viewing controller information from the Configuration mode,
see the Configuring a System section.
Table 11-90: Controller Information Wizard
Field Description
Name Displays the name of the controller.

Description Displays information for the controller.

Model Displays the model number for the controller.

Maincode Version Displays the firmware version for the controller.

Bootcode Version Displays the bootcode version for the controller.

System Name Displays the system name for the controller.

CPU Usage % Displays the CPU usage for the controller.

Object Memory Usage % Displays the memory usage for the controller.

Status Displays the status for the controller.

Device Address Displays the device address for the controller.

Refresh Updates the Controller Information Wizard.

Close Closes the Controller Information Wizard.

Balancer Tab
The Balancer tab user interface is described in the Control View Screen topic of the
User Interface section. See the Using the Balancer Tab section for information on
tasks to perform in the Balancer tab.
The following dialog boxes appear when performing the various tasks in the
Balancer tab:
• Auto Calibrate Command Dialog Box
• Flow Override Command Dialog Box
• Flow Restore Command Dialog Box
• Calculate K-Factors Command Dialog Box

278 CCT Help: Commissioning


Auto Calibrate Command Dialog Box
Table 11-91: Auto Calibrate Command Dialog Box
Field Description
Do you want to send Auto Calibrate Command?
Send Begins autocalibration.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without starting the autocalibration
process.

Flow Override Command Dialog Box


Table 11-92: Flow Override Command Dialog Box
Field Description
Attribute Displays the attribute being commanded. You cannot
edit this field.
Value Provides a list of values to command to the attribute (for
example, Normal or Close All).
Send Issues the Flow Override command.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without issuing the command.

Flow Restore Command Dialog Box


Table 11-93: Flow Restore Command Dialog Box
Field Description
Do you want to send Flow Restore Command?
Send Issues the Flow Restore command.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without issuing the command.

Calculate K-Factors Command Dialog Box


Table 11-94: Calculate K-Factors Command Dialog Box
Field Description
Duct Selection Lists the available ducts to command.
Measured Flow Allows you to enter the value measured during the flow
override.
Send Issues the command and calculates the K-Factor values.
Cancel Closes the dialog box without issuing the command.

Commissioning a System 279


280 CCT Help: Commissioning
Chapter 12: CCT Help: Commissioning
Performing a Box Flow Test
Introduction
Use the Box Flow Test to verify and diagnose the operation of VAV Single Duct
applications that run on the FC Bus. The Box Flow Test module provides the
timing, output control, and data-gathering functions for testing the flow control
performance of a VAV application. The Box Flow Test results are stored in the
VMA.
See Box Flow Test in the State Generators section for information on the Box
Flow Test module.

Concepts
Box Flow Test Overview
You can run the Box Flow Test on a single duct VAV application after you
download the initial application. The air handling unit must be running to
implement the Box Flow Test. After completion of the test, the error summary
report shows which devices and applications were not installed or set up correctly.
The Box Flow Test consists of two tabs: Setup/Progress and Results. You can
Discover the test results from the device. After you initiate the Box Flow Test, you
can disconnect from the network and return later to collect and review the results.

Performing a Box Flow Test 281


Steps
Performing a Box Flow Test
Before you perform a Box Flow Test, you must make a connection. See Making
Connections in the Commissioning a System section.
To perform a Box Flow Test:
1. On the Tools menu of CCT, select Start Box Flow Test. The Box Flow Test
screen appears.
2. Click Discover. In Bluetooth Wireless mode, the Communication
Configuration dialog box appears.
3. Enter the Bluetooth COM port and Baud Rate. The Box Flow Test begins to
Discover devices.
4. After the Discovery is complete, you can individually select the devices or use
the filters to select the devices for which to perform the Box Flow Test.
5. On the Edit menu, select Auto-set Starting Positions.
Note: The Starting Positions of the selected devices alternates between open
and close to prevent all VAV boxes from closing off to the air handling
unit.
6. Make necessary changes to the actuator stroke time, bidirectional test, and/or
display precision.
7. After you make your selections, click Begin Test. The Box Flow Test begins.

Reading Results
To read results after the Box Flow Test completes:
1. Select the devices (if they are not already selected).
2. Click Read Results. The Results tab enables.
Note: If the test is still in progress, it displays in the Setup/Progress tab in the
State column. Wait until the test completes and read the results again.

Saving the Results


To save the results, while reviewing the results in the Results tab, from the File
menu select Save. The results save to a .CSV file.

Canceling a Box Flow Test


To cancel a Box Flow Test, click the Cancel button in the Box Flow Test screen.

282 CCT Help: Commissioning


Screens
Box Flow Test Screen
Table 12-95: Box Flow Test
Field Description
NAE Displays the selected NAE. Displays only when you are connected
via Ethernet.
Trunk Displays the selected trunk. Displays only when you are connected
via Ethernet.
Setup/Progress Tab
Selection Indicates the devices to test.
Device Displays a list of devices containing a Box Flow Test module.
Device Address Displays the field device address.
Note: The DIP switch settings are not dependent on the tool
connection point.
System Displays the loaded device’s System name.
Starting Position Indicates the damper position set by the Box Flow Test at the start
of the test. You can modify the damper starting position.
State Displays the current (or last) state of the test for each device.
Operation Status Displays a summary of the test for each device.
Discover Launches the Field Trunk Selection dialog (if Ethernet) or
Auto-Discovers the connected field devices (if FCB or SAB).
Begin Test Starts the Box Flow Test.
Read Results Displays the Box Flow Test results for: State, Operation Status, and
Airflow readings on the Results tab.
Cancel Cancels the current process. For example, if you click Cancel during
Discovery, the Discovery process cancels. If you click Cancel after
you click Begin Test, the test terminates.
Results
Device Displays a list of devices containing a Box Flow Test module.
Device Address Displays the field device address.
System Displays the loaded device’s System name.
Max CFM Displays the maximum rated cubic feet per minute flow rate of the
VAV box. This can be used to compare to the flow values read for
100%.
Percent Columns Displays the airflow when the damper is open to that percentage.
(0% - 100%)
Actuator Stroke Time Displays the amount of time, in seconds, it takes the actuator to
move from the fully closed to fully opened position.
Bidirectional Test Indicates if the Box Flow Text is bidirectional or single. When the
Bidirectional Test is False, the test causes the damper to stroke only
in one direction from the starting point. When the Bidirectional Test
is True, the test causes the damper to make the return part of the
test.
Display Precision Displays the number of decimal places to display in the Max CFM
values. The default value is 0.
Exit Closes the Box Flow Test screen.

Performing a Box Flow Test 283


284 CCT Help: Commissioning
Chapter 13: CCT Help: Applications
Applications
Introduction
An application is a collection of the components that make up the control logic of a
system, including modules, logic blocks, custom logic, and hardware definition.
The Applications section of the CCT Help system describes the applications as
they are presented in the System Selection Wizard and as they are seen in the
Control View after being selected.
See the following application sections for details:
• Air Handling Unit Applications
• Fan Coil Applications
• Unit Ventilator (Unit Vent) Applications
• Heat Pump Applications
• VAV Applications
• Central Plant Applications
• Sideloop Applications (Sideloop button)
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.
The Custom Applications and Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only options
available from the File > New dialog box lay down blank Control View
workspaces where you can create specialized applications. See Creating Custom
Applications and Creating Monitoring/Supervisory Control Only Applications in
the Configuring a System section.
See the Configuring a System section for information on how to make selections in
the System Selection Wizard.
See the Application Descriptions section for a description of the type of
information provided in this Help system for the applications.

Applications 285
Application Descriptions
The application sections contain the following topics:
• Application Introduction
• Core Logic Modules
• Mechanical System Selection
• Control Logic Selection
Note: The Sideloop application has one Sideloop Selection screen instead of the
Mechanical System Selection and Control Logic Selection screens.

Application Introduction
This section describes the application and provides links to its detailed
descriptions.

Core Logic Modules


This section describes the modules that get automatically laid down by the
application, regardless of the selections you make in the wizard.
The modules are listed by type to identify where they appear in the Control View
(for example, Network Inputs and Output Controllers).

Mechanical System Selection


This section corresponds to the mechanical selections available in the Mechanical
System Selection screen of the System Selection Wizard. The Mechanical System
Selection section is broken down into groups of selections based on how they
appear in the wizard. Each group describes the selections available, any selection
dependencies, and the modules that get laid down by the selections.
The modules are listed by type to identify where they appear in the Control View
(for example, Network Inputs and Output Controllers). A category of modules is
listed only if modules of that type are laid down by the particular group of
selections, otherwise it is not included.

Control Logic Selection


This section corresponds to the control logic selections available in the Control
Logic Selection screen of the System Selection Wizard. The Control Logic
Selection section is broken down into groups of selections based on how they
appear in the wizard. Each group describes the selections available, any selection
dependencies, and the modules that get laid down by the selections.
The modules are listed by type to identify where they appear in the Control View
(for example, Network Inputs and Output Controllers). A category of modules is
listed only if modules of that type are laid down by the particular group of
selections, otherwise it is not included.

286 CCT Help: Applications


Chapter 14: CCT Help: Applications
Air Handling Unit Applications
Introduction
The Air Handling Unit applications provide selections that are capable of
controlling many different air handlers and control strategies. The selections for
the AHU applications have Mechanical System and Control System options like
other systems, but the selections are integrated together into the Mechanical
System Selection section. Input sensors are automatically loaded if required for
selected device or control options. The Control System Selection section provides
optional sensors, equipment, and monitored safeties.
See the sections specific to the AHU Application Type:
• Mixed Air Single Duct Application
• Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
• 100% Outdoor Air Single Duct Application
• 100% Outdoor Air Dual Duct Application
• Rooftop Unit Application
• Multizone (Mixed Air Dual Duct) Application

Air Handling Unit Applications 287


Mixed Air Single Duct Application
See the following sections for information on this application’s logic and
selections:
• Mixed Air Single Duct Core Logic
• Mixed Air Single Duct Mechanical System Selection
- Fans
- Economizer Damper(s)
- Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper
- Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature
- Temperature Control Strategy
- Occupancy Control
- Heat Recovery
- Coils (Preheat)
- Coils (Cooling)
- Coils (Reheat)
- Coils (Common Heating-Cooling)
- Humidification
- Dehumidification Control
- Optional Features
• Mixed Air Single Duct Control Logic Selection
- Optional Sensors
- Optional Equipment
- Monitored Safeties
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

288 CCT Help: Applications


Mixed Air Single Duct Core Logic

Modules (MASD)
All Mixed Air Single Duct Applications use the core logic listed below.
Network Inputs
• APP-MODE (Application Mode)
See the Network Inputs section.
State Generation
• Application Mode Determination: This module separates out the Water
Flush application mode for separate connection to State Selection and
passes the remaining application modes to State Selection.
• Water System Flush Pass Through: This module passes the Water Flush
system mode to a separate State Selection input so that when water flush is
requested, the valves always open.
• Mixed Air Single Duct HR Sequencing
Output Control
• Heating Required LV
• Cooling Required LV

Air Handling Unit Applications 289


Mixed Air Single Duct Mechanical System Selection

Fans (MASD)
These selections provide the logic for the main fans.
The selection options for Fans are:
Supply Fan
• Single Speed
• Variable Speed
- Two Duct Static Pressure Sensors
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

290 CCT Help: Applications


Return Fan
• Single Speed
• Variable Speed
- Volume Matching
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints
- Building Static Pressure
- Track Supply Fan
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Fan to Start First
- Supply
- Return

Air Handling Unit Applications 291


• Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Press Control)
- Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
A Supply Fan is required (that is, it is selected by default). A Return Fan or Relief
Fan (only one) may also be optionally selected.
A Variable Speed Supply Fan is required to select a Variable Speed Return Fan.

292 CCT Help: Applications


Modules (MASD Fans)
The Fans selection loads the following modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• DAP-SP (Duct Static Pressure Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Supply Fan Status
with Manual Restart is selected, but a Unit Reset Switch (BI) is not
selected.
• FLOW-DIFF (Flow Differential Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control is selected, but
Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints are not selected.
• OCCFLOW-DIFF (Occupied Flow Differential Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints are
selected with Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching.
• UNOCCFLOW-DIFF (Unoccupied Flow Differential Setpoint): This
module is loaded when Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints
are selected with Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching.
• BLDGP-SP (Building Static Pressure Setpoint): This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Return Fan Building Static Pressure control or
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• DA1-P (Discharge Air Static Pressure 1): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• DA2-P (Discharge Air Static Pressure 2): This module is loaded when Two
Duct Static Pressure Inputs is selected with Variable Speed Supply Fan.
• SF-S (Supply Fan Status)
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Unit Reset Switch
(BI) is selected with Supply Fan Status with Manual Restart.
• DA-F (Discharge Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow
Measurement (Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control. The flow scaling is
configured by setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum
Value attributes.
• RA-F (Return Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow Measurement
(Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.

Air Handling Unit Applications 293


• DA-VP (Discharge Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• RA-VP (Return Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• BLDG-P (Building Static Pressure): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Return Fan Building Static Pressure control or Variable Speed
Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) is selected.
• RF-S (Return Fan Status): This module is loaded when Return Fan Status is
selected. This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• RLF-S (Relief Fan Status): This module is loaded when Relief Fan Status
is selected. This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• RLF-BA (Relief Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) Alarm Management Belt
Alarm is selected.
• RLF-LO (Relief Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) Alarm Management
Lockout Switch is selected.
• RF-BA (Return Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Return
Fan Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• RF-LO (Return Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Return Fan Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
• SF-BA (Supply Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Supply
Fan Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• SF-LO (Supply Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Supply Fan Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset BI): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart Unit Reset Switch (BI) options are selected.
See the Inputs section.

294 CCT Help: Applications


Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Discharge Flow Determination: This module is loaded when Velocity
Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• Return Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity Pressure
(Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• VOLUMEMATCH-RANGE (Volume Match PID Process Range): This
module is loaded for Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
It determines the default PID proportional band for the volume matching
control loop and should be configured to the design flow of the Return Fan.
• Flow Differential Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded when
Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints are selected for
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• Return Fan Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Return Fan, Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.
• Relief Fan Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Press Control), Fan Status Loss of
Airflow Strategy is selected.
State Generation
• Loss of Airflow Sequencing: This module is loaded when Supply Fan
Status is selected.
• Relief Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Variable Speed Relief Fan
(Bldg Static Press Control) Alarm Management is selected.
• Return Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Return Fan Alarm
Management is selected.
• Supply Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Supply Fan Alarm
Management is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 295


Output Control
• Constant Capacity Supply Fan Control: This module is loaded when Single
Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• Supply Fan Duct Static Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• Supply Fan OnOff LV
• Supply Fan Percent Cmd LV: This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Supply Fan is selected.
• Constant Capacity Return Fan Control: This module is loaded when Single
Speed Return Fan is selected.
• Variable Capacity Return Fan Volume Matching Control: This module is
loaded when Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching is selected.
• Return Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Return Fan Building Static Pressure is selected.
• Variable Capacity Return Fan Track Control: This module is loaded when
Return Fan Variable Speed Track Supply Fan is selected.
• Relief Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is selected.
Outputs
• SF-C (Supply Fan Command): This module is loaded when any Supply
Fan is selected.
• SF-O (Supply Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Supply Fan is selected.
• RF-C (Return Fan Command): This module is loaded when any Return Fan
is selected.
• RF-O (Return Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Return Fan is selected.
• RLF-C (Relief Fan Command): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is selected.
• RLF-O (Relief Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is selected.
See the Outputs section.

296 CCT Help: Applications


Economizer Damper(s) (MASD)
These selections provide the logic for the Economizer Damper(s). If no
economizer control (Free Cooling) is required, these options should not be selected
(use Two Position Min OA Damper instead).
The selection options for Economizer Damper(s) are:
• Common Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output
• Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs)
• EAD & RAD Proportional
- Separate Outputs
- Common Output
- Two Position OAD
• OAD & RAD Proportional
- Separate Outputs
- Common Output
- Two Position EAD
• Economizer Suitability
- Network Command
- Enthalpy Switch (BI)
- Outdoor Air
• Dry Bulb Temp Economizer
• Temp & Enthalpy Economizer
• Outdoor Air versus Return Air: This option compares outdoor air
with return air to switch the economizer.
• Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2 Sensor
- Use Zone CO2 Sensor
- Use Return CO2 Sensor
Per ASHRAE Guideline16-2003 - Selecting Outdoor, Return, and Relief Dampers
for Air-Side Economizer Systems, OAD & RAD Proportional with Separate
Outputs is required if Variable Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is
selected.
The OAD & RAD Proportional options can only be selected if Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 297


Modules (MASD Economizer Dampers[s])
The Economizer Damper(s) selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OAD-MINPOS (Occupied Minimum Position for the Economizer
Dampers): This module is loaded when no dedicated Minimum Outdoor
Air Fan and/or Damper is selected.
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enable): This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Network Command is selected.
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature shared via network): This module is
loaded when either of the Outdoor Air Economizer Suitability options is
selected and a physical Outdoor Air Temperature input is not selected in
the Optional Sensors group of the Control System Selections.
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity shared via network): This module is loaded
when Temp & Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected and a physical
Outdoor Air Humidity input is not selected in the Optional Sensors group
of the Control System Selections.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enable): This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Enthalpy Switch (BI) is selected.
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Temp &
Enthalpy, Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Temp &
Enthalpy, Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected.
• ZN-Q (Zone Quality for CO2, CO, and others): This module is loaded
when Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by
CO2 Sensor using Zone CO2 Sensor is selected.
• RA-Q (Return Air Quality for CO2, CO, and others): This module is
loaded when Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset
by CO2 Sensor using Return CO2 Sensor is selected.
See the Inputs section.

298 CCT Help: Applications


Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Economizer Availability
• MAD-RAMPRATE (Damper Ramp Rate): This floating-point Constant is
loaded to determine the rate at which the damper ramps open to its
minimum position during the startup process.
• Damper Minimum Position Determination: This module is loaded when no
dedicated Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper is selected.
• Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2: This module is loaded when
Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2
Sensor is selected.
• Econ Enable OA versus RA: This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Outdoor Air, Outdoor Air versus Return Air is selected.
Output Control
• Proportional OA Damper Control: This module is loaded when one of the
following three combinations of selections are made: 1) Common
Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output; 2) Separate Proportional Outputs
(3 AOs), but no Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching; 3) OAD &
RAD Proportional, but no Variable Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press
Control).
• Proportional EA Damper Control for Volume Matching: This module is
loaded when Variable Speed Volume Match is selected with a Economizer
Damper selection of either Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs) or EAD
& RAD Proportional.
• Proportional OA Damper Control for Relief Fan: This module is loaded
when OAD & RAD Proportional with Separate Outputs and Variable
Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) are selected.
• Two Position Exhaust Damper Control: This module is loaded when the
Two Position EAD option under OAD & RAD Proportional is selected.
• Damper Control Status LV

Air Handling Unit Applications 299


Outputs
• MAD-O (Mixed Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Common Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output is selected.
• RAD-O (Return Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs), EAD & RAD Proportional with
Separate Outputs, or OAD & RAD Proportional with Separate Outputs is
selected.
• OAD-O (Outdoor Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when either
Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs) or OAD & RAD Proportional is
selected.
• OAD-C (Outdoor Air Damper Command): This module is loaded when
EAD & RAD Proportional with Two Position OAD is selected.
• EAD-O (Exhaust Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs) or EAD & RAD Proportional is
selected.
• EAD-C (Exhaust Air Damper Command): This module is loaded when
OAD & RAD Proportional with Two Position EAD is selected.
See the Outputs section.

300 CCT Help: Applications


Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper (MASD)
These selections provide the logic for a dedicated Minimum Outdoor Air Damper
and/or a Minimum Outdoor Air Fan (Injection Fan) with optional damper.
The selection options for Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper are:
• Two Position Damper
• Proportional Damper
- Adjustable Minimum Position Outdoor Air Damper
• Single Speed Injection Fan
- Two Position Damper
• Variable Speed Injection Fan
- Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
- Flow Measurement (Scaled)
- Unreliable Flow Sensor Operation
• Close Damper - Turn Off Fan
• Open Damper - Fan Maximum Speed
- Two Position Damper
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

Air Handling Unit Applications 301


- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Damper End Switch
The Fan Status and Damper End Switch are available only for selection if
applicable (that is, if fan or damper is selected).

Modules (MASD Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper)


The Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper selection loads the following
modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• MOADPOS-SP (Minimum Outdoor Air Damper Position): This module is
loaded when an Adjustable Minimum Position is selected for the
Proportional Minimum OA Damper.
• MOAFLOW-SP (Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Variable Speed Injection Fan is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• MOA-F (Min Outdoor Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow
Measurement (Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Injection Fan control. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• MOA-VP (Min Outdoor Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded
when Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Injection Fan control.
• MOAF-S (Min Outdoor Air Fan Status): This module is loaded when Min
Outdoor Air Fan Status is selected. This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• MOAD-S (Min Outdoor Air Damper Status): This module is loaded when
Min Outdoor Air Damper End Switch is selected. This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• MOAF-BA (Minimum OA Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded
when Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• MOAF-LO (Minimum OA Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded
when Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.

302 CCT Help: Applications


Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Minimum OA Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity
Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type with Variable
Speed Injection Fan.
• Min Outdoor Air Fan Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.
State Generation
• Minimum OA Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Alarm
Management is selected.
Output Control
• Two Position Min OA Damper Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Damper is selected.
• Proportional Damper Minimum OA Flow Control: This module is loaded
when Proportional Damper is selected.
• Constant Capacity Fan Minimum OA Flow Control: This module is loaded
when Single Speed Injection Fan is selected.
• Variable Capacity Fan Minimum OA Flow Control: This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Injection Fan is selected.
Outputs
• MOAD-C (Min Outdoor Air Damper Command): This module is loaded
when Two Position Damper is selected either by itself or supporting an
Injection Fan.
• MOAD-O (Min Outdoor Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Proportional Damper is selected.
• MOAF-C (Min Outdoor Air Fan Command): This module is loaded when
either injection fan option is selected.
• MOAF-O (Min Outdoor Air Fan Output): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Injection Fan is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 303


Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature (MASD)
This selection loads logic that reduces the intake of outdoor air when the
temperature is low. This reduction is accomplished by closing dampers, reducing
the volume differential (if Variable Capacity Return Fan Volume Matching control
is selected), and turning off or closing two-position fans or dampers.
If a preheat coil is located downstream of the mixing plenum (that is, it is in the
mixed air), the Preheat Temperature (downstream of the coil) serves as the process
variable for this control strategy. Otherwise, the Mixed Air Temperature serves as
the process variable.
The control logic for the low limit strategy is embedded directly into the Output
Control modules and activated simply by connecting the appropriate setpoint and
process variable. The logic takes precedence over all logic other than Emergency
Modes.
This selection is allowed if any of the Economizer Damper, Minimum Outdoor Air
Fan, or Minimum Outdoor Air Damper options is selected.

Modules (MASD Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature)


The Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature selection loads the following
modules in these Control View columns:
Inputs
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature): This module serves as the low limit
process variable when a preheat coil is not located in the mixed air duct.
• PH-T (Preheat Temperature): This module serves as the low limit process
variable when a preheat coil is located in the mixed air duct.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is used as the
upper threshold of the low limit control logic.
• LT-PB (Low Limit Proportional Band): This floating-point Constant is
used as the range over which the outdoor air is reduced from its normal
operating values to the minimum that can be achieved by the application.

304 CCT Help: Applications


Temperature Control Strategy (MASD)
These selections provide the logic for the basic Temperature Control Strategy for
the application. The Discharge Air Control options (fixed setpoint and Reset from
Outdoor Air Temperature) are designed for providing air to separately controlled
zones. The Zone or Return Control options are designed for directly controlling a
single zone (whether the sensor is in the zone or in the return duct). For single zone
control, the application can optionally be configured to control the Discharge Air
Temperature to a setpoint reset based on the Zone or Return Air Temperature.
The selection options for Temperature Control Strategy are:
• Discharge Air Control
- Reset from Outdoor Air Temperature: This option loads a module that
uses four parameters to define the outside reset band and the associated
discharge setpoints.
- Alternate Reset From Outdoor Air Temperature: This option loads a
module that uses four parameters to define the outside reset band and the
associated setpoint and offset band.
• Zone or Return Control
- Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return: This options
resets the discharge air setpoint based on zone or return air temperature.
• Add Return/Zone Reset by OA: This option resets the zone/return air
setpoint based on the outdoor air temperature.
- Cycle During Occupied
- Return Air Temperature
- Zone Temperature
• Setpoint Adjust
- Common Setpoint Adjust
- Warm Cool Adjust
• Temp Occ Support
- Summer/Winter Compensation Setpoint Shift
If Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return is selected, Cycle During
Occupied cannot be selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 305


Modules (MASD Temperature Control Strategy)
The Temperature Control Strategy selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• DAT-SP (Discharge Air Temperature Setpoint): This module is loaded
when (fixed) Discharge Air Control is selected.
• RAT-SP (Return Air Temperature Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Return Air Temperature control is selected. This point serves as the
Network Setpoint input into the ZN-T Setpoint Determination module.
• ZNT-SP (Zone Network Temperature Setpoint): This setpoint is always
created. If no Setpoint Adjustment or Warm Cool Adjust is selected,
ZNT-SP provides a Zone Setpoint Adjustment for the Supervisory system.
If a Setpoint Input for the Network Sensor is created, ZNT-SP becomes the
local backup if the Supervisory system is not communicating.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature): This module is loaded when
Discharge Air Control or Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or
Return is selected. This module may also be loaded if needed for particular
coil control strategy.
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Return Air
Temperature control is selected.
• ZN-T (Zone Temperature): This module is loaded when Zone Temperature
control is selected.
• ZN-SP (local Zone Setpoint): This module is loaded when Common
Setpoint Adjust is selected.
• WC-ADJ (local Warmer/Cooler Adjust): This module is loaded when
Warm Cool Adjust is selected.
• ZN-TOCC (Zone Temporary Occupancy): This module is loaded when
Temp Occ Support is selected. This module is connected to the Occupancy
Mode Determination module.
See the Inputs section.

306 CCT Help: Applications


Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Discharge Air Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded when
Discharge Air Control or Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or
Return is selected.
• Discharge Air Setpoint Reset: This module is loaded when the Reset from
Outdoor Air Temperature option of Discharge Air Control is selected.
• ZN-T Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded when Zone or Return
Control is selected.
• Summer Winter Compensation: This module is loaded when Summer/
Winter Compensation Setpoint Shift is selected.
• DA-T sp Reset by OA: This module is loaded when Discharge Air Control
Alternate Reset From Outdoor Air Temperature is selected.
• RA-T sp Reset by OA: This module is loaded when Zone or Return
Control, Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return, Add Return/
Zone Reset by OA is selected.
State Generation
• Start Stop Sequencing DA-T: This module is loaded when Discharge Air
Control or Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return is selected.
• Start Stop Sequencing Zone: This module is loaded when Zone or Return
Air Temperature Control is selected, but Discharge Air Temperature Reset
by Zone or Return is not selected.
• Zone Sequencing: This module is loaded when the Discharge Air
Temperature Reset by Zone or Return option of Zone or Return Control is
selected.
Output Control
• Cascaded Discharge Air Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded
when the Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return option of
Zone or Return Control is selected.
• Cascaded DA-T Setpoint LV: This module is loaded when the Discharge
Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return option of Zone or Return Control
is selected.
• Zone Heating Control Status LV: This module is loaded when the
Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return option of Zone or
Return Control is selected.
• Zone Cooling Control Status LV: This module is loaded when the
Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return option of Zone or
Return Control is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 307


Occupancy Control (MASD)
These selections provide the logic for Occupancy Mode Determinination.
The selection options for Occupancy Control are:
• Always Occupied
• Scheduled Occupancy
- Override Support
- Occupancy Switch (BI)
- Unoccupied Strategy
• Intermittent Night Operation
• Off during Unoccupied
If any options are selected for separate Occupied and Unoccupied Setpoints or
Temporary Occupancy, the Always Occupied option cannot be selected.

Modules (MASD Occupancy Control)


The Occupancy Control selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OCC-SCHEDULE: This module is loaded when Scheduled Occupancy is
selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• OCC-OVERRIDE: This module is loaded when Override Support is
selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• WC-C (WarmupCooldown command): This module is the input for when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected.
• ZN-T (network Zone Temperature): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected with the Discharge Air Control
temperature control strategy and a physical Zone Temperature input is not
selected in the Optional Sensors group of the Control System Selections.
• CLGUNOCC-SP (Night Cooling Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected with the Discharge Air Control
temperature control strategy.
• HTGUNOCC-SP (Night Heating Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected with the Discharge Air Control
temperature control strategy.
See the Network Inputs section.

308 CCT Help: Applications


Inputs
• OCC-S (Occupancy Status): This module is loaded when Occupancy
Switch (BI) is selected and is connected to the Occupancy Mode
Determination module.
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Always Occupied: This is an Enum Constant. In applications that are
always Occupied (when Enabled), the Always Occupied module is loaded
to provide a consistent source of data for other modules that require
Occupancy Mode information.
• Occupancy Mode Determination: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• WarmupCooldown Pass Through: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• DA-T Unocc Status Determination: This module is loaded when both
Discharge Air Control and Intermittent Night Operation are selected or
when Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or Return is selected. For
Discharge Air Control applications, this module only sequences the
application during intermittent unoccupied night operation. For Zone or
Return control applications, it sequences during Warmup or Cooldown as
well.
• Zone Unoccupied Sequencing: This module is loaded when Zone or Return
Control is selected, but Discharge Air Temperature Reset by Zone or
Return is not selected.
Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Occupancy Status Display): This module is loaded when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected and a Zone Temperature Sensor is also
loaded (either due to the Temperature Control Strategy or selected as an
Optional Sensor). It provides Occupancy Mode information for models of
the network sensor with a LED.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 309


Heat Recovery (MASD)
The selection options for Heat Recovery are:
Enable Type
• Dry Bulb Compare
• Enthalpy
Enthalpy Wheel
• Single Speed
- Modulated Bypass Dampers
• Variable Speed
- Bypass Damper BO
• Wheel Status
- Loss of Status Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Blocking Protection/Cleaning Mode: This option provides cleaning mode
functionality. If the wheel is off for an extended period, the wheel turns on for
a short time to keep the wheel free of dirt and dust.

310 CCT Help: Applications


Glycol Loop
3-Way Valve
Proportional Actuator
Incremental Actuator
Circulation Pump
Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to a
motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of time
(for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor from
seizing up).

Air Handling Unit Applications 311


Modules (MASD Heat Recovery)
The Heat Recovery selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• HR-EN (Heat Recovery isAllowed)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when either Enable
Type option is selected.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Enthalpy
Enable Type is selected.
• EA-T (Exhaust Air Temperature)
• EAHR-T (Exhaust Air Heat Recovery Temperature): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel is selected or when Glycol Loop is selected
but not a 3-Way Valve (Circulation Pump only). This input serves as the
low limit process variable.
• GLY-T (Glycol Temperature): This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
with 3-Way Valve is selected. This input serves as the low limit process
variable.
• HRW-S (Heat Recovery Wheel Status): This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• HRP-S (Heat Recovery Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• HRP-LO (Heat Recovery Pump Lockout Switch BI): This module is
loaded when Glycol Loop Circulation Pump Alarm Management Lockout
Switch is selected.
• HRW-BA (Heat Recovery Wheel Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• HRW-LO (Heat Recovery Wheel Lockout Switch BI): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Lockout Switch is
selected.
• HRW-FAULT (Heat Recovery Wheel VFD Fault BI): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel Alarm Management Frequency Converter
Fault is selected.
See the Inputs section.

312 CCT Help: Applications


Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HRLL-SP (Heat Recovery Low Limit Setpoint)
• Heat Recovery Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Glycol Loop Circulation Pump, Pump Status is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel, Wheel Status is selected.
State Generation
• Heat Recovery Suitability Determination: This module is loaded when Dry
Bulb Enable Type is selected.
• Heat Recovery Enthalpy Suitability Determination: This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Enable Type is selected.
• Heat Recovery Low Limit Sequencing
• Heat Recovery Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
Circulation Pump Alarm Management is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Alarms: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel
Alarm Management is selected.
Output Control
• Heat Recovery Htg CS LV
• Enthalpy Wheel Control: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel is
selected.
• Glycol Loop Control: This module is loaded when Glycol Loop is selected.
• Energy Wheel Two Pos Byp: This module is loaded when Enthalpy Wheel
Variable Speed Bypass Damper BO is selected.
• Heat Recovery Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when
Glycol Loop Circulation Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
• HR Energy Wheel Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Blocking Protection is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 313


Outputs
• HROAFBD-O (Heat Recovery OA FBD AO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
• HREAFBD-O (Heat Recovery EA FBD AO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
• HRW-C (Heat Recovery Wheel Command): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed is selected.
• HR-O (Heat Recovery Output): This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
with 3-Way Valve is selected.
• HRP-C (Heat Recovery Pump Command): This module is loaded when
Glycol Loop with 3-Way Valve is selected.
• HREAFBD-C (Heat Recovery Exhaust FBD BO): This module is loaded
when Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed Modulated Bypass Dampers is
selected.
• HROAFBD-C (Heat Recovery OA FBD BO): This module is loaded when
Enthalpy Wheel Single Speed Modulated Bypass Dampers is selected.
See the Outputs section.

314 CCT Help: Applications


Coils (Preheat) (MASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Preheat coil. A Preheat coil may be
located in the Outdoor Air Duct (ahead of the mixing plenum). If this is the case, a
Preheat coil is always set to Control to Preheat Air Temperature. When in the
Mixed Air Duct, the coil may either be controlled by a dedicated sensor or
sequenced with the other devices. During startup, if a DA-T or PH-T sensor is
available, the Preheat coil is controlled by the LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint).
The selection options for Coils (Preheat) are:
Preheat
Preheat Lockout from Outdoor Air
Location
• Outdoor Air
• Mixed air
- Sequenced with Main Control Strategy
- Control to Preheat Air Temperature
Staged Heating
• Device Rotation
• Gas Bonnet Switch
• No Flow Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. The
current loss of airflow sequencer provides the proper behavior.
• High Temperature Lockout: This option turns off staged heating when a
High Temperature alarm occurs.
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages

Air Handling Unit Applications 315


Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
- Two Valves
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Incremental Output
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Two Position Output
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

316 CCT Help: Applications


- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Face and Bypass Switchover
- Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- Based on Mixed Air Temperature
- Based on Network Input
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- Low OA Temperature - Leaving Water Control: This option turns on
the coil pump if the outdoor air temperature is lower than the setpoint and
the unit is off. The preheat valve is modulated to control the leaving water
temperature.
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position

Air Handling Unit Applications 317


The Preheat Gas Bonnet Switch is only supported for Zone or Return Control (not
Discharge Air Control) when the unit has opportunity to use it for triggering start
up. This is the case when Preheat is Sequenced with Main Control Strategy and
Cycle During Occupied or Intermittent Night Operation are selected. If these
options are not selected, the Preheat Gas Bonnet Switch may not be selected.
The option for Two Proportional Valves is intended for two sequenced steam
valves. This option does not support including Face & Bypass Damper or
Circulation Pump controls.
The Face and Bypass Switchover option is applicable only when either a
Proportional or Incremental valve actuator is selected with Face and Bypass
Damper. This option specifies how to determine when the valve should be in
control (with the Damper at full face) and when the damper should be in control
(with the Valve fully open).
The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either Proportional or Incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

Modules (MASD Coils [Preheat])


The Coils (Preheat) selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• PH-EN (Preheat isAvailable): This module is loaded when Preheat
Lockout from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Preheat Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point is
the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must fall below before
heating is enabled.
• FBPD-SWO (Network Face & Bypass Switchover): This module is loaded
when Face and Bypass Switchover Based on Network Input is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• PH-T (Preheat Temperature): This module is loaded when Control to
Preheat Air Temperature is selected or when the Preheat Coil is in the
Outdoor Air (and Control to Preheat Air Temperature is the only control
option permitted).
• PHBS-S (Preheat Bonnet Switch Status): This module is loaded when the
Preheat Gas Bonnet Switch is selected.
• PHWE-T (Preheat Entering Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.

318 CCT Help: Applications


• PHWL-T (Preheat Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• PHP-S (Preheat Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Face and
Bypass Switchover Based on Mixed Air Temperature is selected.
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Remain
in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected and Preheat Temperature is not
otherwise loaded.
• PHP-LO (Preheat Pump Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is
selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when a
process variable is available for Low Limit control of the Preheat Coil
during Startup (either DA-T or PH-T) or for when any Coil has the Remain
in Control Shutdown Control options selected.
• PHT-SP (Preheat Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Control to Preheat Air Temperature is selected or when the Preheat Coil is
in the Outdoor Air (and Control to Preheat Air Temperature is the only
control option permitted).
• Preheat Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Preheat Availability Determination
• Preheat Sequencing: This module is loaded when Control to Preheat Air
Temperature is selected or when the Preheat Coil is in the Outdoor Air (and
Control to Preheat Air Temperature is the only control option permitted).
• Preheat Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Hot Water or Steam
Coil Pump Alarm Management is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 319


Output Control
• Preheat Control Status LV
• Preheat Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Staged Preheat Control: This module is loaded when Staged Preheat is
selected.
• Preheat Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of Staged Preheat are selected.
• Preheat Percent Cmd LV: This module is loaded when the Preheat Gas
Bonnet Switch is selected.
• MSC Staged Preheat X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat.
• Preheat X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Preheat X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat and Device Rotation is selected.
One module is loaded per stage.
• Sequenced Valves Preheat Control: This module is loaded when the Two
Valves option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• FBPD Proportional Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when the
Face and Bypass Damper option for Proportional Actuator or Incremental
Actuator is selected.
• Proportional Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator are selected (and Two
Valves and Face and Bypass Damper are not selected).
• FBPD 2 Position Valve Preheat Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• Preheat Proportional Valve Output: This module is loaded when Loss of
Airflow Strategy Low OA Temperature - Leaving Water Control is
selected.
• Preheat Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.

320 CCT Help: Applications


Outputs
• PHX-C (Preheat X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for Staged Preheat. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• PH-O (Preheat Output): This module is loaded when a Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (but not the Two Valves
option).
• PH1-O (Preheat 1 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• PH2-O (Preheat 2 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• PH-C (Preheat Command): This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• PHFBD-O (Preheat Face & Bypass Damper Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• PHP-C (Preheat Pump Command): This module is loaded when Preheat
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 321


Coils (Cooling) (MASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Cooling coil.
The selection options for Coils (Cooling) are:
Cooling
Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air
Staged Cooling
• Device Rotation
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages
Chilled Water
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Two Position Actuator
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

322 CCT Help: Applications


- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
Cooling cannot be selected if Common Heating-Cooling is selected.
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 323


Modules (MASD Coils [Cooling])
The Coils (Cooling) selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• CLG-EN (Cooling isAvailable): This module is loaded when Cooling
Lockout from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• CLGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Cooling Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Cooling Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point is
the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must rise above before
cooling is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CHWE-T (Chilled Water Entering Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• CHWL-T (Chilled Water Leaving Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• CP-S (Cooling Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• Cooling Pump Lockout Switch BI: This input is loaded when Chilled
Water Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Cooling Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Chill Water Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Cooling Availability Determination
• Cooling Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Chilled Water Coil
Pump Alarm Management is selected.

324 CCT Help: Applications


Output Control
• Cooling Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Cooling Control Status LV
• Staged Cooling Control: This module is loaded when Staged Cooling is
selected.
• Cooling Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more
stages of Staged Cooling are selected.
• MSC Staged Cooling X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Cooling.
• Cooling X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Cooling and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Cooling X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for Staged Cooling and Device Rotation is selected.
One module is loaded per stage.
• Proportional Valve Cooling Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• FBPD 2 Position Valve Cooling Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• Cooling Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Chilled
Water Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• CLGX-C (Cooling X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for Staged Cooling. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• CLG-O (Cooling Output): This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• CLG-C (Cooling Command): This module is loaded when Two Position
Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• CLGFBD-O (Cooling Face & Bypass Damper Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• CP-C (Cooling Pump Command): This module is loaded when Cooling
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 325


Coils (Reheat) (MASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Reheat coil.
The selection options for Coils (Reheat) are:
Reheat
Reheat Lockout from Outdoor Air
Staged Heating
• Device Rotation
• Gas Bonnet Switch
• No Flow Lockout: This option loads the flow switch for staged heating. The
current loss of airflow sequencer provides the proper behavior.
• High Temperature Lockout: This option turns off staged heating when a
High Temperature alarm occurs.
• Number of Stages
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Five Stages
- Six Stages
- Seven Stages
- Eight Stages
Hot Water or Steam
• Proportional Output
- Two Valves
• Incremental Output
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status

326 CCT Help: Applications


• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position

Air Handling Unit Applications 327


Reheat cannot be selected if Common Heating-Cooling is selected.
The Reheat Gas Bonnet Switch is only supported for Zone or Return Control (not
DA-T Reset) when the unit has opportunity to use it for triggering start up. This is
the case when Cycle During Occupied or Intermittent Night Operation is selected.
In addition, if a Preheat coil is selected and Sequenced with the Main Control
Strategy the Reheat Gas Bonnet Switch is not allowed.
The option for Two Proportional Valves is intended for two sequenced steam
valves. This option does not support including Face & Bypass Damper or
Circulation Pump controls.
The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either proportional or incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

Modules (MASD Coils [Reheat])


The Coils (Reheat) selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• RH-EN (Reheat isAvailable): This module is loaded when Reheat Lockout
from Outdoor Air is not selected.
• HTGOATLOCKOUT-SP (OA Heating Enable Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Reheat Lockout from Outdoor Air is selected. This point is
the temperature that the Outdoor Air Temperature must fall below before
heating is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• HTGBS-S (Reheat Bonnet Switch Status): This module is loaded when the
Reheat Gas Bonnet Switch is selected.
• RHWE-T (Reheat Entering Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• RHWL-T (Reheat Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• RHP-S (Reheat Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Remain
in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• Reheat Pump Lockout Switch BI: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.

328 CCT Help: Applications


Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• Reheat Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Hot Water or Steam Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.
State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Reheat Availability Determination
• Reheat Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Hot Water or Steam
Coil Pump Alarm Management is selected.
Output Control
• Reheat Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• Reheat Control Status LV
• Staged Reheat Control: This module is loaded when Staged Reheat is
selected.
• Reheat Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or more stages
of Staged Reheat are selected.
• Reheat Percent Cmd LV: This module is loaded when the Reheat Gas
Bonnet Switch is selected.
• MSC Staged Reheat X: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat.
• Reheat X Totalization: This module is loaded when X number of stages
(from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat and Device Rotation is
selected. One module is loaded per stage.
• Reheat X LV: This module is loaded when X number of stages (from one
to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat and Device Rotation is selected.
One module is loaded per stage.
• Sequenced Valves Reheat Control: This module is loaded when the Two
Valves option for Proportional Actuator is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 329


• Proportional Valve Reheat Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (and Two Valves
is not selected).
• Reheat Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Hot Water
or Steam Coil Pump Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• HTGX-C (Reheat X Command): This module is loaded when a number of
stages (from one to eight) are selected for Staged Reheat. One Output is
loaded per stage.
• RH-O (Reheat Output): This module is loaded when a Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected (but not the Two Valves
option).
• HTG1-O (Reheat 1 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• HTG2-O (Reheat 2 Output): This module is loaded when the Two Valves
option for Proportional Actuator is selected.
• RHP-C (Reheat Pump Command): This module is loaded when Reheat
Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

330 CCT Help: Applications


Coils (Common Heating-Cooling) (MASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a Common Heating-Cooling (also
known as 2-pipe) coil.
The selection options for Coils (Common Heating-Cooling) are:
Common Heating-Cooling
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Two Position Actuator
- Face and Bypass Damper
• Proportional Actuator
• Incremental Actuator
• Entering Water Temperature
• Leaving Water Temperature
• Coil Pump
- Pressure/Flow Boost
- Low Temperature Circulation
- Pump Status
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).

Air Handling Unit Applications 331


• Summer/Winter Switchover Strategy
- Local Switch (BI)
- Network
- Supply Water Temperature
• Shutdown Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Loss of Airflow Strategy
- Off
- Remain in Control
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
• Unreliable Sensor Operation
- Off
- Hold
- Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air Temperature
- User Defined Position
Common Heating-Cooling cannot be selected if either Cooling or Reheat is
selected.
The Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is available only when a proportional
valve is selected (with either proportional or incremental actuator).
The Loss of Airflow Strategy options are available only when the Automatic
Restart option for the Supply Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.

332 CCT Help: Applications


Modules (MASD Coils [Common Heating-Cooling])
The Coils (Common Heating-Cooling) selection loads the following modules in
these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• HC-EN (2 Pipe isAvailable)
• SUMWIN-C (SummerWinter): This module is loaded when the Network
option for Summer/Winter Switchover Strategy is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• SUMWIN-S (Summer/Winter Mode Status): This module is loaded when
the Local Switch (BI) option for Summer/Winter Switchover Strategy is
selected.
• HCWE-T (Htg/Clg Entering Water Temperature): This module is loaded
when the Supply Water Temperature option for Summer/Winter
Switchover Strategy is selected or when selected as a monitor only input.
• HCWL-T (Htg/Clg Leaving Water Temperature): This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• HCP-S (Heating/Cooling Pump Status): This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Remain
in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• HCP-LO (Heating/Cooling Pump Lockout Switch, 2 Pipe Pump Lockout
Switch BI): This module is loaded when Coil Pump Alarm Management
Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• SummerWinter Mode Determination: This module is loaded when the
Supply Water Temperature option for Summer/Winter Switchover Strategy
is selected.
• OALT-SP (Low OA Temperature Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on
Outdoor Air Temperature Strategy options selected.
• Low OA Temperature Diff: This floating-point Constant is loaded when
any Coil has any of the available Protect Coil Based on Outdoor Air
Temperature Strategy options selected.
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant is loaded when
Remain in Control Shutdown Strategy is selected.
• 2 Pipe Pump Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Coil Pump, Pump Status is selected.

Air Handling Unit Applications 333


State Generation
• Coil Circulation Pump Sequencing: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• 2 Pipe isAvailable Pass Through
• 2 Pipe Pump Alarms: This module is loaded when Coil Pump Alarm
Management is selected.
Output Control
• 2 Pipe Coil Pump Pass Through: This module is loaded when Low
Temperature Circulation Coil Pump is selected.
• 2 Pipe Heating Control Status LV
• 2 Pipe Cooling Control Status LV
• Proportional Valve 2 Pipe Control: This module is loaded when
Proportional Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• FBPD 2 Position Valve 2 Pipe Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• 2 Pipe Pump Blocking Protection: This module is loaded when Coil Pump
Blocking Protection is selected.
Outputs
• HC-O (Heating/Cooling Output): This module is loaded when Proportional
Actuator or Incremental Actuator is selected.
• HC-C (Heating/Cooling Command): This module is loaded when Two
Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is selected.
• HCFBD-O (Heating/Cooling Face & Bypass Output): This module is
loaded when Two Position Actuator with Face and Bypass Damper is
selected.
• HCP-C (Heating/Cooling Pump Command): This module is loaded when
Heating/Cooling Coil Pump is selected.
See the Outputs section.

334 CCT Help: Applications


Humidification (MASD)
These selections provide the logic to control a humidifier if present.
The selection options for Humidification are:
• Staged
- One Stage
- Two Stages
- Three Stages
- Four Stages
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the humidifier.
• Steam Proportional Valve
- Isolation Valve
• Modulated Packaged Unit
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the Modulated Packaged Unit (humidifier).
• Scrubber: This option is for a scrubber humidifier, which is a shower head,
pump, and basin located in the ductwork. This type of humidifier requires
3 BOs; a pump BO, a drain valve BO, and a BO to close the fill valve. The
drain valve and fill valve BOs should actuate together (if draining, close the
inlet valve and disable the pump). The operational water level is maintained by
a mechanical float valve.
- Drain Valve: This option provides an output for the drain valve and an
output for the fill valve.
• Open valve if scrubber is inactive: This option provides monitoring
of and indicates the status of the pump command and a network input to
open the drain valve. If the network input requests the valve to open or
if the pump command has been off for a period of time, the drain valve
opens. If the pump is required to start, the drain valve closes for a
period of time to allow the sump to fill before starting the pump.
• Open valve on Network Input
- Humidifier Status: This option provides status feedback of the operation
of the Modulated Packaged Unit (humidifier).
• Control Sensor
- Zone Humidity
• During Unoccupied Mode
- Return Air Humidity
• Discharge Humidity High Limit Control

Air Handling Unit Applications 335


The During Unoccupied Mode option is applicable only when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.

Modules (MASD Humidification)


The Humidification selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• HUM-EN (Humidification isAvailable)
• BASIN-C (Drain Basin): This module is loaded when Scrubber Drain
Valve Open valve on Network Input is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): This module is loaded when Zone Humidity is
selected for the humidification process variable.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Return Air
Humidity is selected for the humidification process variable.
• DA-H (Discharge Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Discharge
Humidity High Limit Control is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• HUM-SP (Humidification Setpoint): This is a floating-point Constant.
• DAH-SP (Discharge Air Humidity Setpoint): This floating-point Constant
is loaded when Discharge Humidity High Limit Control is selected.
State Generation
• Humidification Sequencing
• Humidification isAvailable Pass Through

336 CCT Help: Applications


Output Control
• Humidity Control Status LV
• Staged Humidification Control: This module is loaded when Staged
Humidification is selected.
• Humidification Max Cap Fract LV: This module is loaded when two or
more stages of Staged Humidification are selected.
• MSC Staged Humidification X: This module is loaded when X number of
stages (from one to four) are selected for Staged Humidification.
• Proportional Steam Humidification Control: This module is loaded when
Steam Proportional Valve is selected.
• Packaged Humidifier Control: This module is loaded when Modulated
Packaged Unit is selected.
• Humidity Scrubber Output: This module is loaded when Scrubber is
selected.
Outputs
• HUMX-C (Humidification X Command): This module is loaded when a
number of stages (from one to four) are selected for Staged Humidification.
One Output is loaded per stage.
• HUM-O (Humidifier Output): This module is loaded when Steam
Proportional Valve or Modulated Packaged Unit is selected.
• HUM-C (Humidifier Command): This module is loaded when Modulated
Packaged Unit is selected.
• STMISO-C (Steam Isolation Valve Command): This module is loaded
when the Isolation Valve option for Steam Proportional Valve is selected.
• HDV-C (Drain Valve BO): This module is loaded when Scrubber Drain
Valve is selected.
• HFV-C (Fill Valve BO): This module is loaded when Scrubber is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 337


Dehumidification Control (MASD)
These selections provide the logic for dehumidification control.
The selection options for Dehumidification Control are:
• Zone Humidity
• Return Air Humidity
Dehumidification cannot be selected unless both Cooling and Reheat are selected.

Modules (MASD Dehumidification Control)


The Dehumidification Control selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Inputs
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity): This module is loaded when Zone Humidity is
selected for the dehumidification process variable.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Return Air
Humidity is selected for the dehumidification process variable.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• DEHUM-SP (Dehumidification Setpoint): This is a floating-point
Constant.
State Generation
• Dehumidification Sequencing

338 CCT Help: Applications


Optional Features (MASD)
These selections provide the logic for controlling the operation of the application.
The Unit Enable logic includes the option to delay startup after controller restart
(Power Fail Restart).
The selection options for Optional Features are:
• Smoke Control Support (UL-864-UUKL): This option adds the Emergency
Mode Network Input and the Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL
State Generator module. In the State Selection Table, you can create state
values for each Output Controller to provide normal control, pressurize,
depressurize, purge, or shutdown. For example, if the Emergency Mode
Network Input is set to shutdown, you can set all of the Output Controller
states to the desired condition in the State Selection Table.
• Unit Enable: This option determines whether the application operates based
on the Network Input (BV). If Unit Enable Switch is selected, then when the
Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is
considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected,
the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can
be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Unit Enable Switch (BI): This option determines whether the application
operates based on the Hardware Input (BI). If Unit Enable is selected, then
when the Network Input does not have a valid command from the network, it is
considered unreliable (and the unit is enabled). If both BI and BV are selected,
the state of both must be Enable for the unit to operate (that is, either input can
be in a shutdown state to cause the unit to stop).
• Power Fail Restart: This feature is available as part of the Unit Enable
Determination State Generator module. When this option is selected, after a
restart (power cycle, controller download, or manual restart command), the
application is held in the shutdown state for the Power Fail Restart Time
(default = 60 seconds).

Air Handling Unit Applications 339


Modules (MASD Optional Features)
The Optional Features selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• EMERGENCY-MODE: This module is a Network Input for the Smoke
Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL State Generator.
• UNITEN-MODE (Unit Enable Mode)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• UNITEN-S (Unit Enable Toggle Switch)
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Smoke Control Sequencing for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded to
set the position of the damper (EAD-O, MAD-O, OAD-O, or RAD-O) and
set the state/speed of the supply fan (SF-C/SF-O), return fan (RF-C/RF-O),
relief fan (RLF-C/RLF-O), and min outdoor air fan (MOAF-C/MOAF-O,
if present) during a call for Smoke Control.
• Unit Enable Determination: This module is loaded when the Unit Enable
Mode or Switch (BI) is selected or when Power Fail Restart is selected.

340 CCT Help: Applications


Mixed Air Single Duct Control Logic Selection

Optional Sensors (MASD)


These selections provide the option for loading extra, monitor-only sensors.
The selection options for Optional Sensors are:
• Outdoor Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Minimum Outdoor Air
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Preheat Air Temperature
• Mixed Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
• Discharge Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
- Static Pressure
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
- Minimum Flow Protection For Staged Heating

Air Handling Unit Applications 341


• Return Air
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
- Static Pressure
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Relief Air
- Air Flow
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Zone
- Temperature
- Humidity
- CO2 Sensor
• Misc
- Building Static Pressure
- Heat Recovery Air Temperature
If a Sensor is required for one of the selections made in the Mechanical System
Selection, the option is not available here.
The Minimum Flow Protection for Staged Heating can be selected if Staged
Preheat (in Mixed Air) or Staged Reheat is selected and the Discharge Flow is
available (either due to selecting Return Fan Volume Matching of an optional
Discharge Flow sensor).

342 CCT Help: Applications


Modules (MASD Optional Sensors)
The Optional Sensors selection loads the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature): This module is loaded when a physical
Outdoor Air Temperature input is not selected.
• FLOW-LL (Airflow Low Limit): This module is loaded when Minimum
Flow Protection For Staged Heating is selected. It is the minimum
discharge flow required before staged heating is enabled.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature)
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity)
• OA-Q (Outdoor Air Quality)
• OA-VP (Outdoor Air Velocity Pressure)
• OA-F (Outdoor Air Flow): The point measurement is scaled using AI
Output Range High.
• MOA-VP (Min Outdoor Air Velocity Pressure)
• MOA-F (Min Outdoor Air Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting
the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• PH-T (Preheat Temperature)
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature)
• MA-H (Mixed Air Humidity)
• MA-Q (Mixed Air Quality)
• DA-T (Discharge Air Temperature)
• DA-H (Discharge Air Humidity)
• DA-Q (Discharge Air Quality)
• DA1-P (Discharge Air Static Pressure 1)
• DA-VP (Discharge Air Velocity Pressure)
• DA-F (Discharge Air Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the
AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature)
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity)
• RA-Q (Return Air Quality)
• RA-P (Return Air Static Pressure)
• RA-VP (Return Air Velocity Pressure)

Air Handling Unit Applications 343


• RA-F (Return Air Flow): The flow scaling is configured by setting the AI
object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• ZN-T (Zone Temperature)
• ZN-H (Zone Humidity)
• ZN-Q (Zone Quality)
• BLDG-P (Building Static Pressure)
• HR-T (Heat Recovery Temperature)
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Outdoor Air Flow Calculation
• Minimum OA Flow Calculation
• Discharge Flow Calculation
• Return Flow Calculation
• Relief Flow Calculation
State Generation
• Loss of Airflow Sequencing: This module is loaded when Minimum Flow
Protection For Staged Heating is selected.

344 CCT Help: Applications


Optional Equipment (MASD)
These selections provide monitor only sensors for an optional pre-filter and/or
final filter.
The selection options for Optional Equipment are:
• Pre-Filter
- Filter Switch
- Filter Differential Pressure Sensor
• Final Filter
- Filter Switch
- Filter Differential Pressure Sensor

Modules (MASD Optional Equipment)


The Optional Equipment selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• PFILT-S (PreFilter Status)
• PFILT-DP (PreFilter Diff Pressure)
• FFILT-S (Final Filter Status)
• FFILT-DP (Final Filter Diff Pressure)
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 345


Monitored Safeties (MASD)
These selections provide inputs for monitoring equipment safeties. The High and
Low Static Pressure Switch inputs and High and Low Temperature Switch inputs
are connected to the Emergency Mode Sequencer and shut down the application
when tripped.
The selection options for Monitored Safeties are:
• Discharge
- High Static Pressure Switch
- Smoke Detector
• Return
- Low Static Pressure Switch
- Smoke Detector
• Low Limit Temperature Switch
• High Limit Temperature Switch
• Humidity Alarm

Modules (MASD Monitored Safeties)


The Monitored Safeties selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Inputs
• DAPHI-A (Discharge Air High Duct Pressure)
• DA-SD (Discharge Air Smoke Alarm)
• RAPLO-A (Return Air Low Duct Pressure)
• RA-SD (Return Air Smoke Alarm)
• LT-A (Low Temperature Alarm)
• HT-A (High Temperature Alarm)
• HUMHI-A (Humidity High Limit)
See the Inputs section.

346 CCT Help: Applications


Mixed Air Dual Duct Application
See the following sections for information on this application’s logic and
selections:
• Mixed Air Dual Duct Core Logic
• Mixed Air Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection
- Fans
- Economizer Damper(s)
- Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper
- Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature
- Temperature Control Strategy
- Occupancy Control
- Heat Recovery
- Coils (Preheat)
- Coils (Cooling - Cold Deck)
- Coils (Heating - Hot Deck)
- Humidification
- Optional Features
• Mixed Air Dual Duct Control Logic Selection
- Optional Sensors
- Optional Equipment
- Monitored Safeties
See the Upgrading System Files section for a list and description of the module and
System Selection changes that were made since the last release of CCT.

Air Handling Unit Applications 347


Mixed Air Dual Duct Core Logic

Modules (MADD)
All Mixed Air Dual Duct Applications use the core logic listed below.
Network Inputs
• APP-MODE (Application Mode)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CD-T (Cold Deck Temperature)
See the Inputs section.
State Generation
• Start Stop Sequencing (AHU Mixed Air)
• Application Mode Determination: This module separates out the Water
Flush application mode for separate connection to State Selection and
passes the remaining application modes to State Selection.
• Water System Flush Pass Through: This module passes the Water Flush
system mode to a separate State Selection input so that when water flush is
requested, the valves always open.
• Mixed Air Cold Duct Sequencing
Output Control
• Heating Required LV
• Cooling Required LV

348 CCT Help: Applications


Mixed Air Dual Duct Mechanical System Selection

Fans (MADD)
These selections provide the logic for the main fans.
The selection options for Fans are:
Supply Fan
• Single Speed
• Variable Speed
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

Air Handling Unit Applications 349


Return Fan
• Single Speed
• Variable Speed
- Volume Matching
• Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
• Flow Measurement (Scaled)
• Calculate Discharge Flow from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors
• Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints
- Building Static Pressure
- Track Supply Fan
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Fan to Start First
- Supply
- Return

350 CCT Help: Applications


Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Press Control)
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
A Supply Fan is required (that is, it is selected by default) as well as an optional
Return or Relief Fan.
A Variable Speed Supply Fan is required in order to select a Variable Speed
Return Fan.

Modules (MADD Fans)


The Fans selection loads the following modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• DAP-SP (Duct Static Pressure Setpoint): This module is loaded for the
Variable Speed Supply Fan.
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Supply Fan Status
with Manual Restart is selected, but a Unit Reset Switch (BI) is not
selected.
• FLOW-DIFF (Flow Differential Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control is selected, but
Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints is not selected.
• OCCFLOW-DIFF (Occupied Flow Differential Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints are
selected with Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching.

Air Handling Unit Applications 351


• UNOCCFLOW-DIFF (Unoccupied Flow Differential Setpoint): This
module is loaded when Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints
are selected with Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching.
• BLDGP-SP (Building Static Pressure Setpoint): This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Return Fan Building Static Pressure control or
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• CD-P (Cold Deck Static Pressure): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• HD-P (Hot Deck Static Pressure): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• SF-S (Supply Fan Status)
• UNIT-RESET (Unit Reset): This module is loaded when Unit Reset Switch
(BI) is selected with Supply Fan Status with Manual Restart.
• CD-F (Cold Deck Flow): This module is loaded when Flow Measurement
(Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge Flow is calculated
from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• HD-F (Hot Deck Flow): This module is loaded when Flow Measurement
(Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge Flow is calculated
from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• DA-F (Discharge Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow
Measurement (Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge Flow
is measured directly. The flow scaling is configured by setting the AI
object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• RA-F (Return Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow Measurement
(Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• CD-VP (Cold Deck Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control and
Discharge Flow is calculated from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors.

352 CCT Help: Applications


• HD-VP (Hot Deck Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control and
Discharge Flow is calculated from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors.
• DA-VP (Discharge Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control and
Discharge Flow is measured directly.
• RA-VP (Return Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded when
Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• BLDG-P (Building Static Pressure): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Return Fan Building Static Pressure control or Variable Speed
Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) is selected.
• RF-S (Return Fan Status): This module is loaded when Return Fan Status is
selected. This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• RLF-S (Relief Fan Status): This module is loaded when Relief Fan Status
is selected. This input is only for monitoring purposes.
• RLF-BA (Relief Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) Alarm Management Belt
Alarm is selected.
• RLF-LO (Relief Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Pres Control) Alarm Management
Lockout Switch is selected.
• RF-BA (Return Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Return
Fan Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• RF-LO (Return Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Return Fan Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
• SF-BA (Supply Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded when Supply
Fan Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• SF-LO (Supply Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded when
Supply Fan Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset BI): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart Unit Reset Switch (BI) options are selected.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 353


Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Discharge Flow Determination Cold Deck and Hot Deck Flow together to
determine the Discharge Flow: This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control with Discharge Flow calculated from
Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors.
• Cold Deck Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity
Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge Flow
is calculated from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors.
• Hot Deck Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity Pressure
(Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge Flow is calculated
from Cold and Hot Deck Flow Sensors.
• Discharge Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity
Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control and Discharge Flow
is measured directly.
• Return Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity Pressure
(Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to support Variable Speed
Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• VOLUMEMATCH-RANGE (Volume Match PID Process Range): This
module is loaded for Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
It determines the default PID proportional band for the volume matching
control loop and should be configured to the design flow of the Return Fan.
• Flow Differential Setpoint Determination: This module is loaded when
Separate Occupied and Unoccupied Flow Setpoints are selected for
Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching control.
• Return Fan Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Return Fan, Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.
• Relief Fan Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Bldg Static Press Control), Fan Status Loss of
Airflow Strategy is selected.
State Generation
• Loss of Airflow Sequencing: This module is loaded when Supply Fan
Status is selected.
• Relief Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Variable Speed Relief Fan
(Bldg Static Press Control) Alarm Management is selected.
• Return Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Return Fan Alarm
Management is selected.
• Supply Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Supply Fan Alarm
Management is selected.

354 CCT Help: Applications


Output Control
• Constant Capacity Supply Fan Control: This module is loaded when Single
Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• Supply Fan Duct Static Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Supply Fan is selected.
• Supply Fan OnOff LV
• Supply Fan Percent Cmd LV: This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Supply Fan is selected.
• Constant Capacity Return Fan Control: This module is loaded when Single
Speed Return Fan is selected.
• Variable Capacity Return Fan Volume Matching Control: This module is
loaded when Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching is selected.
• Return Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Return Fan Building Static Pressure is selected.
• Variable Capacity Return Fan Track Control: This module is loaded when
Return Fan Variable Speed Track Supply Fan is selected.
• Relief Fan BSP Control for UL-864-UUKL: This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is selected.
Outputs
• SF-C (Supply Fan Command): This module is loaded when any Supply
Fan is selected.
• SF-O (Supply Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Supply Fan is selected.
• RF-C (Return Fan Command): This module is loaded when any Return Fan
is selected.
• RF-O (Return Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Return Fan is selected.
• RLF-C (Relief Fan Command): This module is loaded when Variable
Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is selected.
• RLF-O (Relief Fan Output): This module is loaded when Variable Speed
Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 355


Economizer Damper(s) (MADD)
These selections provide the logic for the Economizer Damper(s). If no
economizer control (also known as Free Cooling) is required, these options should
not be selected (use Two Position Min OA Damper instead).
The selection options for Economizer Damper(s) are:
• Common Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output
• Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs)
• EAD & RAD Proportional
- Separate Outputs
- Common Output
- Two Position OAD
• OAD & RAD Proportional
- Separate Outputs
- Common Output
- Two Position EAD
• Economizer Suitability
- Network Command
- Enthalpy Switch (BI)
- Outdoor Air
• Dry Bulb Temp Economizer
• Temp & Enthalpy Economizer
• Outdoor Air versus Return Air: This option compares outdoor air
with return air to switch the economizer.
• Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2 Sensor
- Use Zone CO2 Sensor
- Use Return CO2 Sensor
Per ASHRAE Guideline16-2003 - Selecting Outdoor, Return, and Relief Dampers
for Air-Side Economizer Systems, OAD & RAD Proportional with Separate
Outputs is required if Variable Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) is
selected.
OAD & RAD Proportional is only allowed if Variable Speed Return Fan Volume
Matching is selected.

356 CCT Help: Applications


Modules (MADD Economizer Damper[s])
The Economizer Damper(s) selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OAD-MINPOS (occupied minimum position for the Economizer
dampers): This module is loaded when no dedicated Minimum Outdoor Air
Fan and/or Damper is selected.
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enable): This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Network Command is selected.
• OA-T (Outdoor Air Temperature shared via network): This module is
loaded when either Outdoor Air Economizer Suitability is selected and a
physical Outdoor Air Temperature input is not selected in the Optional
Sensors group of the Control System Selections.
• OA-H (Outdoor Air Humidity shared via network): This module is loaded
when Temp & Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected and a physical
Outdoor Air Humidity input is not selected in the Optional Sensors group
of the Control System Selections.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• ECON-EN (Economizer Enable): This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Enthalpy Switch (BI) is selected.
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Temp &
Enthalpy, Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Temp &
Enthalpy, Enthalpy Economizer Suitability is selected
• ZN-Q (Zone Quality for CO2, CO, and others): This module is loaded
when Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by
CO2 Sensor using Zone CO2 Sensor is selected.
• RA-Q (Return Air Quality for CO2, CO, and others): This module is
loaded when Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset
by CO2 Sensor using Return CO2 Sensor is selected.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 357


Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Economizer Availability Determination
• MAD-RAMPRATE (Damper Ramp Rate): This floating-point Constant
determines the rate at which the damper ramps open to its minimum
position during the startup process.
• Damper Minimum Position Determination: This module is loaded when no
dedicated Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper is selected.
• Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2: This module is loaded when
Outdoor and/or Exhaust Air Damper Minimum Position Reset by CO2
Sensor is selected.
• Econ Enable OA versus RA: This module is loaded when Economizer
Suitability Outdoor Air, Outdoor Air versus Return Air is selected.
Output Control
• Proportional OA Damper Control: This module is loaded when one of the
following three combinations of selections are made: 1) Common
Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output; 2) Separate Proportional Outputs
(3 AOs), but not Variable Speed Return Fan Volume Matching; 3) OAD &
RAD Proportional but not Variable Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press
Control).
• Proportional EA Damper Control for Volume Matching: This module is
loaded when Variable Speed Volume Match is selected with an
Economizer Damper selection of either Separate Proportional Outputs (3
AOs) or EAD & RAD Proportional.
• Proportional OA Damper Control for Relief Fan: This module is loaded
when OAD & RAD Proportional with Separate Outputs and Variable
Speed Relief Fan (Building Static Press Control) are selected.
• Two Position Exhaust Damper Control: This module is loaded when the
Two Position EAD option under OAD & RAD Proportional is selected.
• Damper Control Status LV

358 CCT Help: Applications


Outputs
• MAD-O (Mixed Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Common Proportional Mixed Air Damper Output is selected.
• RAD-O (Return Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs), EAD & RAD Proportional with
Separate Outputs, or OAD & RAD Proportional with Separate Outputs is
selected.
• OAD-O (Outdoor Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when either
Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs) or OAD & RAD Proportional is
selected.
• OAD-C (Outdoor Air Damper Command): This module is loaded when
EAD & RAD Proportional with Two Position OAD is selected.
• EAD-O (Exhaust Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Separate Proportional Outputs (3 AOs) or EAD & RAD Proportional is
selected.
• EAD-C (Exhaust Air Damper Command): This module is loaded when
OAD & RAD Proportional with Two Position EAD is selected.
See the Outputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 359


Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper (MADD)
These selections provide the logic for a dedicated Minimum Outdoor Air Damper
and/or a Minimum Outdoor Air Fan (Injection Fan) with optional damper.
The selection options for Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper are:
• Two Position Damper
• Proportional Damper
- Adjustable Minimum Position Outdoor Air Damper
• Single Speed Injection Fan
- Two Position Damper
• Variable Speed Injection Fan
- Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube)
- Flow Measurement (Scaled)
- Unreliable Flow Sensor Operation
• Close Damper - Turn Off Fan
• Open Damper - Fan Maximum Speed
- Two Position Damper
• Fan Status
- Loss of Airflow Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)

360 CCT Help: Applications


- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Damper End Switch
The Fan Status and Damper End Switch are available only for selection if
applicable (that is, if fan or damper is selected).

Modules (MADD Minimum Outdoor Air Fan/Damper)


The Minimum Outdoor Air Fan and/or Damper selection loads the following
modules in these Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• MOADPOS-SP (Minimum Outdoor Air Damper Position): This module is
loaded when an Adjustable Minimum Position is selected for the
Proportional Minimum OA Damper.
• MOAFLOW-SP (Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Setpoint): This module is
loaded when Variable Speed Injection Fan is selected.
• SYS-RESET (System Reset): This module is loaded when any of the
Manual Restart options are selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• MOA-F (Min Outdoor Air Flow): This module is loaded when Flow
Measurement (Scaled) is selected for the flow sensor type to support
Variable Speed Injection Fan control. The flow scaling is configured by
setting the AI object’s Output Range High and Maximum Value attributes.
• MOA-VP (Min Outdoor Air Velocity Pressure): This module is loaded
when Velocity Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type to
support Variable Speed Injection Fan control.
• MOAF-S (Min Outdoor Air Fan Status): This module is loaded when Min
Outdoor Air Fan Status is selected. This input is only for monitoring
purposes.
• MOAD-S (Min Outdoor Air Damper Status): This module is loaded when
Min Outdoor Air Damper End Switch is selected. This input is only for
monitoring purposes.
• MOAF-BA (Minimum OA Fan Belt Alarm BI): This module is loaded
when Alarm Management Belt Alarm is selected.
• MOAF-LO (Minimum OA Fan Lockout Switch BI): This module is loaded
when Alarm Management Lockout Switch is selected.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 361


Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Minimum OA Flow Calculation: This module is loaded when Velocity
Pressure (Pitot Tube) is selected for the flow sensor type with Variable
Speed Injection Fan.
• Min Outdoor Air Fan Status Alarm Determination: This module is loaded
when Fan Status Loss of Airflow Strategy is selected.
State Generation
• Minimum OA Fan Alarms: This module is loaded when Alarm
Management is selected.
Output Control
• Two Position Min OA Damper Control: This module is loaded when Two
Position Damper is selected.
• Proportional Damper Minimum OA Flow Control: This module is loaded
when Proportional Damper is selected.
• Constant Capacity Fan Minimum OA Flow Control: This module is loaded
when Single Speed Injection Fan is selected.
• Variable Capacity Fan Minimum OA Flow Control: This module is loaded
when Variable Speed Injection Fan is selected.
Outputs
• MOAD-C (Min Outdoor Air Damper Command): This module is loaded
when Two Position Damper is selected either by itself or supporting an
Injection Fan.
• MOAD-O (Min Outdoor Air Damper Output): This module is loaded when
Proportional Damper is selected.
• MOAF-C (Min Outdoor Air Fan Command): This module is loaded when
either injection fan option is selected.
• MOAF-O (Min Outdoor Air Fan Output): This module is loaded when
Variable Speed Injection Fan is selected.
See the Outputs section.

362 CCT Help: Applications


Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature (MADD)
This selection loads logic that reduces the intake of outdoor air when the
temperature is low. This reduction is accomplished by closing dampers, reducing
the volume differential (if Variable Capacity Return Fan Volume Matching control
is selected), and turning off or closing two-position fans or dampers.
If a preheat coil is located downstream of the mixing plenum (that is, it is in the
mixed air), the Preheat Temperature (downstream of the coil) serves as the process
variable for this control strategy. Otherwise, the Mixed Air Temperature serves as
the process variable.
The control logic for the low limit strategy is embedded directly into the Output
Control modules and activated simply by connecting the appropriate setpoint and
process variable. The logic takes precedence over all logic other than Emergency
Modes.
This selection is allowed if any of the Economizer Damper, Minimum Outdoor Air
Fan, or Minimum Outdoor Air Damper options is selected.

Modules (MADD Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature)


The Reduce Outdoor Air on Low Temperature selection loads the following
modules in these Control View columns:
Inputs
• MA-T (Mixed Air Temperature): This module serves as the low limit
process variable when a preheat coil is not located in the mixed air duct.
• PH-T (Preheat Temperature): This module serves as the low limit process
variable when a preheat coil is located in the mixed air duct.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• LT-SP (Low Limit Setpoint): This floating-point Constant allows
configuration of the upper threshold of the low limit control logic.
• LT-PB (Low Limit Proportional Band): This floating-point Constant
determines the range over which the outdoor air is reduced from its normal
operating values to the minimum achievable by the application.

Air Handling Unit Applications 363


Temperature Control Strategy (MADD)
These selections provide the logic for determining the setpoints of the Cold Deck
and Hot Deck temperature control loops. The Hot Deck Setpoint options apply
only if a Hot Deck heating coil is selected.
The selection options for Temperature Control Strategy are:
• Fixed Hot and/or Cold Deck Temperatures
• Hot and/or Cold Deck Temperature Reset from OA-T
• Hot Deck Temperature Reset from RA-T

Modules (MADD Temperature Control Strategy)


The Temperature Control Strategy selection loads the following modules in these
Control View columns:
Network Inputs
• CDT-SP (Cold Deck Temperature Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Fixed Hot and/or Cold Deck Temperatures or Hot Deck Temperature Reset
from RA-T is selected.
• HDT-SP (Hot Deck Temperature Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Fixed Hot and/or Cold Deck Temperatures is selected (and Hot Deck
heating coil is selected).
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when Hot Deck
Temperature Reset from RA-T is selected.
See the Inputs section.
Setpoint/Miscellaneous
• Cold Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset: This module is loaded when Hot
and/or Cold Deck Temperature Reset from OA-T is selected.
• Hot Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset: This module is loaded when Hot
and/or Cold Deck Temperature Reset from OA-T is selected (and Hot Deck
heating coil is selected).
• Hot Deck Discharge Air Setpoint Reset by RA-T: This module is loaded
when Hot Deck Temperature Reset from RA-T is selected (and Hot Deck
heating coil is selected).

364 CCT Help: Applications


Occupancy Control (MADD)
These selections provide the logic for Occupancy Mode Determinination.
The selection options for Occupancy Control are:
• Always Occupied
• Scheduled Occupancy
- Override Support
- Occupancy Switch (BI)
- Unoccupied Strategy
• Intermittent Night Operation
• Off during Unoccupied
If any options are selected for separate Occupied and Unoccupied Setpoints or
Temporary Occupancy, the Always Occupied option cannot be selected.

Modules (MADD Occupancy Control)


The Occupancy Control selection loads the following modules in these Control
View columns:
Network Inputs
• OCC-SCHEDULE: This module is loaded when Scheduled Occupancy is
selected; connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• OCC-OVERRIDE: This module is loaded when Override Support is
selected; connected to the Occupancy Mode Determination module.
• WC-C (WarmupCooldown command): This is an input for when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected.
• ZN-T (network Zone Temperature): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected and a physical Zone Temperature
input is not selected in the Optional Sensors group of the Control System
Selections.
• CLGUNOCC-SP (Night Cooling Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected.
• HTGUNOCC-SP (Night Heating Setpoint): This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected.
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• OCC-S (Occupancy Status): This module is loaded when Occupancy
Switch (BI) is selected and connected to the Occupancy Mode
Determination module.
See the Inputs section.

Air Handling Unit Applications 365


State Generation
• Always Occupied: This is an Enum Constant. In applications that are
always Occupied (when Enabled), the Always Occupied module is loaded
to provide a consistent source of data for other modules that require
Occupancy Mode information.
• Occupancy Mode Determination: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• WarmupCooldown Pass Through: This module is loaded when Scheduled
Occupancy is selected.
• DA-T Unocc Status Determination: This module is loaded when
Intermittent Night Operation is selected.
Outputs
• OCC-MODE (Occupancy Status Display): This module is loaded when
Scheduled Occupancy is selected and a Zone Temperature Sensor is also
loaded (either due to the Temperature Control Strategy or selected as an
Optional Sensor). It provides Occupancy Mode information for models of
the network sensor with a LED.
See the Outputs section.

366 CCT Help: Applications


Heat Recovery (MADD)
The selection options for Heat Recovery are:
Enable Type
• Dry Bulb
• Enthalpy
Enthalpy Wheel
• Single Speed
- Modulated Bypass Dampers
• Variable Speed
- Bypass Damper BO
• Wheel Status
- Loss of Status Strategy
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Alarm Management
- Lockout Switch
- Frequency Converter Fault
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Motor Overload Tripped
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Belt Alarm
• Automatic Restart
• Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
• Blocking Protection/Cleaning Mode: This option provides cleaning mode
functionality. If the wheel is off for an extended period, the wheel turns on for
a short time to keep the wheel free of dirt and dust.

Air Handling Unit Applications 367


Glycol Loop
• 3-Way Valve
- Proportional Actuator
- Incremental Actuator
• Circulation Pump
- Pump Status
• Loss of Status Strategy
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Alarm Management
• Lockout Switch
• Motor Overload Tripped
- Automatic Restart
- Manual Restart
- Unit Reset Switch (BI)
- Blocking Protection: This option provides monitoring of the command to
a motor (typically a pump). If the command is off for an extended period of
time (for example, 7 days), the motor starts for a short time (for example,
30 seconds). This feature prevents blocking (that is, it prevents the motor
from seizing up).

368 CCT Help: Applications


Modules (MADD Heat Recovery)
The Heat Recovery selections load the following modules in these Control View
columns:
Network Inputs
• HR-EN (Heat Recovery isAllowed)
See the Network Inputs section.
Inputs
• RA-T (Return Air Temperature): This module is loaded when either Enable
Type option is selected.
• RA-H (Return Air Humidity): This module is loaded when Enthalpy
Enable Type is selected.
• EA-T (Exhaust Air Temperature)
• EAHR-T (Exhaust Air Heat Recovery Temperature): This module is
loaded when Enthalpy Wheel is selected or when Glycol Loop is selected
but not a 3-Way Valve (Circulation Pump only). This input serves as the
low limit process variable.
• GLY-T (Glycol Temperature): This module is loaded when Glycol Loop
with 3-Way Valve is selected. This input serves as the low limit process
variable.
• HRW-S (Heat Recovery Wheel Status): This input is only for monitori